Abakus VCL

Abakus VCL
Delphi & C++Builder components for virtual instrumentation.
Copyright (c) 2012. All rights reserved.
Abakus VCL
Table of Contents VCL_Overview Symbol Reference

_AbDB Namespace Classes TAbFieldDataLink Class private published Structs, Records, Enums _AbDB.TDType Enumeration _AbFlash Namespace Classes TAbThread Class published TAbFlash Class published TTimerThread Class _AbInfo Namespace Classes TAbInfo Class published Functions _AbInfo.LoadAbakusInfo Function _AbInfo.tn Function Variables _AbInfo.AbInfo Variable Constants _AbInfo.Reg Constant _AbProc Namespace Functions _AbProc.AbIntToBin Function _AbProc.AbSingleToBin Function _AbProc.AbBinToLWord Function _AbProc.AbBinToInt Function _AbProc.AbBinToSingle Function _AbProc.AbSaveFormPos Function _AbProc.AbLoadFormPos Function
1 3
3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 12 12 15 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 ii
Abakus VCL _AbProc.AbRoundSector Function _AbProc.AbArrowDraw Function _AbProc.AbHorizScala Function _AbProc.AbDrawHPointer Function _AbProc.CalcTotalDigit Function _AbProc.AbLog10 Function _AbProc.AbPower Function _AbProc.AbCalcLogStr Function _AbProc.AbLogRangeStr Function _AbProc.AbRoundLogValue Function _AbProc.AbRemoveSign Function _AbProc.AbTextOut Function _AbProc.AbTextOutMultiLine Function _AbProc.AbTextOutMultiLine3D Function _AbProc.AbRotTextOut Function _AbProc.AbCharCount Function _AbProc.AbTextOut3D Function _AbProc.AbGetTextSize Function _AbProc.AbRangeStr Function _AbProc.AbGetMaxTokenSize Function _AbProc.AbGetMaxTokenSize2 Function _AbProc.AbStrToken Function _AbProc.GetBkUpImage Function _AbProc.AbMinInt Function _AbProc.AbMaxInt Function _AbProc.AbMinMaxInt Function _AbProc.AbRectIntersection Function _AbProc.AbInRect Function _AbProc.AbRectIsRect Function _AbProc.AbRectInRect Function _AbProc.AbBorder Function _AbProc.AbMultiBorder Function _AbProc.AbArrowSettings Function _AbProc.AbCenterPoint Function _AbProc.AbRotate Function _AbProc.AbGetRadius Function _AbProc.AbGetMaxRect Function _AbProc.AbExecuteFile Function _AbProc.AbDelphiIsRunning Function _AbProc.AbCBIsRunning Function _AbProc.AbEllipse3D Function _AbProc.Ab3DEllipse Function 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 36 37 38 38 38 39 iii
Abakus VCL _AbProc.AbCircleAtPoint Function _AbProc.AbGetAngle Function _AbProc.AbThumb Function _AbProc.AbInCircle Function _AbProc.AbMakeSquare Function _AbProc.AbMakeCenterSquare Function _AbProc.AbBtnBevel Function _AbProc.AbCircleGradFill Function _AbProc.AbGradFill Function _AbProc.AbSetBrightness Function _AbProc.AbCalcColor Function _AbProc.AbDrawLED Function _AbProc.GetComponentRoot Function Structs, Records, Enums _AbProc.toPos Enumeration _AbProc.TGradientStyle Enumeration _AbProc.TLEDPos Enumeration _AbProc.TLEDShape Enumeration Variables _AbProc.AppPath Variable _AbProc.VCLRoot Variable _AbProc.AbkRoot Variable Constants _AbProc.Company Constant _AbProc.pName Constant _AbProc.pVersion Constant _AbProc.Copyright Constant _AbProc.Mail Constant _AbProc.WWW Constant _AbProc.AbakusRootKey Constant _AbProc.AbakusKeyPath Constant _AbProc.crHand Constant _Arrow Namespace Functions _Arrow.AbArrowField Function _GClass Namespace Classes TAbPersistent Class published TAbOffset Class published 39 40 40 41 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 48 48 49 49 50 50 50 51 51 51 51 52 52 52 52 53 53 53 53 54 57 58 59 59 60
iv
Abakus VCL TAbBevelSettings Class published TAbLineSettings Class published TAbCustomScale Class TAbScale Class published TAbFlexScale Class published TAbText Class published TAbValInd Class published TIniSettings Class published TAbGraphicControl Class published TAbCustomControl Class published TAbTimerSpeedBtn Class published TAbSpinButton Class private published TArrowSettings Class published TLED Class published TAbBtnBevel Class published TAbGradSettings Class published TAbSBevel Class published TSectorSettings Class published TBarSettings Class published TSignalSettings Class published TMinMax Class published 60 61 62 63 63 64 65 67 68 70 71 72 73 75 76 77 77 78 79 80 80 81 84 84 91 92 94 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 103 104 107 108 110 111 112 113 v
Abakus VCL TChSettings Class published TAbAnalogGControl Class private published TAbAnalogCControl Class published TAbBinGControl Class published TScaleSettings Class published Structs, Records, Enums _GClass.TAngleMode Enumeration _GClass.THintOption Enumeration _GClass.TEnabledKey Enumeration _GClass.TBarStyle Enumeration _GClass.TBarDirection Enumeration _GClass.TBarOption Enumeration _GClass.TPos Enumeration _GClass.TPosH Enumeration _GClass.TPosV Enumeration _GClass.TBevelLine Enumeration _GClass.TMode Enumeration _GClass.TDialPointer Enumeration Types _GClass.TOverflowEvent Type _GClass.TLimitEvent Type _GClass.TSectorChangeEvent Type _GClass.THintOptions Type _GClass.TEnabledKeys Type _GClass.TBarOptions Type _GClass.THandleIniEvent Type _GClass.TNumGlyphs Type Variables _GClass.GroupUpdate Variable AbBar Namespace Classes TAbBar Class private AbBevel Namespace Classes 115 116 118 120 120 125 128 134 135 135 137 138 139 139 140 141 141 142 142 143 143 144 144 145 145 146 146 147 147 147 148 148 148 148 149 149 149 150 153 154 154
vi
Abakus VCL TAbCustomBevel Class TAbCustomIndBevel Class TAbBevel Class Structs, Records, Enums AbBevel.TAbBevelOption Enumeration Types AbBevel.TAbBevelOptions Type AbCBitBt Namespace Classes TAbColBitBtn Class published Structs, Records, Enums AbCBitBt.TFlashOption Enumeration AbCBitBt.TCheckedOption Enumeration Types AbCBitBt.TFlashOptions Type AbCBitBt.TCheckedOptions Type AbClock Namespace Classes TAbClock Class private Structs, Records, Enums AbClock.TClockOption Enumeration AbCompas Namespace Classes TAbCompass Class Structs, Records, Enums AbCompas.TCompassOption Enumeration Types AbCompas.TCompassOptions Type AbDBCtrls Namespace Classes TAbDBHSlider Class published TAbDBVSlider Class published TAbDBDial Class published TAbDBGearDial Class published TAbDBValueInd Class 155 156 156 157 157 158 158 158 159 159 162 169 169 169 170 170 170 171 171 171 172 173 173 174 175 175 178 178 179 179 179 180 181 184 185 189 190 193 193 197 197 vii
Abakus VCL published TAbDBHMeter Class published TAbDBVMeter Class published TAbDBFlexHMeter Class published TAbDBFlexVMeter Class published TAbDB270Meter Class published TAbDB180Meter Class published TAbDB120Meter Class published TAbDBBar Class published TAbDBVBar Class published TAbDBHBar Class published TAbDBThermometer Class published TAbDBTank Class published TAbDBLED Class published TAbDBColBitBtn Class published TAbDBRockerSwitch Class published TAbDBToggleSwitch Class published AbDial Namespace Classes TAbDial Class Structs, Records, Enums AbDial.TDialOption Enumeration Types AbDial.TDialOptions Type AbFlashT Namespace 200 201 205 205 209 210 211 211 212 213 216 217 219 220 223 223 227 227 231 231 235 235 239 240 243 244 245 245 249 250 251 252 253 254 254 254 257 257 258 258 258
viii
Abakus VCL Classes TAbFlashTimer Class published Functions AbFlashT.AddProc Function AbFlashT.DelProc Function AbFlashT.DelProcNo Function AbFlashT.AddControl Function AbFlashT.DelControl Function AbFlashT.DelControlNo Function AbFlashT.ClearFlashList Function Structs, Records, Enums AbFlashT.TFlash Record AbFlashT.TFlashFreq Enumeration Types AbFlashT.TAbFlashProc Type AbFlashT.PFlashRecord Type Variables AbFlashT.dynFlashList Variable AbFlashT.AFlashRecord Variable AbFlashT.AbFlashTimer Variable AbFlashT.NextSecPuls Variable AbFlashT.running Variable AbFlashT.tim Variable AbFlashT.OneSec Variable Constants AbFlashT.WM_FLASH Constant AbFlashT.Freq8Hz Constant AbFlashT.Freq4Hz Constant AbFlashT.Freq2Hz Constant AbFlashT.Freq1Hz Constant AbFlashT.Freq05Hz Constant AbFlashT.SyncOneSec Constant AbFlexMeter Namespace Classes TAbCustomFlexMeter Class TAbFlexHMeter Class TAbFlexVMeter Class AbGearDial Namespace Classes TAbGearDial Class 260 260 262 262 263 263 263 264 264 264 265 265 265 266 267 267 267 267 268 268 268 269 269 269 269 270 270 270 271 271 271 271 272 272 272 273 273 274 275 275 276
ix
Abakus VCL published AbGradient Namespace Classes TAbGradient Class private AbHBar Namespace Classes TAbHBar Class private Structs, Records, Enums AbHBar.THBarOption Enumeration Types AbHBar.THBarOptions Type AbHMeter Namespace Classes TAbHMeter Class private Structs, Records, Enums AbHMeter.THMeterOption Enumeration Types AbHMeter.THMeterOptions Type AbHSlide Namespace Classes TAbHSlider Class private Structs, Records, Enums AbHSlide.THSliderOption Enumeration Types AbHSlide.THSliderOptions Type AbInfDlg Namespace Classes TAbInfoForm Class TAbInfoEditor Class AbIRDlg Namespace Classes TAbIndRectDlg Class AbLabel Namespace Classes TAbLabel Class 279 280 280 281 282 282 282 283 286 287 287 288 288 288 289 289 293 294 294 295 295 296 296 296 300 301 301 302 302 302 303 303 303 304 304 304 304 305 305
Abakus VCL published AbLED Namespace Classes TAbLED Class AbMTrend Namespace Classes TAbMiniTrend Class Structs, Records, Enums AbMTrend.TMiniTrendOption Enumeration Types AbMTrend.TMiniTrendOptions Type AbNumEdit Namespace Classes TAbNumEdit Class private TAbNumSpin Class private Structs, Records, Enums AbNumEdit.TEditBase Enumeration AbNumEdit.TNumEditOption Enumeration AbNumEdit.TBaseProperties Record AbNumEdit.TNumEditState Enumeration Types AbNumEdit.TNumEditOptions Type AbOpHour Namespace Classes TTimeSetting Class published TAbOpHourCounter Class private Structs, Records, Enums AbOpHour.TOpHrOption Enumeration AbOpHour.TOpHrIndicate Enumeration Types AbOpHour.TOpHrOptions Type AbOpPnt Namespace Classes TIndRect Class TAbOperatingPoint Class AbPanel Namespace 307 311 311 311 312 313 313 314 314 315 315 316 317 317 320 324 327 327 327 328 328 329 330 330 330 331 331 331 332 335 339 339 340 340 340 341 341 341 341 342 xi
Abakus VCL Classes TAbPanel Class Structs, Records, Enums AbPanel.TAbPanelOption Enumeration Types AbPanel.TAbPanelOptions Type AbPrtTrd Namespace Classes TLegendCaptions Class private TLegend Class private published Structs, Records, Enums AbPrtTrd.TFormat Enumeration AbPrtTrd.TLegendPos Enumeration AbPrtTrd.TLegendOpt Enumeration AbPrtTrd.TPrtTrdOption Enumeration Types AbPrtTrd.TLegendOptions Type AbPrtTrd.TPrtTrdOptions Type AbRMeter Namespace Classes TAbRMeter Class TAbRScale Class TAb270Meter Class TAb180Meter Class TAb120Meter Class Structs, Records, Enums AbRMeter.TRMeterOption Enumeration AbRMeter.TMeterType Enumeration Types AbRMeter.TRMeterOptions Type AbSwitch Namespace Classes TAbSwitch Class published TAbRockerSwitch Class TAbToggleSwitch Class Structs, Records, Enums AbSwitch.TBtnOrientation Enumeration 343 343 344 344 344 345 345 346 346 347 348 350 351 356 356 357 357 358 359 359 359 359 360 361 363 364 367 369 372 372 373 373 374 374 375 375 376 377 379 380 380 xii
Abakus VCL
AbTank Namespace Classes TTankSettings Class published TAbTank Class private Structs, Records, Enums AbTank.TTankOption Enumeration AbTank.TTankStyle Enumeration Types AbTank.TTankOptions Type AbThMet Namespace Classes TAbThermometer Class private Structs, Records, Enums AbThMet.TThMetOption Enumeration Types AbThMet.TThMetOptions Type AbTrend Namespace Classes TTrendLimit Class private TRecInfo Class published TVAtCursor Class private published TAbTrend Class private published Structs, Records, Enums AbTrend.TTrendOption Enumeration AbTrend.SignRec Record Types AbTrend.TTrendOptions Type AbTrend.ChArray Type AbTrend.PSignRec Type AbVBar Namespace Classes TAbVBar Class
380 381 381 382 384 387 389 389 389 390 390 390 391 391 395 397 397 398 398 398 399 400 400 401 402 403 404 404 407 412 421 429 429 430 430 431 431 431 431 432 432 xiii
Abakus VCL private Structs, Records, Enums AbVBar.TVBarOption Enumeration Types AbVBar.TVBarOptions Type AbVCInd Namespace Classes TAbVCInd Class AbVInd Namespace Classes TAbValueInd Class private Structs, Records, Enums AbVInd.TValueIndOption Enumeration Types AbVInd.TValueIndOptions Type AbVMeter Namespace Classes TAbVMeter Class private Structs, Records, Enums AbVMeter.TAbVMeterOption Enumeration Types AbVMeter.TAbVMeterOptions Type AbVSlide Namespace Classes TAbVSlider Class private Structs, Records, Enums AbVSlide.TVSliderOption Enumeration Types AbVSlide.TVSliderOptions Type 435 437 437 438 438 438 439 439 440 441 441 444 445 445 446 446 446 447 447 451 453 453 454 454 454 455 455 459 461 461 461 462
Files
_AbDB.pas _AbFlash.pas _AbInfo.pas _AbProc.pas
463
464 464 465 465
xiv
Abakus VCL
_Arrow.pas _GClass.pas AbBar.pas AbBevel.pas AbCBitBt.pas AbClock.pas AbCompas.pas AbDBCtrls.pas AbDial.pas AbFlashT.pas AbFlexMeter.pas AbGearDial.pas AbGradient.pas AbHBar.pas AbHMeter.pas AbHSlide.pas AbInfDlg.pas AbIRDlg.pas AbkDBStd.pas AbkLib.pas abks.inc AbkStd.pas AbLabel.pas AbLED.pas AbMTrend.pas AbNumEdit.pas AbOpHour.pas AbOpPnt.pas AbPanel.pas AbPrtTrd.pas AbRMeter.pas
465 465 465 466 466 466 466 467 467 467 467 468 468 468 468 469 469 469 469 469 470 470 470 470 470 471 471 471 471 472 472 xv
Abakus VCL
AbSwitch.pas AbTank.pas AbThMet.pas AbTrend.pas AbVBar.pas AbVCInd.pas AbVInd.pas AbVMeter.pas AbVSlide.pas
472 473 473 473 473 473 474 474 474
Index
xvi
Abakus VCL
1 VCL_Overview
Abakus VCL component overview TAbClock ( see page 171) , Digital Time indicator see page 332) , operating hour counter
TAbOpHourCounter ( TAbLabel ( TAbBevel ( TAbPanel (
see page 305) , flicker-free Label see page 156) , bevel component see page 343) , beveled panel see page 281) , gradient component see page 80) , timer SpeedButton
TAbGradient (
TAbTimerSpeedBtn ( TAbSpinButton ( TAbNumEdit ( TAbNumSpin ( TAbValueInd ( TAbBar ( TAbVBar ( TAbHBar (
see page 81) , Spin-Button
see page 317) , numeric edit-field see page 324) , numeric edit-field with spin-buttons see page 441) , TAbDBValueInd ( see page 197) , digital value indicator
see page 150) , TAbDBBar (
see page 223) , Horizontal/vertical bar indicator see page 227) , Vertical bar + digital indicator see page 231) , Horizontal bar + digital indicator see page 235) , Vertical bar indicator with scale and digital
see page 432) , TAbDBVBar ( see page 283) , TAbDBHBar (
TAbThermometer ( Value-indication TAbTank (
see page 391) , TAbDBThermometer (
see page 384) , TAbDBTank (
see page 240) , Tank level indicator see page 201) , Horizontal meter see page 205) , Vertical meter + digital indicator see page 220) , Round meter (120) see page 217) , Round meter (180) see page 213) , Round meter (270)
TAbHMeter ( TAbVMeter (
see page 289) , TAbDBHMeter ( see page 447) , TAbDBVMeter (
TAb120Meter ( TAb180Meter ( TAb270Meter ( TAbCompass ( TAbVCInd (
see page 369) , TAbDB120Meter ( see page 367) , TAbDB180Meter ( see page 364) , TAbDB270Meter (
see page 175) , course, course should and deviation indicator with rotating scale
see page 439) , indicator wich combines "Course-, Pitch- and Roll indication" see page 341) , visualize the characteristic of aggregates y(x)
TAbOperatingPoint ( TAbMiniTrend ( TAbTrend (
see page 313) , 2 Channel Trend display
see page 407) , 8 Channel Trend display (recorder) see page 345) , Component to print a Trend or draw a trend to a TBitmap see page 190) , Dial (knob, Value adjuster) see page 193) , Gear dial (knob) component
TAbPrintTrend ( TAbDial (
see page 254) , TAbDBDial (
TAbGearDial ( TAbHSlider (
see page 276) , TAbDBGearDial ( see page 296) , TAbDBHSlider (
see page 181) , Horizontal Slider (Value adjuster) 1
1 TAbVSlider ( TAbLED ( switch) see page 455) , TAbDBVSlider (
Abakus VCL see page 185) , Vertical Slider (Value adjuster)
see page 311) , TAbDBLED (
see page 244) , LED indicator (can also be used as button,RadioButton and
TAbColBitBtn (
see page 159) , TAbDBColBitBtn (
see page 245) , two state button/switch see page 250) , two state switch see page 252) , two state switch
TAbRockerSwitch ( TAbToggleSwitch (
see page 377) , TAbDBRockerSwitch ( see page 377) , TAbDBToggleSwitch (
2.1 _AbDB Namespace
Abakus VCL
Classes
2 Symbol Reference
2.1 _AbDB Namespace
Contains TAbFieldDataLink ( Classes Name TAbFieldDataLink ( Structs, Records, Enums Name TDType ( see page 5) Description Data type of the Field-Link see page 3) Description TAbFieldDataLink helps a data-aware windowed control manage its link to a TField object and respond to data events. see page 3) which is used for the Data-Link of our DB-Aware components.
2.1.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbFieldDataLink ( see page 3) Description TAbFieldDataLink helps a data-aware windowed control manage its link to a TField object and respond to data events.
2.1.1.1 TAbFieldDataLink Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbFieldDataLink = class(TFieldDataLink); C++ class TAbFieldDataLink : public TFieldDataLink; File _AbDB ( Description TAbFieldDataLink helps a data-aware windowed control manage its link to a TField object and respond to data events. Members private Name FOnDataRead ( see page 4) Description Field for the OnDataRead ( see page 4) Event 3 see page 464)
2.1 _AbDB Namespace published Name OnDataRead ( see page 4)
Abakus VCL
Structs, Records, Enums
Description Occurs when the current record has been edited and the application moves from one field or record to another in a dataset associated with the data source component.
private Name FOnDataRead ( published Name OnDataRead ( see page 4) Description Occurs when the current record has been edited and the application moves from one field or record to another in a dataset associated with the data source component. see page 4) Description Field for the OnDataRead ( see page 4) Event
2.1.1.1.1 private
2.1.1.1.1.1 TAbFieldDataLink.FOnDataRead Field
Pascal FOnDataRead: TNotifyEvent; C++ TNotifyEvent FOnDataRead; Description Field for the OnDataRead ( see page 4) Event
2.1.1.1.2 published
2.1.1.1.2.1 TAbFieldDataLink.OnDataRead Property
Pascal property OnDataRead: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnDataRead; Description Occurs when the current record has been edited and the application moves from one field or record to another in a dataset associated with the data source component.
2.1.2 Structs, Records, Enums

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TDType ( see page 5) Description Data type of the Field-Link
2.2 _AbFlash Namespace
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.1.2.1 _AbDB.TDType Enumeration

Pascal TDType = ( dtInteger, dtSingle, dtBoolean, dtUnSupported ); C++ enum TDType { dtInteger, dtSingle, dtBoolean, dtUnSupported }; File _AbDB ( Members Members dtInteger dtSingle dtBoolean dtUnSupported Description Data type of the Field-Link Description Datatype of the Field is SmallInt, Integer or Word Datatype of the Field is Float Datatype of the Field is Boolean Unsupported Datatype of the Field see page 464)

Unit with our common threaded timer. Classes Name TAbThread ( TAbFlash ( see page 6) see page 6) see page 7) Description Thread class Our main Timer component A timer thread
TTimerThread (
2.2.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbThread ( TAbFlash ( see page 6) see page 6) see page 7) Description Thread class Our main Timer component A timer thread 5
TTimerThread (
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.2.1.1 TAbThread Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbThread = class(TThread); C++ class TAbThread : public TThread; File _AbFlash ( Description Thread class Members published Name Terminated ( published Name Terminated ( see page 6) Description True if thread is terminated see page 6) Description True if thread is terminated see page 464)
2.2.1.1.1 published
2.2.1.1.1.1 TAbThread.Terminated Property
Pascal property Terminated; C++ __property Terminated; Description True if thread is terminated
2.2.1.2 TAbFlash Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbFlash = class(TComponent); C++ class TAbFlash : public TComponent; File _AbFlash ( see page 464)
2.2 _AbFlash Namespace Description Our main Timer component Members published Name Enabled ( see page 7) see page 7) ThreadPriority ( published Name Enabled ( see page 7) see page 7) ThreadPriority (
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Enables the timer The Thread priority
Description Enables the timer The Thread priority
2.2.1.2.1 published
2.2.1.2.1.1 TAbFlash.Enabled Property
Pascal property Enabled: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Enabled; Description Enables the timer
2.2.1.2.1.2 TAbFlash.ThreadPriority Property

Pascal property ThreadPriority: TThreadPriority; C++ __property TThreadPriority ThreadPriority; Description The Thread priority
2.2.1.3 TTimerThread Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TTimerThread = class(TAbThread); C++ class TTimerThread : public TAbThread; File _AbFlash ( Description A timer thread 7 see page 464)
2.3 _AbInfo Namespace Members published Name Terminated ( published Name Terminated ( see page 6) see page 6)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description True if thread is terminated
Description True if thread is terminated
2.3 _AbInfo Namespace

Unit AbInfo ( Classes Name TAbInfo ( Constants Name Reg ( Functions Name LoadAbakusInfo ( tn ( Variables Name AbInfo ( see page 12) Description Class-variable which contains information about version and copyright. see page 11) see page 10) Description Function LoadAbakusInfo returns the "Abakus VCL info-class" Function tn, called each second. Not used yet Function tn is a dummy function and is not used yet. see page 12) Description String constant with reg-status information see page 8) Description Class which contains information about version and copyright. see page 12) contains info's about version and copyright.
2.3.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbInfo ( see page 8) Description Class which contains information about version and copyright.
2.3.1.1 TAbInfo Class

Hierarchy
2.3 _AbInfo Namespace Pascal TAbInfo = class(TPersistent); C++ class TAbInfo : public TPersistent; File _AbInfo ( Description see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Class which contains information about version and copyright. Members published Name Copyright ( Mail ( pName ( pVersion ( WWW ( published Name Copyright ( Mail ( pName ( pVersion ( WWW ( see page 9) see page 9) see page 10) see page 10) see page 10) Description Property which contains the copyright Property which contains the support email address Property which contains the application/package name Property which contains the application/package version Property which contains the application/package web address see page 9) see page 9) see page 10) see page 10) see page 10) Description Property which contains the copyright Property which contains the support email address Property which contains the application/package name Property which contains the application/package version Property which contains the application/package web address
2.3.1.1.1 published
2.3.1.1.1.1 TAbInfo.Copyright Property
Pascal property Copyright: string; C++ __property AnsiString Copyright; Description Property which contains the copyright
2.3.1.1.1.2 TAbInfo.Mail Property

Pascal property Mail: string; C++ __property AnsiString Mail; Description Property which contains the support email address
2.3 _AbInfo Namespace
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.3.1.1.1.3 TAbInfo.pName Property

Pascal property pName: string; C++ __property AnsiString pName; Description Property which contains the application/package name
2.3.1.1.1.4 TAbInfo.pVersion Property

Pascal property pVersion: string; C++ __property AnsiString pVersion; Description Property which contains the application/package version
2.3.1.1.1.5 TAbInfo.WWW Property

Pascal property WWW: string; C++ __property AnsiString WWW; Description Property which contains the application/package web address
2.3.2 Functions
The following table lists functions in this documentation. Functions Name LoadAbakusInfo ( tn ( see page 11) see page 10) Description Function LoadAbakusInfo returns the "Abakus VCL info-class" Function tn, called each second. Not used yet Function tn is a dummy function and is not used yet.
2.3.2.1 _AbInfo.LoadAbakusInfo Function

Function LoadAbakusInfo returns the "Abakus VCL info-class" Pascal function LoadAbakusInfo: TAbInfo; C++ TAbInfo LoadAbakusInfo();
10
2.3 _AbInfo Namespace File _AbInfo ( Returns Abakus VCL info-class (TAbInfo ( Description The returned class contains information such are Application/Package name Application/Package version Application/Package copyright note support mail address website link See Also _AbInfo.tn ( see page 11) see page 8)) see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Variables
2.3.2.2 _AbInfo.tn Function

Pascal function tn: Boolean; C++ Boolean tn(); File _AbInfo ( Returns Always return false Description Function tn, called each second. Not used yet Function tn is a dummy function and is not used yet. See Also _AbInfo.LoadAbakusInfo ( see page 10) see page 465)
2.3.3 Variables
The following table lists variables in this documentation. Variables Name AbInfo ( see page 12) Description Class-variable which contains information about version and copyright.
11
2.4 _AbProc Namespace
Abakus VCL
2.3.3.1 _AbInfo.AbInfo Variable

Pascal AbInfo: TAbInfo; C++ TAbInfo AbInfo; File _AbInfo ( Description Class-variable which contains information about version and copyright. see page 465)
2.3.4 Constants
The following table lists constants in this documentation. Constants Name Reg ( see page 12) Description String constant with reg-status information
2.3.4.1 _AbInfo.Reg Constant

Pascal Reg: string = 'Registered'; C++ AnsiString Reg = 'Registered'; File _AbInfo ( Description String constant with reg-status information see page 465)

Unit with some general used methods. Constants Name Company ( pName ( pVersion ( Copyright ( Mail ( see page 51) see page 51) see page 51) see page 51) Description Const Company contains the company information-string Const pName contains the program/package name Const pVersion contains the program/package version number Const Copyright contains the copyright string Const Mail contains the contact mail address 12
see page 52)
2.4 _AbProc Namespace WWW ( see page 52) see page 52) see page 52)
Abakus VCL Const WWW contains a link to our website Abakus VCL registry root key Abakus VCL registry key path Constant for a hand-cursor resource
AbakusRootKey ( AbakusKeyPath ( crHand ( Functions Name
see page 53)
Description see page 16) see page 17) see page 17) Function AbIntToBin converts an integer value to a binary string Function AbSingleToBin converts a single value to a binary string Function AbBinToLWord converts a binary string into a cardinal value Function AbBinToInt converts a binary string into an Integer value Function AbBinToSingle converts a binary string into an Single value Registry - method to store/read pos(x,y) of property editors Registry - method to restore pos(x,y) of property editors Method to draw round sectors Method to draw an arrow for round indicators Method to draw a horizontal scale Method to draw a horizontal pointer Function to calculate the total number of digits between DigitalFrom and DigitalTo. Calculates the number of digits, even if both signals are negative. Logarithm (base 10) Raises Base to any power. Calculates of steps for Logarithm scales Calculates of steps for Logarithm scales Rounds a logarithm value Function AbRemoveSign removes all "Sign" from a string Paints a string "text" on canvas "can" Paints a multiline string "text" on canvas "can" Paints a multiline string "text" on canvas "can" Paints a rotated string "text" on canvas "can" Counts the number of char "ch" within "text" Paints a 3D string "text" on canvas "can" Calculates the size of a string Function to alculate scale steps Calculates the max size of a token Calculates the max size of a token Separates a string into tokens Method to get a backup image Method to get the lower integer value Method to get the max integer value Method to limit an integer value Method to get an intersection rectangle Checks is a point is within a rectangle Checks weather two reactangles ar equal or not 13
AbIntToBin (
AbSingleToBin ( AbBinToLWord ( AbBinToInt (
see page 18) see page 18) see page 19) see page 19) see page 19) see page 20) see page 20) see page 21) see page 21)
AbBinToSingle ( AbSaveFormPos ( AbLoadFormPos ( AbRoundSector ( AbArrowDraw ( AbHorizScala ( CalcTotalDigit (
AbDrawHPointer (
AbLog10 ( AbPower (
see page 22) see page 22) see page 23) see page 23) see page 24) see page 24) see page 25) see page 26)
AbCalcLogStr ( AbLogRangeStr ( AbRemoveSign ( AbTextOut (
AbRoundLogValue (
see page 25)
AbTextOutMultiLine ( AbRotTextOut ( AbCharCount ( AbTextOut3D ( AbGetTextSize ( AbRangeStr (
AbTextOutMultiLine3D (
see page 26) see page 27) see page 27) see page 28) see page 29) see page 29) see page 28)
AbGetMaxTokenSize ( AbGetMaxTokenSize2 ( AbStrToken ( AbMinInt ( AbMaxInt ( GetBkUpImage (
see page 30) see page 30)
see page 30) see page 31) see page 31) see page 32)
AbMinMaxInt ( AbInRect (
AbRectIntersection ( AbRectIsRect (
2.4 _AbProc Namespace AbRectInRect ( AbBorder ( AbMultiBorder ( AbCenterPoint ( AbRotate ( AbGetRadius ( AbGetMaxRect ( AbExecuteFile ( AbCBIsRunning ( AbEllipse3D ( Ab3DEllipse ( AbGetAngle ( AbThumb ( AbInCircle ( see page 33) see page 34) see page 35) see page 35) see page 36) see page 36) see page 37) see page 38) see page 38)
Abakus VCL Checks weather one rectangle is within the other Adds a border to a rectangle Adds a border to a rectangle Method to store some general settings in an Array Calculates the centerpoint of a rectangle Rotates point A arround point B Calculates the max possible radius within a rectangle Checks if point x/y is within a rectangle, otherwise extends the rectangle Calls/opens a program, a website or mail client Checks if Delphi is running Checks if C++builder is running Draws a 3D ellipse Draws a 3D ellipse Draws a circle at point Calculates the angle of a point to another Checks if a point is in a circle Makes a square from a rectangle Makes a square from a rectangle Paint a button bevel Method to fill a circle with a gradient Method to fill a rectangle with a gradient Function to calculate a color brightness Calculates a color for gradients Method to draw a LED Function GetComponentRoot to return the component root directory
see page 34)
AbArrowSettings (
see page 36)
AbDelphiIsRunning (
AbCircleAtPoint (
see page 40)
AbMakeSquare ( AbBtnBevel ( AbGradFill ( AbCalcColor ( AbDrawLED (
AbMakeCenterSquare ( AbCircleGradFill ( AbSetBrightness (
GetComponentRoot ( Structs, Records, Enums Name toPos ( see page 46) TGradientStyle (
Description Type toPos, to adjust a text orientation Type TGradientStyle, to adjust a gradient style see page 46)
TLEDPos (
see page 48)
Type TLEDPos, to adjust the position of the LED indicator 14
2.4 _AbProc Namespace TLEDShape ( Variables Name AppPath ( VCLRoot ( AbkRoot ( see page 49) see page 50) see page 50) see page 48)
Abakus VCL Type TLEDShape, to select a LED-shape
Functions
Description String variable which contains the application path VCLRoot contains the path to the component directory AbkRoot contains the path to the Abakus VCL base-directory
2.4.1 Functions
The following table lists functions in this documentation. Functions Name AbIntToBin ( see page 16) see page 17) see page 17) Description Function AbIntToBin converts an integer value to a binary string Function AbSingleToBin converts a single value to a binary string Function AbBinToLWord converts a binary string into a cardinal value Function AbBinToInt converts a binary string into an Integer value Function AbBinToSingle converts a binary string into an Single value Registry - method to store/read pos(x,y) of property editors Registry - method to restore pos(x,y) of property editors Method to draw round sectors Method to draw an arrow for round indicators Method to draw a horizontal scale Method to draw a horizontal pointer Function to calculate the total number of digits between DigitalFrom and DigitalTo. Calculates the number of digits, even if both signals are negative. Logarithm (base 10) Raises Base to any power. Calculates of steps for Logarithm scales Calculates of steps for Logarithm scales Rounds a logarithm value Function AbRemoveSign removes all "Sign" from a string Paints a string "text" on canvas "can" Paints a multiline string "text" on canvas "can" Paints a multiline string "text" on canvas "can" Paints a rotated string "text" on canvas "can" Counts the number of char "ch" within "text" Paints a 3D string "text" on canvas "can" Calculates the size of a string Function to alculate scale steps Calculates the max size of a token Calculates the max size of a token 15
AbSingleToBin ( AbBinToLWord ( AbBinToInt (
AbBinToSingle ( AbSaveFormPos ( AbLoadFormPos ( AbRoundSector ( AbArrowDraw ( AbHorizScala ( CalcTotalDigit (
AbDrawHPointer (
AbLog10 ( AbPower (
AbCalcLogStr ( AbLogRangeStr ( AbRemoveSign ( AbTextOut (
AbRoundLogValue (
see page 25)
AbTextOutMultiLine ( AbRotTextOut ( AbCharCount ( AbTextOut3D ( AbGetTextSize ( AbRangeStr (
AbTextOutMultiLine3D (
AbGetMaxTokenSize ( AbGetMaxTokenSize2 (
2.4 _AbProc Namespace AbStrToken ( AbMinInt ( AbMaxInt ( see page 30) see page 30)
Abakus VCL Separates a string into tokens Method to get a backup image Method to get the lower integer value Method to get the max integer value Method to limit an integer value Method to get an intersection rectangle Checks is a point is within a rectangle Checks weather two reactangles ar equal or not Checks weather one rectangle is within the other Adds a border to a rectangle Adds a border to a rectangle Method to store some general settings in an Array Calculates the centerpoint of a rectangle Rotates point A arround point B
Functions
GetBkUpImage (
AbMinMaxInt ( AbInRect (
AbRectIntersection ( AbRectIsRect ( AbRectInRect ( AbBorder ( AbMultiBorder ( AbCenterPoint ( AbRotate ( AbGetRadius ( AbGetMaxRect ( AbExecuteFile ( AbCBIsRunning ( AbEllipse3D ( Ab3DEllipse ( AbGetAngle ( AbThumb ( AbInCircle (
see page 32) see page 33) see page 33) see page 34) see page 35) see page 35) see page 36) see page 36) see page 37) see page 38) see page 38)
see page 34)
AbArrowSettings (
see page 36)
Calculates the max possible radius within a rectangle Checks if point x/y is within a rectangle, otherwise extends the rectangle Calls/opens a program, a website or mail client Checks if Delphi is running Checks if C++builder is running Draws a 3D ellipse Draws a 3D ellipse Draws a circle at point Calculates the angle of a point to another Checks if a point is in a circle Makes a square from a rectangle Makes a square from a rectangle Paint a button bevel Method to fill a circle with a gradient Method to fill a rectangle with a gradient Function to calculate a color brightness Calculates a color for gradients Method to draw a LED Function GetComponentRoot to return the component root directory
AbDelphiIsRunning (
AbCircleAtPoint (
see page 40)
AbMakeSquare ( AbBtnBevel ( AbGradFill ( AbCalcColor ( AbDrawLED (
AbMakeCenterSquare ( AbCircleGradFill ( AbSetBrightness (
GetComponentRoot (
2.4.1.1 _AbProc.AbIntToBin Function

Function AbIntToBin converts an integer value to a binary string Pascal function AbIntToBin(Value: Integer; Digits: Integer): String; C++ AnsiString AbIntToBin(int Value, int Digits); File _AbProc ( see page 465)
16
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Parameters Parameters Value: Integer Digits: Integer Returns Binary string Description
Abakus VCL
Functions
Description The Value to convert Number of digits (1..32, 0= no leading zero's)
With AbIntToBin you can convert any integer value to a binary string. With the Digits parameter you adjust the number of digits in the resulting string. With digits = 0 the result string will not contain leading zeros. Example BinString := AbIntToBin(255, 0); // no leading zeros BinString contains '11111111' BinString := AbIntToBin(255, 16); // filled with leading zeros, 16 digits total BinString contains '0000000011111111'
2.4.1.2 _AbProc.AbSingleToBin Function

Function AbSingleToBin converts a single value to a binary string Pascal function AbSingleToBin(Value: Single; Digits: Integer): String; C++ AnsiString AbSingleToBin(Single Value, int Digits); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters Value: Single Digits: Integer Returns Binary string Description With AbSingleToBin you can convert any single value to a binary string. With the Digits parameter you adjust the number of digits in the resulting string. With digits = 0 the result string will not contain leading zeros. Description The Value to convert Number of digits (1..32, 0= no leading zero's) see page 465)
2.4.1.3 _AbProc.AbBinToLWord Function

Function AbBinToLWord converts a binary string into a cardinal value Pascal function AbBinToLWord(Value: String): Cardinal; C++ unsigned AbBinToLWord(AnsiString Value);
17
2.4 _AbProc Namespace File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters Value: String Returns Cardinal result Description see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Functions
Description The String-Value to convert
With AbBinToLWord you can convert any binary string into a cardinal value (0..4294967295).
2.4.1.4 _AbProc.AbBinToInt Function

Function AbBinToInt converts a binary string into an Integer value Pascal function AbBinToInt(Value: String): Integer; C++ int AbBinToInt(AnsiString Value); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters Value: String Returns Integer result Description With AbBinToInt you can convert any binary string into a Integer value (-2147483648..2147483647). Description The String-Value to convert see page 465)
2.4.1.5 _AbProc.AbBinToSingle Function

Function AbBinToSingle converts a binary string into an Single value Pascal function AbBinToSingle(Value: String): Single; C++ Single AbBinToSingle(AnsiString Value); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters Value: String Returns Single result 18 Description The String-Value to convert see page 465)
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Description
Abakus VCL
Functions
With AbBinToSingle you can convert any binary string into a Single value.
2.4.1.6 _AbProc.AbSaveFormPos Function

Registry - method to store/read pos(x,y) of property editors Pascal procedure AbSaveFormPos(frm: TForm); C++ AbSaveFormPos(TForm * frm); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters frm: TForm Description Registry - methods to store position(x,y) of property editors Used to store the position of the Abakus property editors to pop-up next time on the same position as before. Stores the x + y position. The location in registry is (AbakusRootKey ( see page 52))\(AbakusKeyPath ( see page 52))\(frm.ClassName) Description TForm, Abakus property-editor form name see page 465)
2.4.1.7 _AbProc.AbLoadFormPos Function

Registry - method to restore pos(x,y) of property editors Pascal procedure AbLoadFormPos(frm: TForm); C++ AbLoadFormPos(TForm * frm); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters frm: TForm Description Used to restore the position of the Abakus property editors to pop-up on the same position as before. Restores the x + y (AbakusRootKey ( see page 52))\(AbakusKeyPath ( see page position. The location in registry is 52))\(frm.ClassName) Description TForm, Abakus property-editor form name see page 465)
2.4.1.8 _AbProc.AbRoundSector Function

Method to draw round sectors Pascal procedure AbRoundSector(can: TCanvas; r: TRect; AlphaFrom: Single; Alpha: Single); 19
2.4 _AbProc Namespace C++
Abakus VCL
Functions
AbRoundSector(TCanvas can, TRect r, Single AlphaFrom, Single Alpha); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas r: TRect AlphaFrom: Single Alpha: Single Description Scale - functions Paints a sector from AlphaFrom to Alpha Description canvas the rectangle Start angle end angle see page 465)
2.4.1.9 _AbProc.AbArrowDraw Function

Method to draw an arrow for round indicators Pascal procedure AbArrowDraw(can: TCanvas; Alpha: Single; ArrowStartPos: array of TPoint; var ArrowActPos: array of TPoint; DRight: Boolean); C++ AbArrowDraw(TCanvas can, Single Alpha, array of TPoint ArrowStartPos, array of TPoint ArrowActPos, Boolean DRight); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas Alpha: Single ArrowStartPos: array of TPoint var ArrowActPos: array of TPoint DRight: Boolean Description Paints an arrow for round indicators. Description canvas Angle for arrow position Arrow in zero position actual Arrow position Turn right see page 465)
2.4.1.10 _AbProc.AbHorizScala Function

Method to draw a horizontal scale Pascal procedure AbHorizScala(can: TCanvas; Text: string; var r: TRect; Steps: Integer; SubSteps: Integer; Direction: Boolean); C++ AbHorizScala(TCanvas can, AnsiString Text, TRect r, int Steps, int SubSteps, Boolean Direction); 20
2.4 _AbProc Namespace File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas Text: string var r: TRect Steps: Integer SubSteps: Integer Direction: Boolean Description see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Functions
Description canvas the scale token-string the rectangle number of steps number of substeps direction of the scale
Paints a horizontal scale with variable number of steps and substeps. Normaly the scale is from left to right, with "Direction" true its from right to left.
2.4.1.11 _AbProc.AbDrawHPointer Function

Method to draw a horizontal pointer Pascal procedure AbDrawHPointer(can: TCanvas; r: TRect; PPT: Integer; w: Integer; h: Integer; Direction: Boolean); C++ AbDrawHPointer(TCanvas can, TRect r, int PPT, int w, int h, Boolean Direction); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas r: TRect PPT: Integer w: Integer h: Integer Direction: Boolean Description Paints a pointer on a horizontal scale. Normaly the scale from left to right, with "Direction" true from right to left Description canvas the rectangle Parts per thousand width of the scale height of the scale direction of the scale see page 465)
2.4.1.12 _AbProc.CalcTotalDigit Function

Pascal function CalcTotalDigit(DigitalFrom: LongInt; DigitalTo: LongInt): LongInt; C++ LongInt CalcTotalDigit(LongInt DigitalFrom, LongInt DigitalTo); File _AbProc ( see page 465)
21
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Parameters Parameters DigitalFrom: LongInt DigitalTo: LongInt Returns Number of Digits between DigitalFrom and DigitalTo Description
Abakus VCL
Functions
Description Lower digital value Upper digital value
Function to calculate the total number of digits between DigitalFrom and DigitalTo. Calculates the number of digits, even if both signals are negative.
2.4.1.13 _AbProc.AbLog10 Function

Logarithm (base 10) Pascal function AbLog10(argument: Extended): Extended; C++ Extended AbLog10(Extended argument); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters argument: Extended Description Log - functions Used to calculate the Logarithm value of "argument". Not all delphi versions has the Log10 function so we create our one... Description Input extendet value see page 465)
2.4.1.14 _AbProc.AbPower Function

Raises Base to any power. Pascal function AbPower(base: Extended; exponent: Extended): Extended; C++ Extended AbPower(Extended base, Extended exponent); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters base: Extended exponent: Extended Description Power raises Base to any power. For fractional exponents or exponents greater than MaxInt, Base must be greater than 0. Not all delphi versions has the Power function so we create our one... 22 Description base value exponent Value see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.15 _AbProc.AbCalcLogStr Function

Calculates of steps for Logarithm scales Pascal function AbCalcLogStr(ValueFrom: real; Steps: Integer; Format: string; Rev: Boolean): string; C++ AnsiString AbCalcLogStr(real ValueFrom, int Steps, AnsiString Format, Boolean Rev); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters ValueFrom: real Steps: Integer Format: string Rev: Boolean Returns String with the logarithm steps separated by ";" Description Calculates the steps for logaritm scales. Example With a ValueFrom=1e1, Steps=3 and Rev=false return value is "1e1;1e2;1e3;" With a ValueFrom=1e1, Steps=3 and Rev=true return value is "1e3;1e2;1e1;" Description the start value number of steps Value format reverse order (if true lowest value first) see page 465)
2.4.1.16 _AbProc.AbLogRangeStr Function

Calculates of steps for Logarithm scales Pascal function AbLogRangeStr(ExpFrom: Integer; ExpTo: Integer; Steps: Integer; Format: string; Rev: Boolean): string; C++ AnsiString AbLogRangeStr(int ExpFrom, int ExpTo, int Steps, AnsiString Format, Boolean Rev); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters ExpFrom: Integer ExpTo: Integer Steps: Integer Format: string Rev: Boolean Returns String with the logarithm steps separated by ";" 23 Description the start value the end value number of steps Value format reverse order (if true lowest value first) see page 465)
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Description
Abakus VCL
Functions
Calculates the steps from ExpFrom until ExpTo for logaritm scales.
2.4.1.17 _AbProc.AbRoundLogValue Function

Rounds a logarithm value Pascal function AbRoundLogValue(Value: real; var Exp: Integer): real; C++ real AbRoundLogValue(real Value, int Exp); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters Value: real var Exp: Integer Returns Rounded real Value Description Rounds to the next logarithm value Description the value the exponent value see page 465)
2.4.1.18 _AbProc.AbRemoveSign Function

Function AbRemoveSign removes all "Sign" from a string Pascal function AbRemoveSign(Text: String; Sign: Char): String; C++ AnsiString AbRemoveSign(AnsiString Text, Char Sign); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters Text: String Sign: Char Returns The string without "Sign" Description textfunctions Removes all "Sign" from the source text Example New_string := AbRemoveSign('teststring', 's'); Description the string source the Sign to remove see page 465)
24
2.4 _AbProc Namespace New_string contains 'tettring'
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.19 _AbProc.AbTextOut Function

Paints a string "text" on canvas "can" Pascal procedure AbTextOut(can: TCanvas; x1: Integer; y1: Integer; Text: string; Pos: toPos); C++ AbTextOut(TCanvas can, int x1, int y1, AnsiString Text, toPos Pos); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas x1: Integer y1: Integer Text: string Pos: toPos Description Paints a string "text" on a given position "x + y" with the orientation "toPos ( see page 46)" to canvas "can" Description the canvas x-position y-position the text to print the orientation see page 465)
2.4.1.20 _AbProc.AbTextOutMultiLine Function

Paints a multiline string "text" on canvas "can" Pascal procedure AbTextOutMultiLine(can: TCanvas; x1: Integer; y1: Integer; LineOffset: Integer; Text: string; Pos: toPos); C++ AbTextOutMultiLine(TCanvas can, int x1, int y1, int LineOffset, AnsiString Text, toPos Pos); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas x1: Integer y1: Integer LineOffset: Integer Text: string Pos: toPos Description Paints a multiline string "text" on a given position "x + y" with the orientation "toPos ( separator for the text-lines "|" is used. see page 46)" to canvas "can" As Description the canvas x-position y-position additional space between two text lines the text to print the orientation see page 465)
25
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.21 _AbProc.AbTextOutMultiLine3D Function

Paints a multiline string "text" on canvas "can" Pascal procedure AbTextOutMultiLine3D(can: TCanvas; x1: Integer; y1: Integer; LineOffset: Integer; Col: TColor; Col1: TColor; Col2: TColor; Text: string; Pos: toPos; _3D: Boolean); C++ AbTextOutMultiLine3D(TCanvas can, int x1, int y1, int LineOffset, TColor Col, TColor Col1, TColor Col2, AnsiString Text, toPos Pos, Boolean _3D); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas x1: Integer y1: Integer LineOffset: Integer Col: TColor Col1: TColor Col2: TColor Text: string Pos: toPos Description Paints a 3D multiline string "text" on a given position "x + y" with the orientation "toPos ( separator for the text-lines "|" is used. see page 46)" to canvas "can" As Description the canvas x-position y-position additional space between two text lines Color of the text shadow color 1 shadow color 2 the text to print the orientation see page 465)
2.4.1.22 _AbProc.AbRotTextOut Function

Paints a rotated string "text" on canvas "can" Pascal procedure AbRotTextOut(can: TCanvas; cp: TPoint; Angle: Single; Text: String; Pos: toPos); C++ AbRotTextOut(TCanvas can, TPoint cp, Single Angle, AnsiString Text, toPos Pos); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas cp: TPoint Angle: Single Text: String Pos: toPos Description Paints a rotated string "text" on a given point with the orientation "toPos ( see page 46)" to canvas "can" 26 Description the canvas center point rotation angle the text to print the orientation see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.23 _AbProc.AbCharCount Function

Counts the number of char "ch" within "text" Pascal function AbCharCount(text: String; ch: Char): Integer; C++ int AbCharCount(AnsiString text, Char ch); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters text: String ch: Char Returns Number of chars found Description Counts the number of char "ch" within "text" Description the string the char to find see page 465)
2.4.1.24 _AbProc.AbTextOut3D Function

Paints a 3D string "text" on canvas "can" Pascal procedure AbTextOut3D(can: TCanvas; x1: Integer; y1: Integer; Col: TColor; Col1: TColor; Col2: TColor; Text: string; Pos: toPos; _3D: Boolean); C++ AbTextOut3D(TCanvas can, int x1, int y1, TColor Col, TColor Col1, TColor Col2, AnsiString Text, toPos Pos, Boolean _3D); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas x1: Integer y1: Integer Col1: TColor Col2: TColor Text: string Pos: toPos _3D: Boolean Description Paints a 3D string "text" on a given position "x + y" with the orientation "toPos ( see page 46)" to canvas "can" Description the canvas x-position y-position Col, - Color of the text shadow color 1 shadow color 2 the text to print the orientation if true paint text 3D see page 465)
27
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.25 _AbProc.AbGetTextSize Function

Calculates the size of a string Pascal procedure AbGetTextSize(can: TCanvas; var b: Integer; var h: Integer; var CenterP: TPoint; Text: string); C++ AbGetTextSize(TCanvas can, int b, int h, TPoint CenterP, AnsiString Text); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas var b: Integer var h: Integer var CenterP: TPoint Text: string Returns The size and center point of a string in pixel Description Calculates the text size and the center point in pixel Description canvas returns width in pixel returns height in pixel returns center point (x,y) in text the string to calculate the size see page 465)
2.4.1.26 _AbProc.AbRangeStr Function

Function to alculate scale steps Pascal function AbRangeStr(SignalFrom: Single; SignalTo: Single; Steps: Integer; Format: string): string; C++ AnsiString AbRangeStr(Single SignalFrom, Single SignalTo, int Steps, AnsiString Format); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters SignalFrom: Single SignalTo: Single Steps: Integer Format: string Returns A string with the scale-step tokens, separated by ";" Description Calculates the step-strings for a scale. The return value is a String with step-tokens, separated by ";". Description Start value End value Scale steps Format string see page 465)
28
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.27 _AbProc.AbGetMaxTokenSize Function

Calculates the max size of a token Pascal procedure AbGetMaxTokenSize(can: TCanvas; var b: Integer; var h: Integer; Text: string); C++ AbGetMaxTokenSize(TCanvas can, int b, int h, AnsiString Text); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas var b: Integer var h: Integer Text: string Returns The maximal size of a token in pixel Description Calculates the text size aof a token in pixel Description canvas returns width in pixel returns height in pixel the string with tokens to calculate the size see page 465)
2.4.1.28 _AbProc.AbGetMaxTokenSize2 Function

Calculates the max size of a token Pascal procedure AbGetMaxTokenSize2(can: TCanvas; var b: Integer; var h: Integer; Text: string; Separator: Char); C++ AbGetMaxTokenSize2(TCanvas can, int b, int h, AnsiString Text, Char Separator); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas var b: Integer var h: Integer Text: string Returns The maximal size of a token in pixel Description Separates the tokens by delimiter "Separator" and calculates the maximal size of a token in pixel Description canvas returns width in pixel returns height in pixel the string with tokens to calculate the size see page 465)
29
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.29 _AbProc.AbStrToken Function

Separates a string into tokens Pascal function AbStrToken(var Text: string; Separator: Char): string; C++ AnsiString AbStrToken(AnsiString Text, Char Separator); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters var Text: string Separator: Char Returns The token and the rest of the string "text" Description Separates a token-string into tokens separated by "Separator" Description the string the separator char see page 465)
2.4.1.30 _AbProc.GetBkUpImage Function

Method to get a backup image Pascal procedure GetBkUpImage(can: TCanvas; var bkBmp: TBitmap; rect: TRect); C++ GetBkUpImage(TCanvas can, TBitmap bkBmp, TRect rect); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas var bkBmp: TBitmap rect: TRect Returns The backup-image bkBmp Description others Method to create a backup image from rectangle "rect" of Canvas Description Canvas the backup image the rectangle to backup see page 465)
2.4.1.31 _AbProc.AbMinInt Function

Method to get the lower integer value 30
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Pascal
Abakus VCL
Functions
function AbMinInt(x1: Integer; x2: Integer): Integer; C++ int AbMinInt(int x1, int x2); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters x1: Integer x2: Integer Returns returns the lower integer value Description Method to get the lower integer value of two input values (x1, x2) Description first value next value see page 465)
2.4.1.32 _AbProc.AbMaxInt Function

Method to get the max integer value Pascal function AbMaxInt(x1: Integer; x2: Integer): Integer; C++ int AbMaxInt(int x1, int x2); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters x1: Integer x2: Integer Returns returns the max integer value Description Method to get the max integer value of two input values (x1, x2) Description first value next value see page 465)
2.4.1.33 _AbProc.AbMinMaxInt Function

Method to limit an integer value Pascal function AbMinMaxInt(x1: Integer; Min: Integer; Max: Integer): Integer; C++ int AbMinMaxInt(int x1, int Min, int Max); File _AbProc ( see page 465) 31
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Parameters Parameters x1: Integer Min: Integer Max: Integer Returns returns the limited integer value Description Method to limit a integer value to min and max values
Abakus VCL
Functions
Description the value the minimal value the maximal value
2.4.1.34 _AbProc.AbRectIntersection Function

Method to get an intersection rectangle Pascal function AbRectIntersection(r1: TRect; r2: TRect; var rY: TRect): Boolean; C++ Boolean AbRectIntersection(TRect r1, TRect r2, TRect rY); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters r1: TRect r2: TRect var rY: TRect Returns returns true if intersection rectangle is valid Description Method to get an intersection rectangle of two rectangles. Returns true if there is a intersection of this two rectangles Description rectangle 1 rectangle 2 intersection rectangle see page 465)
2.4.1.35 _AbProc.AbInRect Function

Checks is a point is within a rectangle Pascal function AbInRect(x: Integer; y: Integer; r: TRect): Boolean; C++ Boolean AbInRect(int x, int y, TRect r); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters y: Integer r: TRect Description y position rectangle 32 see page 465)
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Returns returns true if pos x + y is within the rectangle Description Tests weather point x/y is in rectangle R or not.
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.36 _AbProc.AbRectIsRect Function

Checks weather two reactangles ar equal or not Pascal function AbRectIsRect(r: TRect; r2: TRect): Boolean; C++ Boolean AbRectIsRect(TRect r, TRect r2); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters r: TRect r2: TRect Returns returns true if reactangles are equal Description Checks weather two reactangles ar equal or not Description rectangle 1 rectangle 2 see page 465)
2.4.1.37 _AbProc.AbRectInRect Function

Checks weather one rectangle is within the other Pascal function AbRectInRect(r: TRect; r2: TRect): Boolean; C++ Boolean AbRectInRect(TRect r, TRect r2); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters r: TRect r2: TRect Returns returns true if reactangle r is fully in r2 Description Checks weather one rectangle is totally within the other Description rectangle 1 rectangle 2 see page 465)
33
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.38 _AbProc.AbBorder Function

Adds a border to a rectangle Pascal procedure AbBorder(var r: TRect; Border: Integer); C++ AbBorder(TRect r, int Border); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters var r: TRect Border: Integer Returns returns the rectangle with added border Description Adds a border to all sides of a rectangle Description the rectangle the border width see page 465)
2.4.1.39 _AbProc.AbMultiBorder Function

Adds a border to a rectangle Pascal procedure AbMultiBorder(var r: TRect; Left: Integer; Top: Integer; Right: Integer; Bottom: Integer); C++ AbMultiBorder(TRect r, int Left, int Top, int Right, int Bottom); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters var r: TRect Left: Integer Top: Integer Right: Integer Bottom: Integer Returns returns the rectangle with added border Description Adds individual borders to all sides of a rectangle Description the rectangle left border width top border width right border width bottom border width see page 465)
34
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.40 _AbProc.AbArrowSettings Function

Method to store some general settings in an Array Pascal procedure AbArrowSettings(var Field: array of TPoint; NoOfPoints: Byte; Options: Byte; Radius1: Byte; Radius2: Byte); C++ AbArrowSettings(array of TPoint Field, Byte NoOfPoints, Byte Options, Byte Radius1, Byte Radius2); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters var Field: array of TPoint NoOfPoints: Byte Options: Byte Radius1: Byte Radius2: Byte Returns returns array of tpoint with the settings Description Method to store some general settings in an Array of tpoint Description the array number of arrow points arrow options radius 1 radius 2 see page 465)
2.4.1.41 _AbProc.AbCenterPoint Function

Calculates the centerpoint of a rectangle Pascal function AbCenterPoint(r: TRect): TPoint; C++ TPoint AbCenterPoint(TRect r); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters r: TRect Returns Center point Description Calculates the centerpoint of a rectangle Description the rectangle see page 465)
35
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.42 _AbProc.AbRotate Function

Rotates point A arround point B Pascal function AbRotate(A: TPoint; b: TPoint; Alpha: Single; DRight: Boolean): TPoint; C++ TPoint AbRotate(TPoint A, TPoint b, Single Alpha, Boolean DRight); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters A: TPoint b: TPoint Alpha: Single DRight: Boolean Returns Rotated point Description Rotates point A arround fixed point B with the angle Alpha Description Point to rotate fix point angle of rotation direction of rotation see page 465)
2.4.1.43 _AbProc.AbGetRadius Function

Calculates the max possible radius within a rectangle Pascal function AbGetRadius(r: TRect): Integer; C++ int AbGetRadius(TRect r); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters r: TRect Returns Calculated radius Description Calculates the max possible radius within a rectangle e.g. to draw a circle totally within a rectangle Description the rectangle see page 465)
2.4.1.44 _AbProc.AbGetMaxRect Function

Checks if point x/y is within a rectangle, otherwise extends the rectangle
36
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Pascal
Abakus VCL
Functions
procedure AbGetMaxRect(x: Integer; y: Integer; var r: TRect); C++ AbGetMaxRect(int x, int y, TRect r); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters y: Integer var r: TRect Returns The rectangle Description Checks if point x/y is within a rectangle, otherwise extends the rectangle so that the point x/y is inside Description y point the rectangle see page 465)
2.4.1.45 _AbProc.AbExecuteFile Function

Calls/opens a program, a website or mail client Pascal function AbExecuteFile(const FileName: string; const Params: string; const DefaultDir: string; ShowCmd: Integer): THandle; C++ THandle AbExecuteFile(const AnsiString FileName, const AnsiString Params, const AnsiString DefaultDir, int ShowCmd); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters const FileName: string const Params: string const DefaultDir: string ShowCmd: Integer Returns A handle to the webbrowser or mail client or application Description Method to open a program, a website in your favorite browser or opens your mail client Example AbExecuteFile('http://www.AbakusVCL.com','','',SW_SHOWNOACTIVATE); Opens our website in your webbrowser AbExecuteFile('MailTo:webmaster@abaecker.com','','',SW_SHOWNOACTIVATE); Opens a new email to webmaster@abaecker.com Description the filename parameters default directory Show command see page 465)
37
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.46 _AbProc.AbDelphiIsRunning Function

Checks if Delphi is running Pascal function AbDelphiIsRunning: Smallint; C++ Smallint AbDelphiIsRunning(); File _AbProc ( Returns The delphi version number or 0 if not running Description Makes few steps to check if and wich delphi version is running see page 465)
2.4.1.47 _AbProc.AbCBIsRunning Function

Checks if C++builder is running Pascal function AbCBIsRunning: Smallint; C++ Smallint AbCBIsRunning(); File _AbProc ( Returns 1 if running, otherwise 0 Description Check if C++Builder is running see page 465)
2.4.1.48 _AbProc.AbEllipse3D Function

Draws a 3D ellipse Pascal procedure AbEllipse3D(can: TCanvas; var r: TRect; Color: TColor; Raised: Boolean); C++ AbEllipse3D(TCanvas can, TRect r, TColor Color, Boolean Raised); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas var r: TRect Description the canvas ellipse outer rectangle 38 see page 465)
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Color: TColor Raised: Boolean Description Draws a 3D ellipse within the rectangle r
Abakus VCL brush color draw raised
Functions
2.4.1.49 _AbProc.Ab3DEllipse Function

Draws a 3D ellipse Pascal procedure Ab3DEllipse(can: TCanvas; TopLeft: TPoint; cp: TPoint; dx: Integer; dy: Integer; GradBmp: TBitmap; PenCol: TColor; Raised: Boolean; DrawLine: Boolean); C++ Ab3DEllipse(TCanvas can, TPoint TopLeft, TPoint cp, int dx, int dy, TBitmap GradBmp, TColor PenCol, Boolean Raised, Boolean DrawLine); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas TopLeft: TPoint cp: TPoint dx: Integer dy: Integer GradBmp: TBitmap PenCol: TColor Raised: Boolean DrawLine: Boolean Description Draws a 3D ellipse at point cp the center point radius x radius y gradient bitmap pen color draw raised draw a line Description the canvas see page 465)
2.4.1.50 _AbProc.AbCircleAtPoint Function

Draws a circle at point Pascal procedure AbCircleAtPoint(can: TCanvas; Point: TPoint; Radius: Integer; PenCol: TColor; BrushCol: TColor); C++ AbCircleAtPoint(TCanvas can, TPoint Point, int Radius, TColor PenCol, TColor BrushCol); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas Point: TPoint Description the canvas center point for the circle see page 465)
39
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Radius: Integer PenCol: TColor BrushCol: TColor Description
Abakus VCL radius of the circle pen color brush color
Functions
Draws a circle at point "Point" with radius "Radius" and given pen / brush colors
2.4.1.51 _AbProc.AbGetAngle Function

Calculates the angle of a point to another Pascal function AbGetAngle(cp: TPoint; p: TPoint): Single; C++ Single AbGetAngle(TPoint cp, TPoint p); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters cp: TPoint p: TPoint Returns Angle in Description Calculates the angle of a point "p" to centerpoint "cp" Description centerpoint point see page 465)
2.4.1.52 _AbProc.AbThumb Function

Pascal procedure AbThumb(can: TCanvas; cp: TPoint; Size: Integer; Style: Integer; Horizontal: Boolean; Color: TColor); C++ AbThumb(TCanvas can, TPoint cp, int Size, int Style, Boolean Horizontal, TColor Color); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas cp: TPoint Size: Integer Style: Integer Horizontal: Boolean Color: TColor the color Description Description the canvas centerpoint size style see page 465)
40
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.53 _AbProc.AbInCircle Function

Checks if a point is in a circle Pascal function AbInCircle(x: Integer; y: Integer; rCircle: TRect): Boolean; C++ Boolean AbInCircle(int x, int y, TRect rCircle); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters y: Integer rCircle: TRect Returns True if the point is in circle Description Checks if point x/y is within the circle Description point y circle rectangle see page 465)
2.4.1.54 _AbProc.AbMakeSquare Function

Makes a square from a rectangle Pascal function AbMakeSquare(r: TRect): TRect; C++ TRect AbMakeSquare(TRect r); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters r: TRect Returns Thesquare rectangle Description Extens one side of a rectangle to make a square Description the rectangle see page 465)
2.4.1.55 _AbProc.AbMakeCenterSquare Function

Makes a square from a rectangle Pascal function AbMakeCenterSquare(r: TRect): TRect;
41
2.4 _AbProc Namespace C++ TRect AbMakeCenterSquare(TRect r); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters r: TRect Returns Thesquare rectangle Description Extens two side of a rectangle to make a square see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Functions
Description the rectangle
2.4.1.56 _AbProc.AbBtnBevel Function

Paint a button bevel Pascal procedure AbBtnBevel(can: TCanvas; var r: TRect; up: Boolean; filled: Boolean; FillCol: TColor); C++ AbBtnBevel(TCanvas can, TRect r, Boolean up, Boolean filled, TColor FillCol); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas var r: TRect up: Boolean filled: Boolean FillCol: TColor Description Paints a 3D button bevel Description canvas the rectangle up position paint filled fill color see page 465)
2.4.1.57 _AbProc.AbCircleGradFill Function

Method to fill a circle with a gradient Pascal procedure AbCircleGradFill(can: TCanvas; Rect: TRect; ColFrom: TColor; ColTo: TColor); C++ AbCircleGradFill(TCanvas can, TRect Rect, TColor ColFrom, TColor ColTo); File _AbProc ( see page 465)
42
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas Rect: TRect ColFrom: TColor ColTo: TColor Description Paints a gradient into a circle
Abakus VCL
Functions
Description canvas the rectangle gradient start color gradient end color
2.4.1.58 _AbProc.AbGradFill Function

Method to fill a rectangle with a gradient Pascal procedure AbGradFill(can: TCanvas; r: TRect; ColFrom: TColor; ColTo: TColor; Style: TGradientStyle); C++ AbGradFill(TCanvas can, TRect r, TColor ColFrom, TColor ColTo, TGradientStyle Style); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas r: TRect ColFrom: TColor ColTo: TColor Style: TGradientStyle Description Paints a gradient into a rectangle with selectable style Description canvas the rectangle gradient start color gradient end color the gradient style see page 465)
2.4.1.59 _AbProc.AbSetBrightness Function

Function to calculate a color brightness Pascal function AbSetBrightness(Color: TColor; PPH: Single): TColor; C++ TColor AbSetBrightness(TColor Color, Single PPH); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters Color: TColor PPH: Single Description the color percentage of brightness see page 465)
43
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Returns The calculated color Description Calculates a brigthness color
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.1.60 _AbProc.AbCalcColor Function

Calculates a color for gradients Pascal function AbCalcColor(ColFrom: TColor; ColTo: TColor; Steps: Integer; step: Integer): TColor; C++ TColor AbCalcColor(TColor ColFrom, TColor ColTo, int Steps, int step); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters ColFrom: TColor ColTo: TColor Steps: Integer step: Integer Returns The calculated color for this "step" Description calculated color Calculates a color gradient Description the gradient start color the gradient end color total number of steps actual step see page 465)
2.4.1.61 _AbProc.AbDrawLED Function

Method to draw a LED Pascal procedure AbDrawLED(can: TCanvas; r: TRect; Shape: TLEDShape; Col1: TColor; Col2: TColor); C++ AbDrawLED(TCanvas can, TRect r, TLEDShape Shape, TColor Col1, TColor Col2); File _AbProc ( Parameters Parameters can: TCanvas r: TRect Shape: TLEDShape Col1: TColor Col2: TColor Description canvas the rectangle the LED shape pen color brush color see page 465)
44
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Description Paints a LED indicator with different styles
Abakus VCL
2.4.1.62 _AbProc.GetComponentRoot Function

Function GetComponentRoot to return the component root directory Pascal function GetComponentRoot: String; C++ AnsiString GetComponentRoot(); File _AbProc ( Returns Path-string to the Abakus VCL component root directory Description Function GetComponentRoot reads the Abakus VCL registry RootDir and add the folder name according the compiler-defines. see page 465)

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name toPos ( see page 46) see page 46) TGradientStyle ( Description Type toPos, to adjust a text orientation Type TGradientStyle, to adjust a gradient style
TLEDPos (
Type TLEDPos, to adjust the position of the LED indicator Type TLEDShape, to select a LED-shape
TLEDShape (
45
Abakus VCL
2.4.2.1 _AbProc.toPos Enumeration

Pascal toPos = ( toTopLeft, toTopCenter, toTopRight, toMidLeft, toMidCenter, toMidRight, toBotLeft, toBotCenter, toBotRight ); C++ enum toPos { toTopLeft, toTopCenter, toTopRight, toMidLeft, toMidCenter, toMidRight, toBotLeft, toBotCenter, toBotRight }; File _AbProc ( Members Members toTopLeft toTopCenter toTopRight toMidLeft toMidCenter toMidRight toBotLeft toBotCenter toBotRight Description Type toPos, to adjust a text orientation Description Text orientation top-left Text orientation top-center Text orientation top-right Text orientation middle-left Text orientation middle-center Text orientation middle-right Text orientation bottom-left Text orientation bottom-middle Text orientation bottom-right see page 465)
2.4.2.2 _AbProc.TGradientStyle Enumeration

Pascal TGradientStyle = ( gsHorizontal1, gsHorizontal2, gsHorizontal3, gsVertical1, gsVertical2, gsVertical3, gsElliptic1, gsElliptic2, gsElliptic3, 46
2.4 _AbProc Namespace gsRectangle, gsDiamond1, gsDiamond2, gsTopLeft, gsTopRight ); C++ enum TGradientStyle { gsHorizontal1, gsHorizontal2, gsHorizontal3, gsVertical1, gsVertical2, gsVertical3, gsElliptic1, gsElliptic2, gsElliptic3, gsRectangle, gsDiamond1, gsDiamond2, gsTopLeft, gsTopRight }; File _AbProc ( Members Members gsHorizontal1 gsHorizontal2 gsHorizontal3 gsVertical1 gsVertical2 gsVertical3 gsElliptic1 gsElliptic2 gsElliptic3 gsRectangle gsDiamond1 gsDiamond2 gsTopLeft gsTopRight Description Type TGradientStyle, to adjust a gradient style see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Description gradient horizontal style1 gradient horizontal style 2 gradient horizontal style 3 gradient vertical style 1 gradient vertical style 2 gradient vertical style 3 gradient elliptical style 1 gradient elliptical style 2 gradient elliptical style 3 gradient rectangle style gradient diamond style 1 gradient diamond style 2 gradient top-left style gradient Top-right style
47
Abakus VCL
2.4.2.3 _AbProc.TLEDPos Enumeration

Pascal TLEDPos = ( lpLeft, lpRight, lpTop, lpBottom ); C++ enum TLEDPos { lpLeft, lpRight, lpTop, lpBottom }; File _AbProc ( Members Members lpLeft lpRight lpTop lpBottom Description Type TLEDPos, to adjust the position of the LED indicator Description LED position left LED position right LED position top LED position bottom see page 465)
2.4.2.4 _AbProc.TLEDShape Enumeration

Pascal TLEDShape = ( sRound, sArrowLeft, 48
2.4 _AbProc Namespace sArrowRight, sArrowUp, sArrowDown, sRectangle, sDiamondLeft, sDiamondRight ); C++ enum TLEDShape { sRound, sArrowLeft, sArrowRight, sArrowUp, sArrowDown, sRectangle, sDiamondLeft, sDiamondRight }; File _AbProc ( Members Members sRound sArrowLeft sArrowRight sArrowUp sArrowDown sRectangle sDiamondLeft sDiamondRight Description Type TLEDShape, to select a LED-shape see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Variables
Description LED shape round LED shape arrow to the left LED shape arrow to the right LED shape arrow up LED shape arrow down LED shape rectangle LED shape diamond-left LED shape diamond-right
2.4.3 Variables
The following table lists variables in this documentation. Variables Name AppPath ( VCLRoot ( AbkRoot ( see page 49) see page 50) see page 50) Description String variable which contains the application path VCLRoot contains the path to the component directory AbkRoot contains the path to the Abakus VCL base-directory
2.4.3.1 _AbProc.AppPath Variable

Pascal AppPath: string; C++ AnsiString AppPath;
49
2.4 _AbProc Namespace File _AbProc ( Description String variable which contains the application path see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Constants
2.4.3.2 _AbProc.VCLRoot Variable

Pascal VCLRoot: String; C++ AnsiString VCLRoot; File _AbProc ( Description VCLRoot contains the path to the component directory see page 465)
2.4.3.3 _AbProc.AbkRoot Variable

Pascal AbkRoot: String; C++ AnsiString AbkRoot; File _AbProc ( Description AbkRoot contains the path to the Abakus VCL base-directory see page 465)
2.4.4 Constants
The following table lists constants in this documentation. Constants Name Company ( pName ( pVersion ( Copyright ( Mail ( WWW ( see page 51) see page 51) see page 51) see page 51) Description Const Company contains the company information-string Const pName contains the program/package name Const pVersion contains the program/package version number Const Copyright contains the copyright string Const Mail contains the contact mail address Const WWW contains a link to our website Abakus VCL registry root key Abakus VCL registry key path Constant for a hand-cursor resource
AbakusRootKey ( AbakusKeyPath ( crHand (
see page 53)
50
Abakus VCL
Constants
2.4.4.1 _AbProc.Company Constant

Pascal Company: string = 'Hard- & Software A.Baecker'; C++ AnsiString Company = 'Hard- & Software A.Baecker'; File _AbProc ( Description Const Company contains the company information-string see page 465)
2.4.4.2 _AbProc.pName Constant

Pascal pName: string = 'Abakus VCL'; C++ AnsiString pName = 'Abakus VCL'; File _AbProc ( Description Const pName contains the program/package name see page 465)
2.4.4.3 _AbProc.pVersion Constant

Pascal pVersion: string = '390b30'; C++ AnsiString pVersion = '390b30'; File _AbProc ( Description Const pVersion contains the program/package version number see page 465)
2.4.4.4 _AbProc.Copyright Constant

Pascal Copyright: string = '(c) 1998-2011 A.Baecker, all Rights reserved.'; C++ AnsiString Copyright = '(c) 1998-2011 A.Baecker, all Rights reserved.'; File _AbProc ( see page 465)
51
2.4 _AbProc Namespace Description Const Copyright contains the copyright string
Abakus VCL
Constants
2.4.4.5 _AbProc.Mail Constant

Pascal Mail: string = 'support@abaecker.de'; C++ AnsiString Mail = 'support@abaecker.de'; File _AbProc ( Description Const Mail contains the contact mail address see page 465)
2.4.4.6 _AbProc.WWW Constant

Pascal WWW: string = 'http://www.AbakusVCL.com'; C++ AnsiString WWW = 'http://www.AbakusVCL.com'; File _AbProc ( Description Const WWW contains a link to our website see page 465)
2.4.4.7 _AbProc.AbakusRootKey Constant

Pascal AbakusRootKey: HKEY = HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE; C++ HKEY AbakusRootKey = HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE; File _AbProc ( Description Abakus VCL registry root key see page 465)
2.4.4.8 _AbProc.AbakusKeyPath Constant

Pascal AbakusKeyPath: String = 'SOFTWARE\Abakus VCL\Data\'; C++ AnsiString AbakusKeyPath = 'SOFTWARE\Abakus VCL\Data\';
52
2.5 _Arrow Namespace File _AbProc ( Description Abakus VCL registry key path see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Functions
2.4.4.9 _AbProc.crHand Constant

Pascal crHand = 5; C++ crHand = 5; File _AbProc ( Description Constant for a hand-cursor resource see page 465)
2.5 _Arrow Namespace

Arrow shapes for round meters Functions Name AbArrowField ( see page 53) Description Method with different arrow shapes
2.5.1 Functions
The following table lists functions in this documentation. Functions Name AbArrowField ( see page 53) Description Method with different arrow shapes
2.5.1.1 _Arrow.AbArrowField Function

Method with different arrow shapes Pascal procedure AbArrowField(typ: Integer; b: Integer; r: TRect; var Field: array of TPoint); C++ AbArrowField(int typ, int b, TRect r, array of TPoint Field); File _Arrow ( see page 465)
53
2.6 _GClass Namespace Parameters Parameters typ: Integer b: Integer r: TRect var Field: array of TPoint Description
Abakus VCL
Description arrow type number lenght rectangle for calculation of center point Array of TPoint with the arrow datas
Method used to create different Arrow shapes for round meters. You can add your own Arrows by adding another case construct with your own Point-Array Field description: Field[0].x = hibyte > no. of used points lobyte > Options,... not used yet Field[0].y = hibyte > radius of center-circle 1 lobyte > radius of center-circle 2 (behind 1) Field[1] = center of rotation Field[2..8] = points... with the procedue ArrowSettings you can set Field[0]... See Also _AbProc.ArrowSettings
2.6 _GClass Namespace

This file contains Abakus VCL general used Methods/classes. Classes Name TAbPersistent ( TAbOffset ( see page 58) Description Basic class derived from TPersistent extended with a change event. Class to adjust an offset to a calculated default position/size. Stores settings of a bevel. Stores settings for a line. General class to store scale settings. Class for scale settings Class for scale settings of a scale with variable scaling. Class to store settings for a text. Properties and methods to draw a value indicator. Settings for access to ini-files. Base class for Abakus indicators without windows handle Base class for Abakus controls with windows handle Speed-Button with Auto-repeat Component to Edit/adjust a Value with Spin Button Arrow settings of analog indicators Base class for LED-settings
TAbBevelSettings ( TAbLineSettings ( TAbCustomScale ( TAbScale ( TAbText ( TAbValInd ( TIniSettings ( TAbFlexScale (
TAbGraphicControl ( TAbCustomControl ( TAbTimerSpeedBtn ( TAbSpinButton ( TArrowSettings ( TLED (
see page 94)
54
2.6 _GClass Namespace TAbBtnBevel ( see page 95)
Abakus VCL Button bevel class
TAbGradSettings ( TAbSBevel (
see page 97)
Stores settings for Gradients Class to store Bevel settings
see page 99)
TSectorSettings ( TBarSettings ( TSignalSettings (
Class with settings for scale sectors Settings for Bar-indications Class with settings of an analog signal
see page 107)
TMinMax (
Class to store Min ( see page 114) and Max ( 113) Values of a signal Class with settings for one signal channel Base class for analog indicators
see page
TChSettings (
TAbAnalogGControl ( TAbAnalogCControl ( TAbBinGControl (
Base class for Analog Value ( see page 133) adjust components with keyboard support. Base class for binary indicators
see page 134)
55
2.6 _GClass Namespace TScaleSettings ( see page 135)
Abakus VCL Class with settings for a scale
Classes
Structs, Records, Enums Name TAngleMode ( THintOption ( TEnabledKey ( TBarStyle ( TBarOption ( TPos ( TPosH ( TPosV ( TBarDirection ( see page 139) see page 139) see page 140) see page 141) see page 142) see page 141) Description Automatic or manual adjustment of an angle. Options for automatically created hints. Set of allowed keys. Style of the bar indicator. Vertical or horizontal direction of the bar indicator. Options for Bar indicators. Type to adjust a position e.g.: position of an indicator label Type to adjust a vertical position e.g. horizontal position of a button label Type to adjust a vertical position e.g. vertical position of a button label Type to select inner-/outer line of a bevel Mode of the component. Used to change the reaction to a mouse click. The dial pointer shape.
TBevelLine ( TMode (
TDialPointer ( Types Name TOverflowEvent ( TLimitEvent (
Description see page 146) TOverflowEvent occurs when the value exceeds the nominal range. TLimitEvent occurs when the value exceeds the upper or lower limit. TLimitEvent ( see page 146) occurs when the value enter or leave a sector. Options for automatically created hints. Set of allowed keys. Options for Bar indicators. Event which occurs when a components need to read or write settings from/to an ini file Number of glyphs to represent different states of the button
TSectorChangeEvent ( THintOptions ( TEnabledKeys ( TBarOptions ( THandleIniEvent ( TNumGlyphs ( Variables Name GroupUpdate (
see page 148)
Description see page 149) TAbBinGraphicControl update of a Group
56
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbPersistent ( TAbOffset ( see page 58) Description Basic class derived from TPersistent extended with a change event. Class to adjust an offset to a calculated default position/size. Stores settings of a bevel. Stores settings for a line. General class to store scale settings. Class for scale settings Class for scale settings of a scale with variable scaling. Class to store settings for a text. Properties and methods to draw a value indicator. Settings for access to ini-files. Base class for Abakus indicators without windows handle Base class for Abakus controls with windows handle Speed-Button with Auto-repeat Component to Edit/adjust a Value with Spin Button Arrow settings of analog indicators Base class for LED-settings Button bevel class
TAbBevelSettings ( TAbLineSettings ( TAbCustomScale ( TAbScale ( TAbText ( TAbValInd ( TIniSettings ( TAbFlexScale (
TAbGraphicControl ( TAbCustomControl ( TAbTimerSpeedBtn ( TAbSpinButton ( TArrowSettings ( TLED ( TAbBtnBevel (
see page 81) see page 91) see page 95)
see page 94)
TAbGradSettings ( TAbSBevel (
see page 97)
Stores settings for Gradients Class to store Bevel settings
see page 99)
TSectorSettings (
see page 103)
Class with settings for scale sectors 57
2.6 _GClass Namespace TBarSettings ( see page 107) see page 110)
Abakus VCL Settings for Bar-indications Class with settings of an analog signal
Classes
TSignalSettings (
TMinMax (
Class to store Min ( see page 114) and Max ( 113) Values of a signal Class with settings for one signal channel Base class for analog indicators
see page
TChSettings (
TAbAnalogGControl ( TAbAnalogCControl ( TAbBinGControl ( TScaleSettings (
Base class for Analog Value ( see page 133) adjust components with keyboard support. Base class for binary indicators Class with settings for a scale
2.6.1.1 TAbPersistent Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbPersistent = class(TPersistent); C++ class TAbPersistent : public TPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Basic class derived from TPersistent extended with a change event. Members published Name OnChange ( see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 465)
58
2.6 _GClass Namespace published Name OnChange ( see page 59)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done.
2.6.1.1.1 published
2.6.1.1.1.1 TAbPersistent.OnChange Property
Pascal property OnChange: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnChange; Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done.
2.6.1.2 TAbOffset Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbOffset = class(TAbPersistent); C++ class TAbOffset : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Class to adjust an offset to a calculated default position/size. Members published Name OnChange ( TAbOffset Class Name Bottom ( Left ( Right ( Top ( published Name OnChange ( TAbOffset Class Name Bottom ( see page 60) Description Bottom offset property 59 see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 60) see page 60) see page 60) see page 60) Description Bottom offset property Left offset property Right offset property Top offset property see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 465)
2.6 _GClass Namespace Left ( Right ( Top ( see page 60) see page 60) see page 60)
Abakus VCL Left offset property Right offset property Top offset property
Classes
2.6.1.2.1 published
2.6.1.2.1.1 TAbOffset.Bottom Property
Pascal property Bottom: Integer; C++ __property int Bottom; Description Bottom offset property
2.6.1.2.1.2 TAbOffset.Left Property

Pascal property Left: Integer; C++ __property int Left; Description Left offset property
2.6.1.2.1.3 TAbOffset.Right Property

Pascal property Right: Integer; C++ __property int Right; Description Right offset property
2.6.1.2.1.4 TAbOffset.Top Property

Pascal property Top: Integer; C++ __property int Top; Description Top offset property
2.6.1.3 TAbBevelSettings Class

Hierarchy
60
2.6 _GClass Namespace Pascal TAbBevelSettings = class(TAbPersistent); C++
Abakus VCL
Classes
class TAbBevelSettings : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Stores settings of a bevel. Members published Name OnChange ( TAbBevelSettings Class Name ColorFrom ( ColorTo ( Width ( published Name OnChange ( TAbBevelSettings Class Name ColorFrom ( ColorTo ( Width ( see page 61) see page 61) see page 62) Description From-Color for gradient filled bevel. To-Color for gradient filled bevel. Width of the bevel. see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 61) see page 61) see page 62) Description From-Color for gradient filled bevel. To-Color for gradient filled bevel. Width of the bevel. see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 465)
2.6.1.3.1 published
2.6.1.3.1.1 TAbBevelSettings.ColorFrom Property
Pascal property ColorFrom: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorFrom; Description From-Color for gradient filled bevel.
2.6.1.3.1.2 TAbBevelSettings.ColorTo Property

Pascal property ColorTo: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorTo;
61
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description To-Color for gradient filled bevel.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.3.1.3 TAbBevelSettings.Width Property

Pascal property Width: Integer; C++ __property int Width; Description Width of the bevel.
2.6.1.4 TAbLineSettings Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbLineSettings = class(TAbPersistent); C++ class TAbLineSettings : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Stores settings for a line. Members published Name OnChange ( TAbLineSettings Class Name Length ( Offset ( Pen ( Visible ( published Name OnChange ( TAbLineSettings Class Name Length ( Offset ( Pen ( Visible ( see page 63) see page 63) see page 63) see page 63) Description Lenght of the line. Line offset. Pen which is used to paint the line. Visibility of the line. 62 see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 63) see page 63) see page 63) see page 63) Description Lenght of the line. Line offset. Pen which is used to paint the line. Visibility of the line. see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.4.1 published
2.6.1.4.1.1 TAbLineSettings.Length Property
Pascal property Length: Integer; C++ __property int Length; Description Lenght of the line.
2.6.1.4.1.2 TAbLineSettings.Offset Property

Pascal property Offset: Integer; C++ __property int Offset; Description Line offset.
2.6.1.4.1.3 TAbLineSettings.Pen Property

Pascal property Pen: TPen; C++ __property TPen Pen; Description Pen which is used to paint the line.
2.6.1.4.1.4 TAbLineSettings.Visible Property

Pascal property Visible: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Visible; Description Visibility of the line.
2.6.1.5 TAbCustomScale Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbCustomScale = class(TAbPersistent);
63
2.6 _GClass Namespace C++
Abakus VCL
Classes
class TAbCustomScale : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description General class to store scale settings. Members published Name OnChange ( published Name OnChange ( see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 465)
2.6.1.6 TAbScale Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbScale = class(TAbCustomScale); C++ class TAbScale : public TAbCustomScale; File _GClass ( Description Class for scale settings Members published Name OnChange ( TAbScale Class Name Angle ( Font ( see page 65) see page 65) see page 66) see page 66) see page 66) see page 65) AngleMode ( StepLines ( Text ( Description Text angel of the scale numbers. Angle mode for the scale numbers. Font of the scale numbers. Settings for the step lines. Settings for the sub-step lines. Delimerted Text for the scale numbers. Alignment of the scale numbers. Horizontal offset for the scale numbers. Vertical offset for the scale numbers. see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 465)
SubStepLines ( TextAlignment ( TextOffsetX ( TextOffsetY (
64
2.6 _GClass Namespace published Name OnChange ( TAbScale Class Name Angle ( Font ( see page 65) see page 65) see page 66) see page 66) see page 66) see page 65) AngleMode ( StepLines ( Text ( see page 59)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Text angel of the scale numbers. Angle mode for the scale numbers. Font of the scale numbers. Settings for the step lines. Settings for the sub-step lines. Delimerted Text for the scale numbers. Alignment of the scale numbers. Horizontal offset for the scale numbers. Vertical offset for the scale numbers.
2.6.1.6.1 published
2.6.1.6.1.1 TAbScale.Angle Property
Pascal property Angle; C++ __property Angle; Description Text angel of the scale numbers.
2.6.1.6.1.2 TAbScale.AngleMode Property

Pascal property AngleMode; C++ __property AngleMode; Description Angle mode for the scale numbers.
2.6.1.6.1.3 TAbScale.Font Property

Pascal property Font; C++ __property Font; Description Font of the scale numbers.
65
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.6.1.4 TAbScale.StepLines Property

Pascal property StepLines; C++ __property StepLines; Description Settings for the step lines.
2.6.1.6.1.5 TAbScale.SubStepLines Property

Pascal property SubStepLines; C++ __property SubStepLines; Description Settings for the sub-step lines.
2.6.1.6.1.6 TAbScale.Text Property

Pascal property Text; C++ __property Text; Description Delimerted Text for the scale numbers.
2.6.1.6.1.7 TAbScale.TextAlignment Property

Pascal property TextAlignment; C++ __property TextAlignment; Description Alignment of the scale numbers.
2.6.1.6.1.8 TAbScale.TextOffsetX Property

Pascal property TextOffsetX; C++ __property TextOffsetX; Description Horizontal offset for the scale numbers.
66
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.6.1.9 TAbScale.TextOffsetY Property

Pascal property TextOffsetY; C++ __property TextOffsetY; Description Vertical offset for the scale numbers.
2.6.1.7 TAbFlexScale Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbFlexScale = class(TAbCustomScale); C++ class TAbFlexScale : public TAbCustomScale; File _GClass ( Description Class for scale settings of a scale with variable scaling. Members published Name OnChange ( TAbFlexScale Class Name Angle ( Font ( see page 68) see page 68) see page 68) see page 69) see page 69) see page 69) see page 69) see page 69) see page 70) see page 70) see page 70) see page 68) AngleMode ( FormatStr ( StepLines ( StepMulti ( SubStepAt ( SubStepsVis ( TextAlignment ( TextOffsetX ( TextOffsetY ( published Name OnChange ( see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. Description Text angel of the scale numbers. Angle mode for the scale numbers. Font of the scale numbers. Format string for the scale numbers. Settings for the step lines. Draw steps at Multible of Substeps Draw substeps at Value (+ multible of) Settings for the sub-step lines. Number of visible substeps Alignment of the scale numbers. Horizontal offset for the scale numbers. Vertical offset for the scale numbers. see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 465)
SubStepLines (
67
2.6 _GClass Namespace TAbFlexScale Class Name Angle ( Font ( see page 68) see page 68) see page 68) see page 69) see page 69) see page 69) see page 69) see page 69) see page 70) see page 70) see page 70) see page 68) AngleMode ( FormatStr ( StepLines ( StepMulti ( SubStepAt ( SubStepsVis ( TextAlignment ( TextOffsetX ( TextOffsetY (
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Text angel of the scale numbers. Angle mode for the scale numbers. Font of the scale numbers. Format string for the scale numbers. Settings for the step lines. Draw steps at Multible of Substeps Draw substeps at Value (+ multible of) Settings for the sub-step lines. Number of visible substeps Alignment of the scale numbers. Horizontal offset for the scale numbers. Vertical offset for the scale numbers.
SubStepLines (
2.6.1.7.1 published
2.6.1.7.1.1 TAbFlexScale.Angle Property
Pascal property Angle; C++ __property Angle; Description Text angel of the scale numbers.
2.6.1.7.1.2 TAbFlexScale.AngleMode Property

Pascal property AngleMode; C++ __property AngleMode; Description Angle mode for the scale numbers.
2.6.1.7.1.3 TAbFlexScale.Font Property

Pascal property Font; C++ __property Font; Description Font of the scale numbers.
2.6.1.7.1.4 TAbFlexScale.FormatStr Property

Pascal property FormatStr; 68
2.6 _GClass Namespace C++ __property FormatStr; Description Format string for the scale numbers.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.7.1.5 TAbFlexScale.StepLines Property

Pascal property StepLines; C++ __property StepLines; Description Settings for the step lines.
2.6.1.7.1.6 TAbFlexScale.StepMulti Property

Pascal property StepMulti: Integer; C++ __property int StepMulti; Description Draw steps at Multible of Substeps
2.6.1.7.1.7 TAbFlexScale.SubStepAt Property

Pascal property SubStepAt: Single; C++ __property Single SubStepAt; Description Draw substeps at Value (+ multible of)
2.6.1.7.1.8 TAbFlexScale.SubStepLines Property

Pascal property SubStepLines; C++ __property SubStepLines; Description Settings for the sub-step lines.
2.6.1.7.1.9 TAbFlexScale.SubStepsVis Property

Pascal property SubStepsVis: Integer; C++ __property int SubStepsVis;
69
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description Number of visible substeps
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.7.1.10 TAbFlexScale.TextAlignment Property

Pascal property TextAlignment; C++ __property TextAlignment; Description Alignment of the scale numbers.
2.6.1.7.1.11 TAbFlexScale.TextOffsetX Property

Pascal property TextOffsetX; C++ __property TextOffsetX; Description Horizontal offset for the scale numbers.
2.6.1.7.1.12 TAbFlexScale.TextOffsetY Property

Pascal property TextOffsetY; C++ __property TextOffsetY; Description Vertical offset for the scale numbers.
2.6.1.8 TAbText Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbText = class(TAbPersistent); C++ class TAbText : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Class to store settings for a text. see page 465)
70
2.6 _GClass Namespace Members published Name OnChange ( TAbText Class Name Font ( see page 71) see page 71) see page 72) OffsetX ( OffsetY ( Pos ( Text ( Visible ( published Name OnChange ( TAbText Class Name Font ( see page 71) see page 71) see page 72) OffsetX ( OffsetY ( Pos ( Text ( Visible ( see page 59) see page 59)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Font of the text. Text ( Text ( see page 72) horizontal offset. see page 72) vertical offset.
Position of the text. The text to display. Visibility of the text.
Description Font of the text. Text ( Text ( see page 72) horizontal offset. see page 72) vertical offset.
Position of the text. The text to display. Visibility of the text.
2.6.1.8.1 published
2.6.1.8.1.1 TAbText.Font Property
Pascal property Font: TFont; C++ __property TFont Font; Description Font of the text.
2.6.1.8.1.2 TAbText.OffsetX Property

Pascal property OffsetX: Integer; C++ __property int OffsetX; Description Text ( see page 72) horizontal offset.
71
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.8.1.3 TAbText.OffsetY Property

Pascal property OffsetY: Integer; C++ __property int OffsetY; Description Text ( see page 72) vertical offset.
2.6.1.8.1.4 TAbText.Pos Property

Pascal property Pos: toPos; C++ __property toPos Pos; Description Position of the text.
2.6.1.8.1.5 TAbText.Text Property

Pascal property Text: String; C++ __property AnsiString Text; Description The text to display.
2.6.1.8.1.6 TAbText.Visible Property

Pascal property Visible: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Visible; Description Visibility of the text.
2.6.1.9 TAbValInd Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbValInd = class(TAbPersistent); C++ class TAbValInd : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( see page 465) 72
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description Properties and methods to draw a value indicator. Members published Name OnChange ( TAbValInd Class Name Bevel ( Caption ( Color ( Font ( see page 73) see page 74) see page 74) see page 74) see page 74) see page 74) see page 75) see page 75) see page 75) see page 59)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Bevel of the Value indication. Caption of the Value indication. Color of the Value indication. Font of the Value indication. Format string for the Value indication. Horizontal offset of the Value indication. Vertical offset of the Value indication. Space between Value text and bevel. Visibility of the Value indication.
FormatStr ( OffsetX ( OffsetY ( Visible ( published Name OnChange ( TAbValInd Class Name Bevel ( Caption ( Color ( Font (
TxtSpacing (
Description see page 59) Event wich is used to inform that changes are done.
Description see page 73) see page 74) see page 74) see page 74) see page 74) see page 74) see page 75) see page 75) see page 75) Bevel of the Value indication. Caption of the Value indication. Color of the Value indication. Font of the Value indication. Format string for the Value indication. Horizontal offset of the Value indication. Vertical offset of the Value indication. Space between Value text and bevel. Visibility of the Value indication.
FormatStr ( OffsetX ( OffsetY ( Visible (
TxtSpacing (
2.6.1.9.1 published
2.6.1.9.1.1 TAbValInd.Bevel Property
Pascal property Bevel: TAbBevelSettings; C++ __property TAbBevelSettings Bevel; Description Bevel of the Value indication.
73
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.9.1.2 TAbValInd.Caption Property

Pascal property Caption: TAbText; C++ __property TAbText Caption; Description Caption of the Value indication.
2.6.1.9.1.3 TAbValInd.Color Property

Pascal property Color: TColor; C++ __property TColor Color; Description Color of the Value indication.
2.6.1.9.1.4 TAbValInd.Font Property

Pascal property Font: TFont; C++ __property TFont Font; Description Font of the Value indication.
2.6.1.9.1.5 TAbValInd.FormatStr Property

Pascal property FormatStr: String; C++ __property AnsiString FormatStr; Description Format string for the Value indication.
2.6.1.9.1.6 TAbValInd.OffsetX Property

Pascal property OffsetX: Integer; C++ __property int OffsetX; Description Horizontal offset of the Value indication.
74
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.9.1.7 TAbValInd.OffsetY Property

Pascal property OffsetY: Integer; C++ __property int OffsetY; Description Vertical offset of the Value indication.
2.6.1.9.1.8 TAbValInd.TxtSpacing Property

Pascal property TxtSpacing: TAbOffset; C++ __property TAbOffset TxtSpacing; Description Space between Value text and bevel.
2.6.1.9.1.9 TAbValInd.Visible Property

Pascal property Visible: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Visible; Description Visibility of the Value indication.
2.6.1.10 TIniSettings Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TIniSettings = class(TPersistent); C++ class TIniSettings : public TPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Settings for access to ini-files. Members published Name AutoLoadSave ( FileName ( see page 76) see page 76) Description Automatic load/save from/to ini-file. The ini-filename. see page 465)
75
2.6 _GClass Namespace OnHandleIniEvent ( Section ( see page 76)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Event occurs when class needs to read from or write to the ini-file. Name of the section in the ini-file. Use the Application directory for the Ini-file.
UseAppDir ( published Name
Description see page 76) see page 76) Automatic load/save from/to ini-file. The ini-filename. Event occurs when class needs to read from or write to the ini-file. Name of the section in the ini-file. Use the Application directory for the Ini-file. see page 76)
AutoLoadSave ( FileName (
OnHandleIniEvent ( Section (
UseAppDir (
2.6.1.10.1 published
2.6.1.10.1.1 TIniSettings.AutoLoadSave Property
Pascal property AutoLoadSave: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean AutoLoadSave; Description Automatic load/save from/to ini-file.
2.6.1.10.1.2 TIniSettings.FileName Property

Pascal property FileName: string; C++ __property AnsiString FileName; Description The ini-filename.
2.6.1.10.1.3 TIniSettings.OnHandleIniEvent Event

Pascal property OnHandleIniEvent: THandleIniEvent; C++ __property THandleIniEvent OnHandleIniEvent; Description Event occurs when class needs to read from or write to the ini-file.
2.6.1.10.1.4 TIniSettings.Section Property

Pascal property Section: string; C++ __property AnsiString Section; 76
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description Name of the section in the ini-file.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.10.1.5 TIniSettings.UseAppDir Property

Pascal property UseAppDir: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean UseAppDir; Description Use the Application directory for the Ini-file.
2.6.1.11 TAbGraphicControl Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbGraphicControl = class(TGraphicControl); C++ class TAbGraphicControl : public TGraphicControl; File _GClass ( Description Base class for Abakus indicators without windows handle Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. see page 465)
see page 78)
see page 78)
2.6.1.11.1.1 TAbGraphicControl.AbInfo Property
Pascal property AbInfo: TAbInfo;
77
2.6 _GClass Namespace C++ __property TAbInfo AbInfo; Description Contact and copyright notes.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.11.1.2 TAbGraphicControl.OnContextPopup Property

Pascal property OnContextPopup; C++ __property OnContextPopup; Description Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard).
2.6.1.11.1.3 TAbGraphicControl.PopupMenu Property

Pascal property PopupMenu; C++ __property PopupMenu; Description Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
2.6.1.12 TAbCustomControl Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbCustomControl = class(TCustomControl); C++ class TAbCustomControl : public TCustomControl; File _GClass ( Description Base class for Abakus controls with windows handle Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. see page 465)
see page 79)
see page 79)
78
2.6 _GClass Namespace published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint (
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
see page 79)
see page 79)
2.6.1.12.1.1 TAbCustomControl.AbInfo Property
Pascal property AbInfo: TAbInfo; C++ __property TAbInfo AbInfo; Description Contact and copyright notes.
2.6.1.12.1.2 TAbCustomControl.OnContextPopup Property

Pascal property OnContextPopup; C++ __property OnContextPopup; Description Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard).
2.6.1.12.1.3 TAbCustomControl.PopupMenu Property

2.6.1.12.1.4 TAbCustomControl.ShowHint Property

Pascal property ShowHint; C++ __property ShowHint; Description Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
79
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.13 TAbTimerSpeedBtn Class

Speed-Button with Auto-repeat Hierarchy
Pascal TAbTimerSpeedBtn = class(TSpeedButton); C++ class TAbTimerSpeedBtn : public TSpeedButton; File _GClass ( Description If you click this button you will get after "StartDelay ( page 80)" Members published Name AbInfo ( Interval ( see page 80) see page 80) see page 81) see page 81) Description Contact and copyright notes. Button Click repeat Interval (in ms). Startdelay before interval starts (in ms). Enables the button repeat interval. see page 81)" OnClick events with the interval time "Interval ( see see page 465)
StartDelay (
TimerEnabled ( published Name AbInfo ( Interval (
Description see page 80) see page 80) see page 81) see page 81) Contact and copyright notes. Button Click repeat Interval (in ms). Startdelay before interval starts (in ms). Enables the button repeat interval.
StartDelay (
TimerEnabled (
2.6.1.13.1.1 TAbTimerSpeedBtn.AbInfo Property
2.6.1.13.1.2 TAbTimerSpeedBtn.Interval Property

Pascal property Interval: Integer;
80
2.6 _GClass Namespace C++ __property int Interval; Description Button Click repeat Interval (in ms).
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.13.1.3 TAbTimerSpeedBtn.StartDelay Property

Pascal property StartDelay: Cardinal; C++ __property unsigned StartDelay; Description Startdelay before interval starts (in ms).
2.6.1.13.1.4 TAbTimerSpeedBtn.TimerEnabled Property

Pascal property TimerEnabled: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean TimerEnabled; Description Enables the button repeat interval.
2.6.1.14 TAbSpinButton Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbSpinButton = class(TWinControl); C++ class TAbSpinButton : public TWinControl; File _GClass ( Description Component to Edit/adjust a Value with Spin Button Members private Name Loaded ( see page 84) Description Method Loaded is added to reduce the number of repaints and increase the performance at application start. If you place a component at design time on a form, this method is called automatically. In case that you dynamically build the component at runtime, you must call this method manually, after all properties set to fit your needs. If you don't do so, you component may not be drawn correctly. see page 465)
81
2.6 _GClass Namespace published Name AbInfo ( Align ( see page 84) see page 84) see page 84) see page 85)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Contact and copyright notes. Determines how the control aligns within its container (parent control). Specifies how the control is anchored to its parent. Specifies the size constraints for the control. Determines whether a control has a three-dimensional (3-D) or two-dimensional look. Specifies the bitmap that appears on the speed button. Specifies the number of images specified in the Glyph property. Indicates the image used to represent the mouse pointer when the control is being dragged. Specifies whether the control is being dragged normally or for docking. Determines how the control initiates drag-and-drop or drag-and-dock operations. Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Points to the focused button control Sets the button-interval for auto-repeat if the user holds Spinbutton down. Occurs when the user clicks the Down-Spinbutton. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when the user begins to drag a control with a DragKind ( see page 86) of dkDock. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. Occurs when the user clicks the Up-Spinbutton. Determines where a component looks to determine if it should appear three dimensional. Determines where a control looks to find out if its Help Hint should be shown. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Sets delay before auto-repeat of the Spinbutton Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Specifies the bitmap that appears on the speed button. Specifies the number of images specified in the Glyph property. Visibility of the AbSpinButton. 82
Anchors ( Ctl3D (
Constraints (
DownGlyph (
DownNumGlyphs ( DragCursor ( DragKind ( DragMode ( Enabled (
FocusControl ( Interval (
see page 87) see page 87) see page 87) see page 87) see page 88) see page 88)
OnDownClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver ( OnEndDock ( OnEndDrag ( OnEnter ( OnExit (
OnStartDock ( OnStartDrag (
OnUpClick ( ParentCtl3D (
ParentShowHint ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( StartDelay ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( UpGlyph (
see page 89)
UpNumGlyphs ( Visible (
see page 91)
2.6 _GClass Namespace private Name Loaded ( see page 84)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Method Loaded is added to reduce the number of repaints and increase the performance at application start. If you place a component at design time on a form, this method is called automatically. In case that you dynamically build the component at runtime, you must call this method manually, after all properties set to fit your needs. If you don't do so, you component may not be drawn correctly.
published Name AbInfo ( Align ( see page 84) see page 84) see page 84) see page 85) Description Contact and copyright notes. Determines how the control aligns within its container (parent control). Specifies how the control is anchored to its parent. Specifies the size constraints for the control. Determines whether a control has a three-dimensional (3-D) or two-dimensional look. Specifies the bitmap that appears on the speed button. Specifies the number of images specified in the Glyph property. Indicates the image used to represent the mouse pointer when the control is being dragged. Specifies whether the control is being dragged normally or for docking. Determines how the control initiates drag-and-drop or drag-and-dock operations. Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Points to the focused button control Sets the button-interval for auto-repeat if the user holds Spinbutton down. Occurs when the user clicks the Down-Spinbutton. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when the user begins to drag a control with a DragKind ( see page 86) of dkDock. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. Occurs when the user clicks the Up-Spinbutton. Determines where a component looks to determine if it should appear three dimensional. Determines where a control looks to find out if its Help Hint should be shown. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. 83
Anchors ( Ctl3D (
Constraints (
DownGlyph (
DownNumGlyphs ( DragCursor ( DragKind ( DragMode ( Enabled (
FocusControl ( Interval (
OnDownClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver ( OnEndDock ( OnEndDrag ( OnEnter ( OnExit (
OnStartDock ( OnStartDrag (
OnUpClick ( ParentCtl3D (
ParentShowHint ( PopupMenu (
see page 89)
2.6 _GClass Namespace ShowHint ( StartDelay ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( UpGlyph ( see page 90) see page 90) see page 90) see page 90) see page 90) see page 91)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Sets delay before auto-repeat of the Spinbutton Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Specifies the bitmap that appears on the speed button. Specifies the number of images specified in the Glyph property. Visibility of the AbSpinButton.
UpNumGlyphs ( Visible (
see page 91)
2.6.1.14.1 private
2.6.1.14.1.1 TAbSpinButton.Loaded Method
Pascal procedure Loaded; override; C++ virtual __fastcall Loaded(); Description Method Loaded is added to reduce the number of repaints and increase the performance at application start. If you place a component at design time on a form, this method is called automatically. In case that you dynamically build the component at runtime, you must call this method manually, after all properties set to fit your needs. If you don't do so, you component may not be drawn correctly.
2.6.1.14.2.1 TAbSpinButton.AbInfo Property
2.6.1.14.2.2 TAbSpinButton.Align Property

Pascal property Align; C++ __property Align; Description Determines how the control aligns within its container (parent control).
2.6.1.14.2.3 TAbSpinButton.Anchors Property

Pascal property Anchors;
84
2.6 _GClass Namespace C++ __property Anchors; Description Specifies how the control is anchored to its parent.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.14.2.4 TAbSpinButton.Constraints Property

Pascal property Constraints; C++ __property Constraints; Description Specifies the size constraints for the control.
2.6.1.14.2.5 TAbSpinButton.Ctl3D Property

Pascal property Ctl3D; C++ __property Ctl3D; Description Determines whether a control has a three-dimensional (3-D) or two-dimensional look.
2.6.1.14.2.6 TAbSpinButton.DownGlyph Property

Specifies the bitmap that appears on the speed button. Pascal property DownGlyph: TBitmap; C++ __property TBitmap DownGlyph; Description Set Glyph to a bitmap object that contains the image that should appear on the face of the button. Bring up the Open dialog box from the Object Inspector to choose a bitmap file (with a .BMP extension), or specify a bitmap file at runtime. Glyph can provide up to four images within a single bitmap. All images must be the same size and next to each other in a horizontal row. TSpeedButton displays one of these images depending on the state of the button.
Image Button position state First Second Third Fourth Up
Description This image appears when the button is unselected. If no other images exist in the bitmap, this image is used for all states.
Disabled This image usually appears dimmed to indicate that the button can't be selected. Clicked Down This image appears when the button is clicked. If GroupIndex is 0, the Up image reappears when the user releases the mouse button. This image appears when the button stays down indicating that it remains selected.
85
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.14.2.7 TAbSpinButton.DownNumGlyphs Property

Specifies the number of images specified in the Glyph property. Pascal property DownNumGlyphs: TNumGlyphs; C++ __property TNumGlyphs DownNumGlyphs; Description Set NumGlyphs to the number of images provided by the bitmap assigned to the Glyph property. All images must be the same size and next to each other in a row. The Glyph property can provide up to four images.
2.6.1.14.2.8 TAbSpinButton.DragCursor Property

Pascal property DragCursor; C++ __property DragCursor; Description Indicates the image used to represent the mouse pointer when the control is being dragged.
2.6.1.14.2.9 TAbSpinButton.DragKind Property

Pascal property DragKind; C++ __property DragKind; Description Specifies whether the control is being dragged normally or for docking.
2.6.1.14.2.10 TAbSpinButton.DragMode Property

Pascal property DragMode; C++ __property DragMode; Description Determines how the control initiates drag-and-drop or drag-and-dock operations.
2.6.1.14.2.11 TAbSpinButton.Enabled Property

Pascal property Enabled; C++ __property Enabled; Description Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events.
86
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.14.2.12 TAbSpinButton.FocusControl Property

Pascal property FocusControl: TWinControl; C++ __property TWinControl * FocusControl; Description Points to the focused button control
2.6.1.14.2.13 TAbSpinButton.Interval Property

Pascal property Interval: Integer; C++ __property int Interval; Description Sets the button-interval for auto-repeat if the user holds Spinbutton down.
2.6.1.14.2.14 TAbSpinButton.OnDownClick Property

Pascal property OnDownClick: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnDownClick; Description Occurs when the user clicks the Down-Spinbutton.
2.6.1.14.2.15 TAbSpinButton.OnDragDrop Property

Pascal property OnDragDrop; C++ __property OnDragDrop; Description Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged.
2.6.1.14.2.16 TAbSpinButton.OnDragOver Property

Pascal property OnDragOver; C++ __property OnDragOver; Description Occurs when the user drags an object over a control.
87
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.14.2.17 TAbSpinButton.OnEndDock Property

Pascal property OnEndDock; C++ __property OnEndDock; Description Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging.
2.6.1.14.2.18 TAbSpinButton.OnEndDrag Property

Pascal property OnEndDrag; C++ __property OnEndDrag; Description Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging.
2.6.1.14.2.19 TAbSpinButton.OnEnter Property

Pascal property OnEnter; C++ __property OnEnter; Description Occurs when a control receives the input focus.
2.6.1.14.2.20 TAbSpinButton.OnExit Property

Pascal property OnExit; C++ __property OnExit; Description Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another.
2.6.1.14.2.21 TAbSpinButton.OnStartDock Property

Pascal property OnStartDock; C++ __property OnStartDock; Description Occurs when the user begins to drag a control with a DragKind ( see page 86) of dkDock.
88
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.14.2.22 TAbSpinButton.OnStartDrag Property

Pascal property OnStartDrag; C++ __property OnStartDrag; Description Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down.
2.6.1.14.2.23 TAbSpinButton.OnUpClick Property

Pascal property OnUpClick: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnUpClick; Description Occurs when the user clicks the Up-Spinbutton.
2.6.1.14.2.24 TAbSpinButton.ParentCtl3D Property

Pascal property ParentCtl3D; C++ __property ParentCtl3D; Description Determines where a component looks to determine if it should appear three dimensional.
2.6.1.14.2.25 TAbSpinButton.ParentShowHint Property

Pascal property ParentShowHint; C++ __property ParentShowHint; Description Determines where a control looks to find out if its Help Hint should be shown.
2.6.1.14.2.26 TAbSpinButton.PopupMenu Property

89
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.14.2.27 TAbSpinButton.ShowHint Property

2.6.1.14.2.28 TAbSpinButton.StartDelay Property

Pascal property StartDelay: Integer; C++ __property int StartDelay; Description Sets delay before auto-repeat of the Spinbutton
2.6.1.14.2.29 TAbSpinButton.TabOrder Property

Pascal property TabOrder; C++ __property TabOrder; Description Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order.
2.6.1.14.2.30 TAbSpinButton.TabStop Property

Pascal property TabStop; C++ __property TabStop; Description Determines if the user can tab to a control.
2.6.1.14.2.31 TAbSpinButton.UpGlyph Property

Specifies the bitmap that appears on the speed button. Pascal property UpGlyph: TBitmap; C++ __property TBitmap UpGlyph; Description Set Glyph to a bitmap object that contains the image that should appear on the face of the button. Bring up the Open dialog box from the Object Inspector to choose a bitmap file (with a .BMP extension), or specify a bitmap file at runtime. Glyph can provide up to four images within a single bitmap. All images must be the same size and next to each other in a horizontal 90
Abakus VCL
Classes
row. TSpeedButton displays one of these images depending on the state of the button.
Image Button position state First Second Third Fourth Up
Description This image appears when the button is unselected. If no other images exist in the bitmap, this image is used for all states.
Disabled This image usually appears dimmed to indicate that the button can't be selected. Clicked Down This image appears when the button is clicked. If GroupIndex is 0, the Up image reappears when the user releases the mouse button. This image appears when the button stays down indicating that it remains selected.
2.6.1.14.2.32 TAbSpinButton.UpNumGlyphs Property

Specifies the number of images specified in the Glyph property. Pascal property UpNumGlyphs: TNumGlyphs; C++ __property TNumGlyphs UpNumGlyphs; Description Set NumGlyphs to the number of images provided by the bitmap assigned to the Glyph property. All images must be the same size and next to each other in a row. The Glyph property can provide up to four images.
2.6.1.14.2.33 TAbSpinButton.Visible Property

Pascal property Visible; C++ __property Visible; Description Visibility of the AbSpinButton.
2.6.1.15 TArrowSettings Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TArrowSettings = class(TAbPersistent); C++ class TArrowSettings : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Arrow settings of analog indicators see page 465)
91
2.6 _GClass Namespace Members published Name OnChange ( TArrowSettings Class Name ColorBrush ( see page 92) see page 92) see page 93) see page 93) see page 93) ColorCP1Brush ( ColorCP1Pen ( ColorCP2Brush ( ColorCP2Pen ( ColorPen ( Shape ( published Name OnChange ( TArrowSettings Class Name ColorBrush ( see page 92) see page 92) see page 93) see page 93) see page 93) ColorCP1Brush ( ColorCP1Pen ( ColorCP2Brush ( ColorCP2Pen ( ColorPen ( Shape ( see page 59) see page 59)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Brush Color of the pointer Brush color of the first Centerpoint Pen color of the first Centerpoint Brush color of the second Centerpoint Pen color of the second Centerpoint Pen Color of the pointer Shape of the Pointer (0..7 are predefined) have a look to Unit _Arrow ( see page 53) how to define own shapes
see page 93)
see page 93)
Description Brush Color of the pointer Brush color of the first Centerpoint Pen color of the first Centerpoint Brush color of the second Centerpoint Pen color of the second Centerpoint Pen Color of the pointer Shape of the Pointer (0..7 are predefined) have a look to Unit _Arrow ( see page 53) how to define own shapes
see page 93)
see page 93)
2.6.1.15.1.1 TArrowSettings.ColorBrush Property
Pascal property ColorBrush: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorBrush; Description Brush Color of the pointer
2.6.1.15.1.2 TArrowSettings.ColorCP1Brush Property

Pascal property ColorCP1Brush: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorCP1Brush;
92
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description Brush color of the first Centerpoint
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.15.1.3 TArrowSettings.ColorCP1Pen Property

Pascal property ColorCP1Pen: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorCP1Pen; Description Pen color of the first Centerpoint
2.6.1.15.1.4 TArrowSettings.ColorCP2Brush Property

Pascal property ColorCP2Brush: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorCP2Brush; Description Brush color of the second Centerpoint
2.6.1.15.1.5 TArrowSettings.ColorCP2Pen Property

Pascal property ColorCP2Pen: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorCP2Pen; Description Pen color of the second Centerpoint
2.6.1.15.1.6 TArrowSettings.ColorPen Property

Pascal property ColorPen: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorPen; Description Pen Color of the pointer
2.6.1.15.1.7 TArrowSettings.Shape Property

Pascal property Shape: Integer; C++ __property int Shape; Description Shape of the Pointer (0..7 are predefined) have a look to Unit _Arrow ( see page 53) how to define own shapes
93
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.16 TLED Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TLED = class(TAbPersistent); C++ class TLED : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Base class for LED-settings Members published Name OnChange ( TLED Class Name ColorOff ( ColorOn ( Height ( Shape ( Width ( published Name OnChange ( TLED Class Name ColorOff ( ColorOn ( Height ( Shape ( Width ( see page 94) see page 95) see page 95) see page 95) see page 95) Description LED color for the off state LED color for the on state Height of the LED indication Shape of the LED indication Width of the LED indication see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 94) see page 95) see page 95) see page 95) see page 95) Description LED color for the off state LED color for the on state Height of the LED indication Shape of the LED indication Width of the LED indication see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 465)
2.6.1.16.1.1 TLED.ColorOff Property
Pascal property ColorOff: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorOff;
94
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description LED color for the off state
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.16.1.2 TLED.ColorOn Property

Pascal property ColorOn: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorOn; Description LED color for the on state
2.6.1.16.1.3 TLED.Height Property

Pascal property Height: Integer; C++ __property int Height; Description Height of the LED indication
2.6.1.16.1.4 TLED.Shape Property

Pascal property Shape: TLEDShape; C++ __property TLEDShape Shape; Description Shape of the LED indication
2.6.1.16.1.5 TLED.Width Property

Pascal property Width: Integer; C++ __property int Width; Description Width of the LED indication
2.6.1.17 TAbBtnBevel Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbBtnBevel = class(TAbPersistent);
95
Abakus VCL
Classes
class TAbBtnBevel : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Button bevel class see page 465)
Members published Name OnChange ( TAbBtnBevel Class Name HighlightColFrom ( HighlightColTo ( ShadowColFrom ( ShadowColTo ( Width ( published Name OnChange ( TAbBtnBevel Class Name HighlightColFrom ( HighlightColTo ( ShadowColFrom ( ShadowColTo ( Width ( see page 96) see page 97) see page 97) see page 97) Description Highlight-gradient from color Highlight-gradient to color Shadow-gradient from color Shadow-gradient to color Width of the bevel see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 96) see page 97) see page 97) see page 97) Description Highlight-gradient from color Highlight-gradient to color Shadow-gradient from color Shadow-gradient to color Width of the bevel see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done.
see page 97)
see page 97)
2.6.1.17.1.1 TAbBtnBevel.HighlightColFrom Property
Pascal property HighlightColFrom: TColor; C++ __property TColor HighlightColFrom;
96
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description Highlight-gradient from color
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.17.1.2 TAbBtnBevel.HighlightColTo Property

Pascal property HighlightColTo: TColor; C++ __property TColor HighlightColTo; Description Highlight-gradient to color
2.6.1.17.1.3 TAbBtnBevel.ShadowColFrom Property

Pascal property ShadowColFrom: TColor; C++ __property TColor ShadowColFrom; Description Shadow-gradient from color
2.6.1.17.1.4 TAbBtnBevel.ShadowColTo Property

Pascal property ShadowColTo: TColor; C++ __property TColor ShadowColTo; Description Shadow-gradient to color
2.6.1.17.1.5 TAbBtnBevel.Width Property

Pascal property Width: Integer; C++ __property int Width; Description Width of the bevel
2.6.1.18 TAbGradSettings Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbGradSettings = class(TAbPersistent);
97
Abakus VCL
Classes
class TAbGradSettings : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Stores settings for Gradients Members published Name OnChange ( TAbGradSettings Class Name ColorFrom ( ColorTo ( Style ( Visible ( published Name OnChange ( TAbGradSettings Class Name ColorFrom ( ColorTo ( Style ( Visible ( see page 98) see page 98) see page 99) Description From-Color for gradient filled bevel. To-Color for gradient filled bevel. Gradient style Visibility of the Gradient. see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 98) see page 98) see page 99) Description From-Color for gradient filled bevel. To-Color for gradient filled bevel. Gradient style Visibility of the Gradient. see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 465)
see page 99)
see page 99)
2.6.1.18.1.1 TAbGradSettings.ColorFrom Property
Pascal property ColorFrom: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorFrom; Description From-Color for gradient filled bevel.
2.6.1.18.1.2 TAbGradSettings.ColorTo Property

Pascal property ColorTo: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorTo;
98
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description To-Color for gradient filled bevel.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.18.1.3 TAbGradSettings.Style Property

Pascal property Style: TGradientStyle; C++ __property TGradientStyle Style; Description Gradient style
2.6.1.18.1.4 TAbGradSettings.Visible Property

Pascal property Visible: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Visible; Description Visibility of the Gradient.
2.6.1.19 TAbSBevel Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbSBevel = class(TAbPersistent); C++ class TAbSBevel : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Class to store Bevel settings see page 465)
99
Abakus VCL
Classes
Members published Name OnChange ( TAbSBevel Class Name BevelLine ( Color ( see page 101) see page 101) see page 101) see page 101) see page 101) see page 102) Description Specifies the kind of Bevel line Color of the Bevel inner part Specifies the bevel HighLight From-Color ( Specifies the bevel HighLight To-Color ( Specifies the bevel shadow From-Color ( Specifies the bevel shadow To-Color ( Offset for the Bevels client rectangle Specifies the pen color for the BevelLine ( Determines the appearance of the bevel The SurfaceGrad property specifies the gradient used to fill bevel background Specifies the width of the bevel. see page 101). Specifies the Spacing for the Bevels client rectangle see page 101). see page 101). see page 101). see page 101). see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done.
ColorHighLightFrom ( ColorHighLightTo ( ColorShadowFrom ( ColorShadowTo ( Offset ( Spacing ( Style ( PenColor (
see page 102)
SurfaceGrad ( Width ( published Name OnChange ( TAbSBevel Class Name BevelLine ( Color (
see page 103)
Description see page 101) see page 101) see page 101) Specifies the kind of Bevel line Color of the Bevel inner part Specifies the bevel HighLight From-Color ( Specifies the bevel HighLight To-Color ( Specifies the bevel shadow From-Color ( Specifies the bevel shadow To-Color ( Offset for the Bevels client rectangle Specifies the pen color for the BevelLine ( Determines the appearance of the bevel The SurfaceGrad property specifies the gradient used to fill bevel background Specifies the width of the bevel. see page 101). Specifies the Spacing for the Bevels client rectangle see page 101). see page 101). see page 101). see page 101). see page 101) see page 101) see page 102)
ColorHighLightFrom ( ColorHighLightTo ( ColorShadowFrom ( ColorShadowTo ( Offset ( Spacing ( Style ( PenColor (
see page 102)
SurfaceGrad ( Width (
see page 103)
100
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.19.1.1 TAbSBevel.BevelLine Property

Pascal property BevelLine: TBevelLine; C++ __property TBevelLine BevelLine; Description Specifies the kind of Bevel line
2.6.1.19.1.2 TAbSBevel.Color Property

Pascal property Color: TColor; C++ __property TColor Color; Description Color of the Bevel inner part
2.6.1.19.1.3 TAbSBevel.ColorHighLightFrom Property

Pascal property ColorHighLightFrom: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorHighLightFrom; Description Specifies the bevel HighLight From-Color ( see page 101).
2.6.1.19.1.4 TAbSBevel.ColorHighLightTo Property

Pascal property ColorHighLightTo: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorHighLightTo; Description Specifies the bevel HighLight To-Color ( see page 101).
2.6.1.19.1.5 TAbSBevel.ColorShadowFrom Property

Pascal property ColorShadowFrom: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorShadowFrom; Description Specifies the bevel shadow From-Color ( see page 101).
101
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.19.1.6 TAbSBevel.ColorShadowTo Property

Pascal property ColorShadowTo: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorShadowTo; Description Specifies the bevel shadow To-Color ( see page 101).
2.6.1.19.1.7 TAbSBevel.Offset Property

Pascal property Offset: TAbOffset; C++ __property TAbOffset Offset; Description Offset for the Bevels client rectangle
2.6.1.19.1.8 TAbSBevel.PenColor Property

Pascal property PenColor: TColor; C++ __property TColor PenColor; Description Specifies the pen color for the BevelLine ( see page 101).
2.6.1.19.1.9 TAbSBevel.Spacing Property

Pascal property Spacing: Integer; C++ __property int Spacing; Description Specifies the Spacing for the Bevels client rectangle
2.6.1.19.1.10 TAbSBevel.Style Property

Pascal property Style: TBevelStyle; C++ __property TBevelStyle Style; Description Determines the appearance of the bevel
102
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.19.1.11 TAbSBevel.SurfaceGrad Property

Pascal property SurfaceGrad: TAbGradSettings; C++ __property TAbGradSettings SurfaceGrad; Description The SurfaceGrad property specifies the gradient used to fill bevel background
2.6.1.19.1.12 TAbSBevel.Width Property

Pascal property Width: Integer; C++ __property int Width; Description Specifies the width of the bevel.
2.6.1.20 TSectorSettings Class

Class with settings for scale sectors Hierarchy
Pascal TSectorSettings = class(TAbPersistent); C++ class TSectorSettings : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description You can adjust up to three Sectors with individual start- and end positions for each sector. If the Value enters or leaves a sector it triggers an OnSectorChange event. The sectors are not shown in all components even when the SectorSettings property exists. see page 465)
Important SectorXFrom must be < than SectorXTo SectorXFrom/SectorXTo can be < 0 or > 1000 PPT
103
2.6 _GClass Namespace Members published Name OnChange ( TSectorSettings Class Name Offset ( see page 104) see page 105) see page 105) see page 105) see page 105) see page 106) see page 106) see page 106) Sector1Color ( Sector1From ( Sector1To ( Sector2Color ( Sector2From ( Sector2To ( Sector3Color ( Sector3From ( Sector3To ( WidthOffset ( published Name OnChange ( TSectorSettings Class Name Offset ( see page 104) see page 105) see page 105) see page 105) see page 105) see page 106) see page 106) see page 106) Sector1Color ( Sector1From ( Sector1To ( Sector2Color ( Sector2From ( Sector2To ( Sector3Color ( Sector3From ( Sector3To ( WidthOffset ( see page 59) see page 59)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Property to store an offset Color of the first sector Begin Value of this Sector in PPT End Value of this Sector in PPT Color of the second sector Begin Value of this Sector in PPT End Value of this Sector in PPT Color of the third sector Begin Value of this Sector in PPT End Value of this Sector in PPT Property to store an WidthOffset
see page 105)
see page 106)
see page 106)
Description Property to store an offset Color of the first sector Begin Value of this Sector in PPT End Value of this Sector in PPT Color of the second sector Begin Value of this Sector in PPT End Value of this Sector in PPT Color of the third sector Begin Value of this Sector in PPT End Value of this Sector in PPT Property to store an WidthOffset
see page 105)
see page 106)
see page 106)
2.6.1.20.1.1 TSectorSettings.Offset Property
Pascal property Offset: Integer; C++ __property int Offset; Description Property to store an offset
104
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.20.1.2 TSectorSettings.Sector1Color Property

Pascal property Sector1Color: TColor; C++ __property TColor Sector1Color; Description Color of the first sector
2.6.1.20.1.3 TSectorSettings.Sector1From Property

Pascal property Sector1From: LongInt; C++ __property LongInt Sector1From; Description Begin Value of this Sector in PPT
2.6.1.20.1.4 TSectorSettings.Sector1To Property

Pascal property Sector1To: LongInt; C++ __property LongInt Sector1To; Description End Value of this Sector in PPT

Pascal property Sector2Color: TColor; C++ __property TColor Sector2Color; Description Color of the second sector

105
Abakus VCL
Classes


Pascal property Sector3Color: TColor; C++ __property TColor Sector3Color; Description Color of the third sector


2.6.1.20.1.11 TSectorSettings.WidthOffset Property

Pascal property WidthOffset: Integer; C++ __property int WidthOffset; Description Property to store an WidthOffset
106
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.21 TBarSettings Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TBarSettings = class(TAbPersistent); C++ class TBarSettings : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Settings for Bar-indications Members published Name OnChange ( TBarSettings Class Name Bevel ( BkAuto ( see page 108) see page 108) see page 108) Description Bevel of the Bar indicatior. Automatic background color derived from SectorColors Brightness of the background if BkAuto ( checked The Bar background color The Bar color. Specifies the font to use when writing text on the bar. Minimal Height of the Bar Minimal Width of the Bar Options for Bar indicators. Style of the bar indicator. see page 108) is see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 465)
BkBrightness ( BkColor ( Color ( Font (
see page 108)
see page 108) see page 109) see page 109) see page 109) see page 109)
minHeight ( minWidth ( Options ( Style ( published Name OnChange ( TBarSettings Class Name Bevel ( BkAuto (
see page 109)
Description see page 108) see page 108) see page 108) Bevel of the Bar indicatior. Automatic background color derived from SectorColors Brightness of the background if BkAuto ( checked The Bar background color The Bar color. Specifies the font to use when writing text on the bar. Minimal Height of the Bar Minimal Width of the Bar Options for Bar indicators. 107 see page 108) is
BkBrightness ( BkColor ( Color ( Font (
see page 108)
minHeight ( minWidth ( Options (
2.6 _GClass Namespace Style ( see page 109)
Abakus VCL Style of the bar indicator.
Classes
2.6.1.21.1.1 TBarSettings.Bevel Property
Pascal property Bevel: TAbSBevel; C++ __property TAbSBevel Bevel; Description Bevel of the Bar indicatior.
2.6.1.21.1.2 TBarSettings.BkAuto Property

Pascal property BkAuto: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean BkAuto; Description Automatic background color derived from SectorColors
2.6.1.21.1.3 TBarSettings.BkBrightness Property

Pascal property BkBrightness: Single; C++ __property Single BkBrightness; Description Brightness of the background if BkAuto ( see page 108) is checked
2.6.1.21.1.4 TBarSettings.BkColor Property

Pascal property BkColor: TColor; C++ __property TColor BkColor; Description The Bar background color
2.6.1.21.1.5 TBarSettings.Color Property

The Bar color. Pascal property Color: TColor; C++ __property TColor Color;
108
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
Color of the bar. If opUseSectorColor in options is checked the actual SectorColor is uses instead of Color.
2.6.1.21.1.6 TBarSettings.Font Property

Pascal property Font: TFont; C++ __property TFont Font; Description Specifies the font to use when writing text on the bar.
2.6.1.21.1.7 TBarSettings.minHeight Property

Pascal property minHeight: Integer; C++ __property int minHeight; Description Minimal Height of the Bar
2.6.1.21.1.8 TBarSettings.minWidth Property

Pascal property minWidth: Integer; C++ __property int minWidth; Description Minimal Width of the Bar
2.6.1.21.1.9 TBarSettings.Options Property

Pascal property Options: TBarOptions; C++ __property TBarOptions Options; Description Options for Bar indicators.
2.6.1.21.1.10 TBarSettings.Style Property

Pascal property Style: TBarStyle; C++ __property TBarStyle Style; Description Style of the bar indicator.
109
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.22 TSignalSettings Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TSignalSettings = class(TAbPersistent); C++ class TSignalSettings : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Class with settings of an analog signal see page 465)
Members published Name OnChange ( TSignalSettings Class Name DigitalFrom ( DigitalTo ( Name1 ( Name2 ( see page 111) see page 111) see page 111) see page 111) see page 111) see page 112) see page 112) Description Start value in digit. End value in digit. First signal name Second signal Name Formats the floating point value. see Delphi/C++Builder FormatFloat. Start value of the measured Signal End value of the measured Signal Unit value of the measured Signal see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done.
ValueFormat ( ValueFrom ( ValueTo ( ValueUnit ( published Name OnChange ( TSignalSettings Class Name DigitalFrom ( DigitalTo ( Name1 ( Name2 (
see page 112)
Description see page 111) Start value in digit. End value in digit. First signal name Second signal Name see page 111) see page 111) see page 111)
110
2.6 _GClass Namespace ValueFormat ( ValueFrom ( ValueTo ( ValueUnit ( see page 111) see page 112) see page 112)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Formats the floating point value. see Delphi/C++Builder FormatFloat. Start value of the measured Signal End value of the measured Signal Unit value of the measured Signal
see page 112)
2.6.1.22.1.1 TSignalSettings.DigitalFrom Property
Pascal property DigitalFrom: LongInt; C++ __property LongInt DigitalFrom; Description Start value in digit.
2.6.1.22.1.2 TSignalSettings.DigitalTo Property

Pascal property DigitalTo: LongInt; C++ __property LongInt DigitalTo; Description End value in digit.
2.6.1.22.1.3 TSignalSettings.Name1 Property

Pascal property Name1: string; C++ __property AnsiString Name1; Description First signal name
2.6.1.22.1.4 TSignalSettings.Name2 Property

Pascal property Name2: string; C++ __property AnsiString Name2; Description Second signal Name
2.6.1.22.1.5 TSignalSettings.ValueFormat Property

Pascal property ValueFormat: string; 111
2.6 _GClass Namespace C++ __property AnsiString ValueFormat; Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
Formats the floating point value. see Delphi/C++Builder FormatFloat.
2.6.1.22.1.6 TSignalSettings.ValueFrom Property

Pascal property ValueFrom: Single; C++ __property Single ValueFrom; Description Start value of the measured Signal
2.6.1.22.1.7 TSignalSettings.ValueTo Property

Pascal property ValueTo: Single; C++ __property Single ValueTo; Description End value of the measured Signal
2.6.1.22.1.8 TSignalSettings.ValueUnit Property

Pascal property ValueUnit: string; C++ __property AnsiString ValueUnit; Description Unit value of the measured Signal
2.6.1.23 TMinMax Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TMinMax = class(TAbPersistent); C++ class TMinMax : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Class to store Min ( see page 114) and Max ( see page 113) Values of a signal see page 465)
112
2.6 _GClass Namespace Members published Name OnChange ( TMinMax Class Name Max ( see page 113) see page 113) see page 114) see page 114) see page 114) see page 114) see page 115) see page 115) MaxColor ( MaxVisible ( Min ( MinColor ( MinVisible ( see page 59)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Maximal appeared Value Color for the maximum indication Date/Time the maximum appears Visibility of the minimum indication. Minimal appeared Value Color for the minimum indication Date/Time the minimum appears Visibility of the maximum indication. If true then the indicators Sector colors are used as Min ( see page 114)/Max ( see page 113) brush color.
MaxDateTime (
see page 114)
MinDateTime ( UseSectorCol ( published Name OnChange ( TMinMax Class Name Max (
Description see page 113) see page 113) see page 114) see page 114) see page 114) see page 114) see page 115) see page 115) Maximal appeared Value Color for the maximum indication Date/Time the maximum appears Visibility of the minimum indication. Minimal appeared Value Color for the minimum indication Date/Time the minimum appears Visibility of the maximum indication. If true then the indicators Sector colors are used as Min ( see page 114)/Max ( see page 113) brush color.
MaxColor ( MaxVisible ( Min ( MinColor ( MinVisible (
MaxDateTime (
see page 114)
MinDateTime ( UseSectorCol (
2.6.1.23.1.1 TMinMax.Max Property
Pascal property Max: Single; C++ __property Single Max; Description Maximal appeared Value
2.6.1.23.1.2 TMinMax.MaxColor Property

Pascal property MaxColor: TColor; 113
2.6 _GClass Namespace C++ __property TColor MaxColor; Description Color for the maximum indication
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.23.1.3 TMinMax.MaxDateTime Property

Pascal property MaxDateTime: TDateTime; C++ __property TDateTime MaxDateTime; Description Date/Time the maximum appears
2.6.1.23.1.4 TMinMax.MaxVisible Property

Pascal property MaxVisible: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean MaxVisible; Description Visibility of the minimum indication.
2.6.1.23.1.5 TMinMax.Min Property

Pascal property Min: Single; C++ __property Single Min; Description Minimal appeared Value
2.6.1.23.1.6 TMinMax.MinColor Property

Pascal property MinColor: TColor; C++ __property TColor MinColor; Description Color for the minimum indication
2.6.1.23.1.7 TMinMax.MinDateTime Property

Pascal property MinDateTime: TDateTime; C++ __property TDateTime MinDateTime;
114
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description Date/Time the minimum appears
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.23.1.8 TMinMax.MinVisible Property

Pascal property MinVisible: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean MinVisible; Description Visibility of the maximum indication.
2.6.1.23.1.9 TMinMax.UseSectorCol Property

Pascal property UseSectorCol: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean UseSectorCol; Description If true then the indicators Sector colors are used as Min ( see page 114)/Max ( see page 113) brush color.
2.6.1.24 TChSettings Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TChSettings = class(TSignalSettings); C++ class TChSettings : public TSignalSettings; File _GClass ( Description Class with settings for one signal channel Members published Name OnChange ( TSignalSettings Class Name DigitalFrom ( DigitalTo ( Name1 ( Name2 ( see page 111) see page 111) see page 111) see page 111) Description Start value in digit. End value in digit. First signal name Second signal Name see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done. see page 465)
115
2.6 _GClass Namespace ValueFormat ( ValueFrom ( ValueTo ( ValueUnit ( TChSettings Class Name Color ( Digit ( see page 116) see page 117) see page 117) see page 117) see page 111) see page 112) see page 112)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Formats the floating point value. see Delphi/C++Builder FormatFloat. Start value of the measured Signal End value of the measured Signal Unit value of the measured Signal
see page 112)
Description Color for this channel. Signal Value ( see page 117) in Digit see page 117) has changed Event occurs if signal Value ( The Signal Value Visibility of the ChSettings
OnValueChange ( PenWidth ( Value ( Visible ( published Name OnChange ( TSignalSettings Class Name DigitalFrom ( DigitalTo ( Name1 ( Name2 (
Specifies the width of the pen in pixels.
Description see page 111) Start value in digit. End value in digit. First signal name Second signal Name Formats the floating point value. see Delphi/C++Builder FormatFloat. Start value of the measured Signal End value of the measured Signal Unit value of the measured Signal see page 111) see page 111) see page 111) see page 111) see page 112) see page 112)
ValueFormat ( ValueFrom ( ValueTo ( ValueUnit ( TChSettings Class Name Color ( Digit (
see page 112)
Description see page 116) see page 117) see page 117) see page 117) Color for this channel. Signal Value ( see page 117) in Digit see page 117) has changed Event occurs if signal Value ( The Signal Value Visibility of the ChSettings
OnValueChange ( PenWidth ( Value ( Visible (
Specifies the width of the pen in pixels.
2.6.1.24.1.1 TChSettings.Color Property
Pascal property Color: TColor; C++ __property TColor Color; Description Color for this channel. 116
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.24.1.2 TChSettings.Digit Property

Pascal property Digit: LongInt; C++ __property LongInt Digit; Description Signal Value ( see page 117) in Digit
2.6.1.24.1.3 TChSettings.OnValueChange Property

Pascal property OnValueChange: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnValueChange; Description Event occurs if signal Value ( see page 117) has changed
2.6.1.24.1.4 TChSettings.PenWidth Property

Pascal property PenWidth: Integer; C++ __property int PenWidth; Description Specifies the width of the pen in pixels.
2.6.1.24.1.5 TChSettings.Value Property

Pascal property Value: Single; C++ __property Single Value; Description The Signal Value
2.6.1.24.1.6 TChSettings.Visible Property

Pascal property Visible: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Visible; Description Visibility of the ChSettings
117
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.25 TAbAnalogGControl Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbAnalogGControl = class(TAbGraphicControl); C++ class TAbAnalogGControl : public TAbGraphicControl; File _GClass ( Description Base class for analog indicators Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( Description Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the see page 125) Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. see page 465)
see page 78)
OnDblClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver ( OnEndDrag ( OnLimit (
OnMinMaxChange ( OnMouseDown ( OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnOverflow (
Event occurs if a new min or max Value ( has changed
Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Event occurs if the Value ( adjusted range Event occurs if the Value ( sector see page 125) exceeds the see page 125) exit or enter a
OnSectorChange (
118
2.6 _GClass Namespace OnSettingsChange ( OnStartDrag ( see page 124)
Abakus VCL Event occurs if settings has changed
Classes
see page 124)
Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. Event occurs if signal Value ( see page 125) has changed Settings for the component scale sectors Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Settings for the analog Signal The Signal Value
OnValueChange ( SectorSettings ( ShowHint (
SignalSettings ( Value ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale (
see page 125)
Description see page 120) see page 120) Property to select Log10 scale or Linar scale Occurs if component position has changed
OnPosChanged ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale (
OnPosChanged ( published Name AbInfo (
Description see page 77) see page 78) Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit (
see page 78)
Description see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the see page 125)
HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick (
OnMinMaxChange ( OnMouseDown ( OnMouseMove (
Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control.
119
2.6 _GClass Namespace OnMouseUp ( OnOverflow ( see page 123) see page 123) see page 124) see page 124)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Event occurs if the Value ( adjusted range Event occurs if the Value ( sector see page 125) exceeds the see page 125) exit or enter a
OnSectorChange ( OnSettingsChange ( OnStartDrag (
Event occurs if settings has changed Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. Event occurs if signal Value ( see page 125) has changed Settings for the component scale sectors Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Settings for the analog Signal The Signal Value
see page 124)
SignalSettings ( Value (
see page 125)
2.6.1.25.1 private
2.6.1.25.1.1 TAbAnalogGControl.LogScale Property
Pascal property LogScale: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean LogScale; Description Property to select Log10 scale or Linar scale
2.6.1.25.1.2 TAbAnalogGControl.OnPosChanged Property

Pascal property OnPosChanged: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnPosChanged; Description Occurs if component position has changed
2.6.1.25.2.1 TAbAnalogGControl.Digit Property
Pascal property Digit: LongInt; C++ __property LongInt Digit; Description Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit
120
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.25.2.2 TAbAnalogGControl.HintOptions Property

Pascal property HintOptions: THintOptions; C++ __property THintOptions HintOptions; Description Options for the components hint indication
2.6.1.25.2.3 TAbAnalogGControl.LimitLower Property

Pascal property LimitLower: Single; C++ __property Single LimitLower; Description Signal lower limit
2.6.1.25.2.4 TAbAnalogGControl.LimitUpper Property

Pascal property LimitUpper: Single; C++ __property Single LimitUpper; Description Signal upper limit
2.6.1.25.2.5 TAbAnalogGControl.MinMax Property

Pascal property MinMax: TMinMax; C++ __property TMinMax MinMax; Description Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime
2.6.1.25.2.6 TAbAnalogGControl.OnClick Property

Pascal property OnClick; C++ __property OnClick; Description Occurs when the user clicks the control.
121
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.25.2.7 TAbAnalogGControl.OnDblClick Property

Pascal property OnDblClick; C++ __property OnDblClick; Description Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control.
2.6.1.25.2.8 TAbAnalogGControl.OnDragDrop Property

2.6.1.25.2.9 TAbAnalogGControl.OnDragOver Property

2.6.1.25.2.10 TAbAnalogGControl.OnEndDrag Property

2.6.1.25.2.11 TAbAnalogGControl.OnLimit Event

Pascal property OnLimit: TLimitEvent; C++ __property TLimitEvent OnLimit; Description Event occurs if the Value ( see page 125) exceeds the Lower or upper limit
122
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.25.2.12 TAbAnalogGControl.OnMinMaxChange Property

Pascal property OnMinMaxChange: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnMinMaxChange; Description Event occurs if a new min or max Value ( see page 125) has changed
2.6.1.25.2.13 TAbAnalogGControl.OnMouseDown Property

Pascal property OnMouseDown; C++ __property OnMouseDown; Description Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control.
2.6.1.25.2.14 TAbAnalogGControl.OnMouseMove Property

Pascal property OnMouseMove; C++ __property OnMouseMove; Description Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control.
2.6.1.25.2.15 TAbAnalogGControl.OnMouseUp Property

Pascal property OnMouseUp; C++ __property OnMouseUp; Description Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component.
2.6.1.25.2.16 TAbAnalogGControl.OnOverflow Event

Pascal property OnOverflow: TOverflowEvent; C++ __property TOverflowEvent OnOverflow; Description Event occurs if the Value ( see page 125) exceeds the adjusted range
123
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.25.2.17 TAbAnalogGControl.OnSectorChange Event

Pascal property OnSectorChange: TSectorChangeEvent; C++ __property TSectorChangeEvent OnSectorChange; Description Event occurs if the Value ( see page 125) exit or enter a sector
2.6.1.25.2.18 TAbAnalogGControl.OnSettingsChange Property

Pascal property OnSettingsChange: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnSettingsChange; Description Event occurs if settings has changed
2.6.1.25.2.19 TAbAnalogGControl.OnStartDrag Property

2.6.1.25.2.20 TAbAnalogGControl.OnValueChange Property

Pascal property OnValueChange: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnValueChange; Description Event occurs if signal Value ( see page 125) has changed
2.6.1.25.2.21 TAbAnalogGControl.SectorSettings Property

Pascal property SectorSettings: TSectorSettings; C++ __property TSectorSettings SectorSettings; Description Settings for the component scale sectors
124
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.25.2.22 TAbAnalogGControl.ShowHint Property

2.6.1.25.2.23 TAbAnalogGControl.SignalSettings Property

Pascal property SignalSettings: TSignalSettings; C++ __property TSignalSettings SignalSettings; Description Settings for the analog Signal
2.6.1.25.2.24 TAbAnalogGControl.Value Property

Pascal property Value: Single; C++ __property Single Value; Description The Signal Value
2.6.1.26 TAbAnalogCControl Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbAnalogCControl = class(TAbCustomControl); C++ class TAbAnalogCControl : public TAbCustomControl; File _GClass ( Description Base class for Analog Value ( Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). 125 see page 133) adjust components with keyboard support. see page 465)
2.6 _GClass Namespace PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 79)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
see page 79)
Description Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit (
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Set of enabled keys to change the value Enables/disables the keyboard input Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus. Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed. Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed Determines where a control looks for its font information. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Contains settings for the analog signal Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Contains the analog Value Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication Visibility of the component.
ColorNonFocus (
EnabledKeys ( OnClick (
EnableKeyboard ( OnDblClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver ( OnEndDrag ( OnEnter ( OnExit (
OnKeyDown ( OnKeyUp (
OnMouseDown ( OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnStartDrag (
OnValueChange ( OnValueChanged ( ParentFont ( ShowHint (
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible (
ValueIndicator (
126
2.6 _GClass Namespace published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 79)
see page 79)
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Set of enabled keys to change the value Enables/disables the keyboard input Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus. Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed. Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed Determines where a control looks for its font information. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Contains settings for the analog signal Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order.
ColorNonFocus (
SignalSettings ( TabOrder (
see page 133)
127
2.6 _GClass Namespace TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( see page 133) see page 134)
Abakus VCL Determines if the user can tab to a control. Contains the analog Value Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication Visibility of the component.
Classes
ValueIndicator (
2.6.1.26.1.1 TAbAnalogCControl.ChangeLarge Property
Pascal property ChangeLarge: LongInt; C++ __property LongInt ChangeLarge; Description Inc/dec Value ( see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 129)
2.6.1.26.1.2 TAbAnalogCControl.ChangeSmall Property

Pascal property ChangeSmall: LongInt; C++ __property LongInt ChangeSmall; Description Inc/dec Value ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit ( see page 129)
2.6.1.26.1.3 TAbAnalogCControl.ColorFocus Property

Pascal property ColorFocus: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorFocus; Description Color if the component has the focus
2.6.1.26.1.4 TAbAnalogCControl.ColorNonFocus Property

Pascal property ColorNonFocus: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorNonFocus; Description Color if the component has no focus
2.6.1.26.1.5 TAbAnalogCControl.CursorSlide Property

Pascal property CursorSlide: TCursor;
128
2.6 _GClass Namespace C++ __property TCursor CursorSlide; Description Cursor if mouse is over the slider
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.26.1.6 TAbAnalogCControl.Digit Property

Pascal property Digit: LongInt; C++ __property LongInt Digit; Description Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits
2.6.1.26.1.7 TAbAnalogCControl.Enabled Property

2.6.1.26.1.8 TAbAnalogCControl.EnabledKeys Property

Pascal property EnabledKeys: TEnabledKeys; C++ __property TEnabledKeys EnabledKeys; Description Set of enabled keys to change the value
2.6.1.26.1.9 TAbAnalogCControl.EnableKeyboard Property

Pascal property EnableKeyboard: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean EnableKeyboard; Description Enables/disables the keyboard input
2.6.1.26.1.10 TAbAnalogCControl.OnClick Property

Pascal property OnClick; C++ __property OnClick;
129
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description Occurs when the user clicks the control.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.26.1.11 TAbAnalogCControl.OnDblClick Property

2.6.1.26.1.12 TAbAnalogCControl.OnDragDrop Property

2.6.1.26.1.13 TAbAnalogCControl.OnDragOver Property

2.6.1.26.1.14 TAbAnalogCControl.OnEndDrag Property

Pascal property OnEndDrag; C++ __property OnEndDrag; Description Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging.
2.6.1.26.1.15 TAbAnalogCControl.OnEnter Property

Pascal property OnEnter; C++ __property OnEnter; Description Occurs when a control receives the input focus.
130
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.26.1.16 TAbAnalogCControl.OnExit Property

Pascal property OnExit; C++ __property OnExit; Description Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another.
2.6.1.26.1.17 TAbAnalogCControl.OnKeyDown Property

Pascal property OnKeyDown; C++ __property OnKeyDown; Description Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus.
2.6.1.26.1.18 TAbAnalogCControl.OnKeyUp Property

Pascal property OnKeyUp; C++ __property OnKeyUp; Description Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed.
2.6.1.26.1.19 TAbAnalogCControl.OnMouseDown Property

Pascal property OnMouseDown; C++ __property OnMouseDown; Description Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control.
2.6.1.26.1.20 TAbAnalogCControl.OnMouseMove Property

Pascal property OnMouseMove; C++ __property OnMouseMove; Description Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control.
131
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.26.1.21 TAbAnalogCControl.OnMouseUp Property

Pascal property OnMouseUp; C++ __property OnMouseUp; Description Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component.
2.6.1.26.1.22 TAbAnalogCControl.OnStartDrag Property

2.6.1.26.1.23 TAbAnalogCControl.OnValueChange Property

Pascal property OnValueChange: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnValueChange; Description OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes
2.6.1.26.1.24 TAbAnalogCControl.OnValueChanged Property

Pascal property OnValueChanged: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnValueChanged; Description OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed
2.6.1.26.1.25 TAbAnalogCControl.ParentFont Property

Pascal property ParentFont; C++ __property ParentFont; Description Determines where a control looks for its font information.
132
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.26.1.26 TAbAnalogCControl.ShowHint Property

2.6.1.26.1.27 TAbAnalogCControl.SignalSettings Property

Pascal property SignalSettings: TSignalSettings; C++ __property TSignalSettings SignalSettings; Description Contains settings for the analog signal
2.6.1.26.1.28 TAbAnalogCControl.TabOrder Property

Pascal property TabOrder; C++ __property TabOrder; Description Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order.
2.6.1.26.1.29 TAbAnalogCControl.TabStop Property

Pascal property TabStop; C++ __property TabStop; Description Determines if the user can tab to a control.
2.6.1.26.1.30 TAbAnalogCControl.Value Property

Pascal property Value: Single; C++ __property Single Value; Description Contains the analog Value
133
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.1.26.1.31 TAbAnalogCControl.ValueIndicator Property

Pascal property ValueIndicator: TAbAnalogGControl; C++ __property TAbAnalogGControl ValueIndicator; Description Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication
2.6.1.26.1.32 TAbAnalogCControl.Visible Property

Pascal property Visible; C++ __property Visible; Description Visibility of the component.
2.6.1.27 TAbBinGControl Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbBinGControl = class(TGraphicControl); C++ class TAbBinGControl : public TGraphicControl; File _GClass ( Description Base class for binary indicators Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen. see page 465)
see page 135)
134
2.6 _GClass Namespace Visible ( see page 135)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
2.6.1.27.1.1 TAbBinGControl.AbInfo Property
2.6.1.27.1.2 TAbBinGControl.PopupMenu Property

2.6.1.27.1.3 TAbBinGControl.ShowHint Property

2.6.1.27.1.4 TAbBinGControl.Visible Property

Pascal property Visible; C++ __property Visible; Description Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
2.6.1.28 TScaleSettings Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TScaleSettings = class(TAbPersistent); 135
Abakus VCL
Classes
class TScaleSettings : public TAbPersistent; File _GClass ( Description Class with settings for a scale see page 465)
Members published Name OnChange ( TScaleSettings Class Name Color ( Font ( see page 137) see page 137) see page 137) see page 137) see page 138) see page 138) see page 138) see page 137) DrawLine ( Description Color of the scale Enable to dra a border line Font settings for the scale Color ( see page 137) of the pointer Selects the position of the scale Number of scale Major steps Number of scale minor steps Format string for the Scale Steps ( see page 138) see page 138) Format string for the LogScale Steps ( see page 59) Description Event wich is used to inform that changes are done.
PointerColor ( PosLeftTop ( Steps ( SubSteps (
see page 138)
ValueFormat (
ValueFormatLog ( published Name OnChange ( TScaleSettings Class Name Color ( Font (
Description see page 137) see page 137) see page 137) see page 137) see page 138) see page 137) Color of the scale Enable to dra a border line Font settings for the scale Color ( see page 137) of the pointer Selects the position of the scale Number of scale Major steps Number of scale minor steps 136
DrawLine (
PointerColor ( PosLeftTop ( Steps ( SubSteps (
see page 138)
2.6 _GClass Namespace ValueFormat ( see page 138) see page 138)
Abakus VCL Format string for the Scale Steps ( see page 138)
Classes
ValueFormatLog (
Format string for the LogScale Steps (
see page 138)
2.6.1.28.1.1 TScaleSettings.Color Property
Pascal property Color: TColor; C++ __property TColor Color; Description Color of the scale
2.6.1.28.1.2 TScaleSettings.DrawLine Property

Pascal property DrawLine: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean DrawLine; Description Enable to dra a border line
2.6.1.28.1.3 TScaleSettings.Font Property

Pascal property Font: TFont; C++ __property TFont Font; Description Font settings for the scale
2.6.1.28.1.4 TScaleSettings.PointerColor Property

Pascal property PointerColor: TColor; C++ __property TColor PointerColor; Description Color ( see page 137) of the pointer
2.6.1.28.1.5 TScaleSettings.PosLeftTop Property

Pascal property PosLeftTop: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean PosLeftTop;
137
2.6 _GClass Namespace Description Selects the position of the scale
Abakus VCL
2.6.1.28.1.6 TScaleSettings.Steps Property

Pascal property Steps: Integer; C++ __property int Steps; Description Number of scale Major steps
2.6.1.28.1.7 TScaleSettings.SubSteps Property

Pascal property SubSteps: Integer; C++ __property int SubSteps; Description Number of scale minor steps
2.6.1.28.1.8 TScaleSettings.ValueFormat Property

Pascal property ValueFormat: string; C++ __property AnsiString ValueFormat; Description Format string for the Scale Steps ( see page 138)
2.6.1.28.1.9 TScaleSettings.ValueFormatLog Property

Pascal property ValueFormatLog: string; C++ __property AnsiString ValueFormatLog; Description Format string for the LogScale Steps ( see page 138)

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TAngleMode ( see page 139) Description Automatic or manual adjustment of an angle. 138
2.6 _GClass Namespace THintOption ( TEnabledKey ( TBarStyle ( TBarOption ( TPos ( TPosH ( TPosV ( TBarDirection ( see page 139) see page 140) see page 141) see page 142) see page 141)
Abakus VCL
Options for automatically created hints. Set of allowed keys. Style of the bar indicator. Vertical or horizontal direction of the bar indicator. Options for Bar indicators. Type to adjust a position e.g.: position of an indicator label Type to adjust a vertical position e.g. horizontal position of a button label Type to adjust a vertical position e.g. vertical position of a button label Type to select inner-/outer line of a bevel Mode of the component. Used to change the reaction to a mouse click. The dial pointer shape.
TBevelLine ( TMode (
TDialPointer (
2.6.2.1 _GClass.TAngleMode Enumeration

Pascal TAngleMode = ( amAuto, amManual ); C++ enum TAngleMode { amAuto, amManual }; File _GClass ( Members Members amAuto amManual Description Automatic or manual adjustment of an angle. Description Automatic calculation of the angle. Manual adjustment of the angle. see page 465)
2.6.2.2 _GClass.THintOption Enumeration

Pascal THintOption = ( hoAutoHint, hoValue, hoName1, hoName2, hoMin, hoMax, hoMinMaxDate, hoMinMaxTime ); C++ enum THintOption { hoAutoHint, 139
2.6 _GClass Namespace hoValue, hoName1, hoName2, hoMin, hoMax, hoMinMaxDate, hoMinMaxTime }; File _GClass ( Members Members hoAutoHint hoValue hoName1 hoName2 hoMin hoMax hoMinMaxDate hoMinMaxTime Description Options for automatically created hints. see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Description If true then the hint is automatically created Include the value to the Autohint Include the Name1 to the Autohint Include the Name2 to the Autohint Include the minimum value to the Autohint Include the maximum value to the Autohint Include the Date when the min/max value reached Include the Time when the min/max value reached
2.6.2.3 _GClass.TEnabledKey Enumeration

Pascal TEnabledKey = ( _VK_PRIOR, _VK_NEXT, _VK_END, _VK_HOME, _VK_LEFT, _VK_DOWN, _VK_UP, _VK_RIGHT ); C++ enum TEnabledKey { _VK_PRIOR, _VK_NEXT, _VK_END, _VK_HOME, _VK_LEFT, _VK_DOWN, _VK_UP, _VK_RIGHT }; File _GClass ( Members Members _VK_PRIOR _VK_NEXT _VK_END Description the prior key the next key the end key 140 see page 465)
2.6 _GClass Namespace _VK_HOME _VK_LEFT _VK_DOWN _VK_UP _VK_RIGHT Description Set of allowed keys.
Abakus VCL the home key the left key the down key the up key the right key
2.6.2.4 _GClass.TBarStyle Enumeration

Pascal TBarStyle = ( bsBar, bsLED_Bar, bsPoint, bsMultiColor ); C++ enum TBarStyle { bsBar, bsLED_Bar, bsPoint, bsMultiColor }; File _GClass ( Members Members bsBar bsLED_Bar bsPoint bsMultiColor Description Style of the bar indicator. Description Solid bar style LED bar style all til value on LED bar style single LED on LED bar style multi color (sector colors) see page 465)
2.6.2.5 _GClass.TBarDirection Enumeration

Pascal TBarDirection = ( bdHorizontal, bdVertical ); C++ enum TBarDirection { bdHorizontal, bdVertical }; File _GClass ( see page 465)
141
2.6 _GClass Namespace Members Members bdHorizontal bdVertical Description Vertical or horizontal direction of the bar indicator.
Abakus VCL
Description Horizontal Bar Vertical Bar
2.6.2.6 _GClass.TBarOption Enumeration

Pascal TBarOption = ( opValue, opUnit, opUseSectorCol, opBidir ); C++ enum TBarOption { opValue, opUnit, opUseSectorCol, opBidir }; File _GClass ( Members Members opValue opUnit opUseSectorCol opBidir Description Options for Bar indicators. Description show value indicator Schow signal unit use the sector color as bar color bidirectional bar see page 465)
2.6.2.7 _GClass.TPos Enumeration

Pascal TPos = ( pLeft, pRight, pTop, pBottom ); C++ enum TPos { pLeft, pRight, pTop, pBottom };
142
2.6 _GClass Namespace File _GClass ( Members Members pLeft pRight pTop pBottom Description see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Description Left position Right position Top position Bottom position
Type to adjust a position e.g.: position of an indicator label
2.6.2.8 _GClass.TPosH Enumeration

Pascal TPosH = ( phLeft, phRight, phCenter ); C++ enum TPosH { phLeft, phRight, phCenter }; File _GClass ( Members Members phLeft phRight phCenter Description Type to adjust a vertical position e.g. horizontal position of a button label Description Horizontal position left Horizontal position right Horizontal position center see page 465)
2.6.2.9 _GClass.TPosV Enumeration

Pascal TPosV = ( pvTop, pvBottom, pvCenter ); C++ enum TPosV { pvTop, pvBottom, pvCenter }; 143
2.6 _GClass Namespace File _GClass ( Members Members pvTop pvBottom pvCenter Description see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Description Vertical position top Vertical position cottom Vertical position center
Type to adjust a vertical position e.g. vertical position of a button label
2.6.2.10 _GClass.TBevelLine Enumeration

Pascal TBevelLine = ( blNone, blOuter, blInner, blBoth ); C++ enum TBevelLine { blNone, blOuter, blInner, blBoth }; File _GClass ( Members Members blNone blOuter blInner blBoth Description Type to select inner-/outer line of a bevel Description None bevel line Outer bevel Line Inner bevel line Outer and inner bevel line see page 465)
2.6.2.11 _GClass.TMode Enumeration

Pascal TMode = ( mButton, mSwitch, mIndicator, mRadioButton ); C++ enum TMode { mButton, 144
2.6 _GClass Namespace mSwitch, mIndicator, mRadioButton }; File _GClass ( Members Members mButton mSwitch mIndicator mRadioButton Description see page 465)
Abakus VCL
Types
Description Act as button Act as switch Act as indicator Act as radio button
Mode of the component. Used to change the reaction to a mouse click.
2.6.2.12 _GClass.TDialPointer Enumeration

Pascal TDialPointer = ( dpRound, dpLine, dpTriangle ); C++ enum TDialPointer { dpRound, dpLine, dpTriangle }; File _GClass ( Members Members dpRound dpLine dpTriangle Description The dial pointer shape. Description Round dial pointer Line as dial pointer Triangle as dial pointer see page 465)
2.6.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TOverflowEvent ( see page 146) Description TOverflowEvent occurs when the value exceeds the nominal range.
145
2.6 _GClass Namespace TLimitEvent ( see page 146) see page 147)
Abakus VCL
Types
TLimitEvent occurs when the value exceeds the upper or lower limit. TLimitEvent ( see page 146) occurs when the value enter or leave a sector. Options for automatically created hints. Set of allowed keys. Options for Bar indicators. Event which occurs when a components need to read or write settings from/to an ini file Number of glyphs to represent different states of the button
TSectorChangeEvent ( THintOptions ( TEnabledKeys ( TBarOptions ( THandleIniEvent ( TNumGlyphs (
see page 148)
2.6.3.1 _GClass.TOverflowEvent Type

Pascal TOverflowEvent = procedure ( Sender: TObject; PPT: Integer) of object; C++ ( Sender: TObject; PPT: Integer) ( TOverflowEvent)(); File _GClass ( Parameters Parameters Sender PPT Description TOverflowEvent occurs when the value exceeds the nominal range. Description Sender object of the Event Value in parts per thousand see page 465)
2.6.3.2 _GClass.TLimitEvent Type

Pascal TLimitEvent = procedure (Sender: TObject; Lower, Upper: Boolean) of object; C++ (Sender: TObject; Lower, Upper: Boolean) ( TLimitEvent)(); File _GClass ( Parameters Parameters Sender Lower Upper Description TLimitEvent occurs when the value exceeds the upper or lower limit. Description Sender object of the Event value exceeds the lower limit value exceeds the upper limit see page 465)
146
Abakus VCL
Types
2.6.3.3 _GClass.TSectorChangeEvent Type

Pascal TSectorChangeEvent = procedure (Sender: TObject; Sector1, Sector2, Sector3, Enter: Boolean) of object; C++ (Sender: TObject; Sector1, Sector2, Sector3, Enter: Boolean) ( TSectorChangeEvent)(); File _GClass ( Parameters Parameters Sender Sector1 Sector2 Sector3 Enter Description TLimitEvent ( see page 146) occurs when the value enter or leave a sector. Description Sender object of the Event value enter or leave Sector1 value enter or leave Sector2 value enter or leave Sector3 If true Value enters, if false Value leaves the sector see page 465)
2.6.3.4 _GClass.THintOptions Type

Pascal THintOptions = set of THintOption; C++ THintOption THintOptions; File _GClass ( Description Options for automatically created hints. see page 465)
2.6.3.5 _GClass.TEnabledKeys Type

Pascal TEnabledKeys = set of TEnabledKey; C++ TEnabledKey TEnabledKeys; File _GClass ( Description Set of allowed keys. see page 465)
147
Abakus VCL
Variables
2.6.3.6 _GClass.TBarOptions Type

Pascal TBarOptions = set of TBarOption; C++ TBarOption TBarOptions; File _GClass ( Description Options for Bar indicators. see page 465)
2.6.3.7 _GClass.THandleIniEvent Type

Pascal THandleIniEvent = procedure (Ini: TIniFile; Read: Boolean) of object; C++ (Ini: TIniFile; Read: Boolean) ( THandleIniEvent)(); File _GClass ( Description Event which occurs when a components need to read or write settings from/to an ini file see page 465)
2.6.3.8 _GClass.TNumGlyphs Type

Pascal TNumGlyphs = vcl.Buttons.TNumGlyphs; C++ vcl.Buttons.TNumGlyphs TNumGlyphs; File _GClass ( Description Number of glyphs to represent different states of the button see page 465)
2.6.4 Variables
The following table lists variables in this documentation. Variables Name GroupUpdate ( see page 149) Description TAbBinGraphicControl update of a Group
148
2.7 AbBar Namespace
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.6.4.1 _GClass.GroupUpdate Variable

Pascal GroupUpdate: Boolean; C++ Boolean GroupUpdate; File _GClass ( Description TAbBinGraphicControl update of a Group see page 465)
2.7 AbBar Namespace

Unit with a Horizontal / vertical bar Component Classes Name TAbBar ( see page 150) Description Horizontal / vertical bar Component
2.7.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation.
149
2.7 AbBar Namespace Classes Name TAbBar ( see page 150)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Horizontal / vertical bar Component
2.7.1.1 TAbBar Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbBar = class(TAbAnalogGControl); C++ class TAbBar : public TAbAnalogGControl; File AbBar ( Description Horizontal / vertical bar Component see page 465)
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
150
2.7 AbBar Namespace TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick (
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the see page 125)
see page 124)
see page 125)
OnPosChanged (
151
2.7 AbBar Namespace TAbBar Class Name BarSettings ( see page 153)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description The Bar Settings
BevelOuter ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale (
see page 153)
Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component.
OnPosChanged ( TAbBar Class Name BarSettings (
Description see page 153) The Bar Settings
BevelOuter ( published Name AbInfo (
see page 153)
see page 78)
Description see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control.
OnDblClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver (
152
2.7 AbBar Namespace OnEndDrag ( OnLimit ( see page 122)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the see page 125)
see page 124)
see page 125)
2.7.1.1.1 private
2.7.1.1.1.1 TAbBar.BarSettings Property
Pascal property BarSettings: TBarSettings; C++ __property TBarSettings BarSettings; Description The Bar Settings
2.7.1.1.1.2 TAbBar.BevelOuter Property

Pascal property BevelOuter: TAbSBevel;
153
2.8 AbBevel Namespace C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelOuter; Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.8 AbBevel Namespace

Simple beveled control with two bevels (outer and inner). Classes Name TAbCustomBevel ( see page 155) Description Custom Bevel control.
TAbCustomIndBevel (
see page 156)
Custom Bevel control for Value indicators.
TAbBevel (
see page 156)
Simple beveled control with two bevels (outer and inner).
Structs, Records, Enums Name TAbBevelOption ( Types Name TAbBevelOptions ( see page 158) Description Set of Bevel Options see page 157) Description Set of Bevel Options
2.8.1 Classes
154
2.8 AbBevel Namespace Classes Name TAbCustomBevel ( see page 155)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Custom Bevel control.
TAbCustomIndBevel (
see page 156)
Custom Bevel control for Value indicators.
TAbBevel (
see page 156)
2.8.1.1 TAbCustomBevel Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbCustomBevel = class(TAbGraphicControl); C++ class TAbCustomBevel : public TAbGraphicControl; File AbBevel ( Description Custom Bevel control. see page 466)
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
155
2.8 AbBevel Namespace published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu (
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
2.8.1.2 TAbCustomIndBevel Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbCustomIndBevel = class(TAbCustomBevel); C++ class TAbCustomIndBevel : public TAbCustomBevel; File AbBevel ( Description Custom Bevel control for Value indicators. see page 466)
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
see page 78)
2.8.1.3 TAbBevel Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbBevel = class(TAbCustomBevel); 156
2.8 AbBevel Namespace C++ class TAbBevel : public TAbCustomBevel; File AbBevel ( Description see page 466)
Abakus VCL
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
see page 78)

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TAbBevelOption ( see page 157) Description Set of Bevel Options
2.8.2.1 AbBevel.TAbBevelOption Enumeration

Pascal TAbBevelOption = ( opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opTranparent ); C++ enum TAbBevelOption { opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opTranparent }; 157
2.9 AbCBitBt Namespace File AbBevel ( Members Members opBevelInner opBevelOuter opTranparent Description Set of Bevel Options see page 466)
Abakus VCL
Description Paint inner Bevel Paint outer Bevel Paint Transparent Bevel
2.8.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TAbBevelOptions ( see page 158) Description Set of Bevel Options
2.8.3.1 AbBevel.TAbBevelOptions Type

Pascal TAbBevelOptions = set of TAbBevelOption; C++ TAbBevelOption TAbBevelOptions; File AbBevel ( Description Set of Bevel Options see page 466)
2.9 AbCBitBt Namespace

Contains AbColBitBtn, a two state button/switch/indicator. Classes Name TAbColBitBtn ( see page 159) Description TAbColBitBtn is used as a two state button/switch/indicator.
158
2.9 AbCBitBt Namespace Structs, Records, Enums Name TFlashOption ( see page 169) see page 169)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Options to adjust what has to flash when Checked and Flashing properties are true. Set of options for the state "Checked".
TCheckedOption ( Types Name TFlashOptions ( see page 170)
Description Options to adjust what has to flash when Checked and Flashing properties are true.
TCheckedOptions (
see page 170)
2.9.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbColBitBtn ( see page 159) Description TAbColBitBtn is used as a two state button/switch/indicator.
2.9.1.1 TAbColBitBtn Class

TAbColBitBtn is used as a two state button/switch/indicator.
Hierarchy
Pascal TAbColBitBtn = class(TAbBinGControl); C++ class TAbColBitBtn : public TAbBinGControl; File AbCBitBt ( Description TAbColBitBtn functions: individual Text/Textcolor for the On and Off state ( TextColDisabled ( see page 167), TextColOff ( see page 167), TextColOn ( see page 168), TextOff ( see page 168), TextOn ( see page 168), Text3D ( see page 167)) 159 see page 466)
Abakus VCL see page 163), ColorOn (
Classes see page 164), see page 165)) see page
selectable Button face color for the state On / Off / disabled (ColorOff ( ColorDisabled ( see page 163)) 3-state Glyph ( see page 164) (On / disabled / Off) (NumGlyph (
see page 165), OffsetDown (
many glyph/text position options (PosGlyph ( see page 166), PosHorizontal ( see page 166), PosVertical ( 166), OffsetX ( see page 165), OffsetY ( see page 166), Spacing ( see page 167)) 3D gradient bevel with selectable colors (Beveled ( Flat ( see page 164) style button see page 168) see page 163), ButtonBevel ( see page 163))
Transparent (
Flashing possible with common frequencies selectable "CheckedOptions ( selectable "FlashOptions ( see page 163)"
see page 164)" see page 165))
selectable gradient for the button face (GradBtnFace ( Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbColBitBtn Class Name Beveled ( see page 163) see page 163) see page 163)
Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)
Description If the BeveledProperty is true (and Flat ( see page 164) = false) then the ButtonBevel ( see page 163) is drawn. Contains a set of properties that determine how button bevel is drawn. Options to adjust what has to change when Checked property change. Disabled color of the button face (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true). Color of the button face if Checked is false. (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true). Color of the button face if Checked is true. (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true). Options to adjust what has to flash when Checked and Flashing properties are true. If the Flat Property is true the button bevel is only drawn if the mouse is over this control. Specifies the bitmap that appears on the selected AbColBitBtn button. The GradBtnFace contains settings for a gradient style. Indicates the number of images that are in the graphic specified in the Glyph ( see page 164) property for use on a AbColBitBtn button. Offset to move the glyph/Text x/y position to increase the button down effect. Offset to correct the horizontal glyph/text position. Offset to correct the vertical glyph/text position.
ButtonBevel (
CheckedOptions ( ColorDisabled ( ColorOff ( ColorOn (
see page 163)
FlashOptions ( Flat ( Glyph (
GradBtnFace ( NumGlyph (
see page 165)
OffsetDown ( OffsetX ( OffsetY (
see page 165)
160
2.9 AbCBitBt Namespace PosGlyph ( see page 166)
Abakus VCL Position where the glyph is drawn.
Classes
PosHorizontal (
see page 166)
Horizontal glyph/text position.
PosVertical (
see page 166)
Vertical glyph/text position.
Spacing ( Text3D (
Determines where the image and text appear on a AbColBitBtn. If the Text3D is true then the Button text is drawn in (simple) 3D design. TextColOn ( see page 168) specify the text color if the button is disabled. TextColOn ( see page 168) specify the text color if the button is not Checked. TextColOn specify the text color if the button is Checked. TextOff property. TextOn property. If the Transparent is true the button face is transparent.
TextColDisabled ( TextColOff ( TextColOn ( TextOff ( TextOn (
Transparent ( published Name AbInfo (
Description see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbColBitBtn Class Name Beveled (
see page 135)
Description see page 163) see page 163) see page 163) If the BeveledProperty is true (and Flat ( see page 164) = false) then the ButtonBevel ( see page 163) is drawn. Contains a set of properties that determine how button bevel is drawn. Options to adjust what has to change when Checked property change. Disabled color of the button face (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true). Color of the button face if Checked is false. (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true). 161
ButtonBevel (
CheckedOptions ( ColorDisabled ( ColorOff (
see page 163)
see page 163)
2.9 AbCBitBt Namespace ColorOn ( see page 164) see page 164)
Abakus VCL Color of the button face if Checked is true. (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true).
Classes
Options to adjust what has to flash when Checked and Flashing properties are true. If the Flat Property is true the button bevel is only drawn if the mouse is over this control. Specifies the bitmap that appears on the selected AbColBitBtn button. The GradBtnFace contains settings for a gradient style. Indicates the number of images that are in the graphic specified in the Glyph ( see page 164) property for use on a AbColBitBtn button. Offset to move the glyph/Text x/y position to increase the button down effect. Offset to correct the horizontal glyph/text position. Offset to correct the vertical glyph/text position. Position where the glyph is drawn.
see page 165)
OffsetDown ( OffsetX ( OffsetY ( PosGlyph (
see page 165)
PosHorizontal (
see page 166)
PosVertical (
see page 166)
Spacing ( Text3D (
Transparent (
2.9.1.1.1 published
162
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.9.1.1.1.1 TAbColBitBtn.Beveled Property

Pascal property Beveled: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Beveled; Description If the BeveledProperty is true (and Flat ( see page 164) = false) then the ButtonBevel ( see page 163) is drawn.
2.9.1.1.1.2 TAbColBitBtn.ButtonBevel Property

Pascal property ButtonBevel: TAbBtnBevel; C++ __property TAbBtnBevel ButtonBevel; Description Contains a set of properties that determine how button bevel is drawn.
2.9.1.1.1.3 TAbColBitBtn.CheckedOptions Property

Pascal property CheckedOptions: TCheckedOptions; C++ __property TCheckedOptions CheckedOptions; Description Options to adjust what has to change when Checked property change.
2.9.1.1.1.4 TAbColBitBtn.ColorDisabled Property

Pascal property ColorDisabled: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorDisabled; Description Disabled color of the button face (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true).
2.9.1.1.1.5 TAbColBitBtn.ColorOff Property

Pascal property ColorOff: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorOff; Description Color of the button face if Checked is false. (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true).
163
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.9.1.1.1.6 TAbColBitBtn.ColorOn Property

Pascal property ColorOn: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorOn; Description Color of the button face if Checked is true. (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true).
2.9.1.1.1.7 TAbColBitBtn.FlashOptions Property

Pascal property FlashOptions: TFlashOptions; C++ __property TFlashOptions FlashOptions; Description Options to adjust what has to flash when Checked and Flashing properties are true.
2.9.1.1.1.8 TAbColBitBtn.Flat Property

Pascal property Flat: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Flat; Description If the Flat Property is true the button bevel is only drawn if the mouse is over this control.
2.9.1.1.1.9 TAbColBitBtn.Glyph Property

Specifies the bitmap that appears on the selected AbColBitBtn button. Pascal property Glyph: TBitmap; C++ __property TBitmap Glyph; Description Use the Open dialog box that appears as an editor in the Object Inspector to choose a bitmap file (with a .BMP extension) to use on the button, or specify a bitmap file at runtime. You can provide up to three images within a single bitmap. All images must be the same size and next to each other in a row. AbColBitBtn buttons display one of these images depending on their state.
First Bitmap (checked is false): This image appears when the button is up (unchecked). If no other images exist in the bitmap, AbColBitBtn buttons also use this image for all other states.
Second Bitmap (Disabled is true) This image usually appears dimmed to indicate that the button can't be selected.
164
Abakus VCL
Classes
Third Bitmap (Checked is true) This image appears when the button is checked.
If only one image is present, AbColBitBtn buttons attempt to represent the other states by altering the image slightly for the different states, although the Checked state is always the same as the unchecked state. If you aren't satisfied with the results, you can provide additional images in the bitmap. If you have multiple images in a bitmap, you must specify the number of images that are in the bitmap with the NumGlyphs property. Notes The lower left pixel of the bitmap is reserved for the "transparent" color. Any pixel in the bitmap which matches that lower left pixel will be transparent.
2.9.1.1.1.10 TAbColBitBtn.GradBtnFace Property

Pascal property GradBtnFace: TAbGradSettings; C++ __property TAbGradSettings GradBtnFace; Description The GradBtnFace contains settings for a gradient style.
2.9.1.1.1.11 TAbColBitBtn.NumGlyph Property

Pascal property NumGlyph: Integer; C++ __property int NumGlyph; Description Indicates the number of images that are in the graphic specified in the Glyph ( AbColBitBtn button. see page 164) property for use on a
2.9.1.1.1.12 TAbColBitBtn.OffsetDown Property

Pascal property OffsetDown: Integer; C++ __property int OffsetDown; Description Offset to move the glyph/Text x/y position to increase the button down effect.
2.9.1.1.1.13 TAbColBitBtn.OffsetX Property

Pascal property OffsetX: Integer; C++ __property int OffsetX; 165
2.9 AbCBitBt Namespace Description Offset to correct the horizontal glyph/text position.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.9.1.1.1.14 TAbColBitBtn.OffsetY Property

Pascal property OffsetY: Integer; C++ __property int OffsetY; Description Offset to correct the vertical glyph/text position.
2.9.1.1.1.15 TAbColBitBtn.PosGlyph Property

Pascal property PosGlyph: TPos; C++ __property TPos PosGlyph; Description Position where the glyph is drawn.
2.9.1.1.1.16 TAbColBitBtn.PosHorizontal Property

Pascal property PosHorizontal: TPosH; C++ __property TPosH PosHorizontal; Description Horizontal glyph/text position.
2.9.1.1.1.17 TAbColBitBtn.PosVertical Property

Pascal property PosVertical: TPosV;
166
2.9 AbCBitBt Namespace C++ __property TPosV PosVertical; Description Vertical glyph/text position.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.9.1.1.1.18 TAbColBitBtn.Spacing Property

Determines where the image and text appear on a AbColBitBtn. Pascal property Spacing: Integer; C++ __property int Spacing; Description Spacing determines the number of pixels between the image (specified in the Glyph ( see page 164) property) and the text (specified in the TextOff ( see page 168) / TextOn ( see page 168) property). The default value is 4 pixels. Spacing is the number of pixels between the image and text. If Spacing is 0, no pixels will be between the image and text.
2.9.1.1.1.19 TAbColBitBtn.Text3D Property

Pascal property Text3D: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Text3D; Description If the Text3D is true then the Button text is drawn in (simple) 3D design.
2.9.1.1.1.20 TAbColBitBtn.TextColDisabled Property

Pascal property TextColDisabled: TColor; C++ __property TColor TextColDisabled; Description TextColOn ( see page 168) specify the text color if the button is disabled.
2.9.1.1.1.21 TAbColBitBtn.TextColOff Property

Pascal property TextColOff: TColor; C++ __property TColor TextColOff;
167
2.9 AbCBitBt Namespace Description TextColOn (
Abakus VCL
see page 168) specify the text color if the button is not Checked.
2.9.1.1.1.22 TAbColBitBtn.TextColOn Property

Pascal property TextColOn: TColor; C++ __property TColor TextColOn; Description TextColOn specify the text color if the button is Checked.
2.9.1.1.1.23 TAbColBitBtn.TextOff Property

TextOff property. Pascal property TextOff: string; C++ __property AnsiString TextOff; Description TextOff specify the text if the button is not Checked. (if not specified then the TextOn ( see page 168) is used).
The text can be multiline text, line separator is "|". e.g.: Pump|OFF -> two line text (Pump and OFF)
2.9.1.1.1.24 TAbColBitBtn.TextOn Property

TextOn property. Pascal property TextOn: string; C++ __property AnsiString TextOn; Description TextOff ( see page 168) specify the text if the button is Checked.
The text can be multiline text, line separator is "|". e.g.: Pump|ON -> two line text (Pump and ON)
2.9.1.1.1.25 TAbColBitBtn.Transparent Property

Pascal property Transparent: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Transparent; Description If the Transparent is true the button face is transparent.
168
Abakus VCL

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TFlashOption ( see page 169) see page 169) Description Options to adjust what has to flash when Checked and Flashing properties are true. Set of options for the state "Checked".
TCheckedOption (
2.9.2.1 AbCBitBt.TFlashOption Enumeration

Pascal TFlashOption = ( foGlyph, foText, foTextCol, foBtnCol ); C++ enum TFlashOption { foGlyph, foText, foTextCol, foBtnCol }; File AbCBitBt ( Members Members foGlyph foText foTextCol foBtnCol Description Options to adjust what has to flash when Checked and Flashing properties are true. Description Flashing Glyph Flashing Text Flashing Text color Flashing Button color see page 466)
2.9.2.2 AbCBitBt.TCheckedOption Enumeration

Pascal TCheckedOption = ( coGlyph, coText, coTextCol, coBtnCol, coBevel ); C++ enum TCheckedOption { coGlyph, 169
2.9 AbCBitBt Namespace coText, coTextCol, coBtnCol, coBevel }; File AbCBitBt ( Members Members coGlyph coText coTextCol coBtnCol coBevel Description Set of options for the state "Checked". see page 466)
Abakus VCL
Types
Description Change Glyph Change Text Change Text color Change Button color Change Button bevel
2.9.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TFlashOptions ( see page 170) see page 170) Description Options to adjust what has to flash when Checked and Flashing properties are true.
TCheckedOptions (
2.9.3.1 AbCBitBt.TFlashOptions Type

Pascal TFlashOptions = set of TFlashOption; C++ TFlashOption TFlashOptions; File AbCBitBt ( Description Options to adjust what has to flash when Checked and Flashing properties are true. see page 466)
2.9.3.2 AbCBitBt.TCheckedOptions Type

Pascal TCheckedOptions = set of TCheckedOption; C++ TCheckedOption TCheckedOptions;
170
2.10 AbClock Namespace File AbCBitBt ( see page 466)
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.10 AbClock Namespace

A clock indicator graphic control Classes Name TAbClock ( see page 171) Description A clock indicator graphic control
Structs, Records, Enums Name TClockOption ( see page 173) Description clock options
2.10.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbClock ( see page 171) Description A clock indicator graphic control
2.10.1.1 TAbClock Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbClock = class(TAbGraphicControl); C++ class TAbClock : public TAbGraphicControl;
171
2.10 AbClock Namespace File AbClock ( Description A clock indicator graphic control see page 466)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( private TAbClock Class Name AutoHint ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( ClockOption ( private TAbClock Class Name AutoHint ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( ClockOption ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. see page 172) see page 173) see page 173) see page 173) Description Options for automatically created hints. Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. clock options see page 172) see page 173) see page 173) see page 173) Description Options for automatically created hints. Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. clock options Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
see page 78)
2.10.1.1.1 private
2.10.1.1.1.1 TAbClock.AutoHint Property
Pascal property AutoHint: Boolean;
172
2.10 AbClock Namespace C++ __property Boolean AutoHint; Description Options for automatically created hints.
Abakus VCL
2.10.1.1.1.2 TAbClock.BevelInner Property

Pascal property BevelInner: TAbSBevel; C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelInner; Description Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component.
2.10.1.1.1.3 TAbClock.BevelOuter Property

Pascal property BevelOuter: TAbSBevel; C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelOuter; Description Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component.
2.10.1.1.1.4 TAbClock.ClockOption Property

Pascal property ClockOption: TClockOption; C++ __property TClockOption ClockOption; Description clock options

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TClockOption ( see page 173) Description clock options
2.10.2.1 AbClock.TClockOption Enumeration

Pascal TClockOption = ( coDate, coTime, coDateTime 173
2.11 AbCompas Namespace ); C++ enum TClockOption { coDate, coTime, coDateTime }; File AbClock ( Members Members coDate coTime coDateTime Description clock options see page 466)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description only date is shown only time is shown date/time is shown
2.11 AbCompas Namespace

A Compass component. Classes Name TAbCompass ( see page 175) Description Compass component
Structs, Records, Enums Name TCompassOption ( Types Name TCompassOptions ( see page 179) Description Options for the compass component. see page 178) Description Options for the compass component.
174
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.11.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbCompass ( see page 175) Description Compass component
2.11.1.1 TAbCompass Class

Compass component
Hierarchy
Pascal TAbCompass = class(TAbAnalogGControl); C++ class TAbCompass : public TAbAnalogGControl; File AbCompas ( Description Compass component. see page 466)
175
Abakus VCL
Classes
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( Description Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the see page 125) Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Event occurs if the Value ( adjusted range see page 125) exceeds the
176
2.11 AbCompas Namespace OnSectorChange ( OnSettingsChange ( OnStartDrag ( see page 124) see page 124)
Abakus VCL Event occurs if the Value ( sector
Classes see page 125) exit or enter a
see page 124)
see page 125)
see page 78)
OnMinMaxChange ( OnMouseDown (
see page 123)
Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control.
177
2.11 AbCompas Namespace OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnOverflow ( see page 123)
Abakus VCL
Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Event occurs if the Value ( adjusted range Event occurs if the Value ( sector see page 125) exceeds the see page 125) exit or enter a
see page 124)
see page 125)

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TCompassOption ( see page 178) Description Options for the compass component.
2.11.2.1 AbCompas.TCompassOption Enumeration

Pascal TCompassOption = ( opArrowShould, opBevelOuterRnd, opBevelInnerRnd, opBevelOuter, opName1, opName2, opSubSteps, opValue ); C++ enum TCompassOption { opArrowShould, opBevelOuterRnd, opBevelInnerRnd, opBevelOuter, opName1, opName2, opSubSteps, opValue }; File AbCompas ( see page 466)
178
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace Members Members opArrowShould opBevelOuterRnd opBevelInnerRnd opBevelOuter opName1 opName2 opSubSteps opValue Description Options for the compass component.
Abakus VCL
Description Draw Arrow course should Draw outer round bevel Draw inner round bevel Draw outer bevel Draw SignalName1 Draw SignalName2 Draw SubSteps Draw Value indication
2.11.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TCompassOptions ( see page 179) Description Options for the compass component.
2.11.3.1 AbCompas.TCompassOptions Type

Pascal TCompassOptions = set of TCompassOption; C++ TCompassOption TCompassOptions; File AbCompas ( Description Options for the compass component. see page 466)
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace

Unit wit the DB-Aware versions of our components. Classes Name TAbDBHSlider ( TAbDBVSlider ( TAbDBDial ( TAbDBGearDial ( TAbDBValueInd ( see page 181) see page 185) see page 193) see page 197) Description Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. 179
see page 190)
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TAbDBHMeter ( TAbDBVMeter ( see page 201) see page 205) see page 210) see page 211) see page 213) see page 217) see page 220)
Abakus VCL Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component.
Classes
TAbDBFlexHMeter ( TAbDBFlexVMeter ( TAbDB270Meter ( TAbDB180Meter ( TAbDB120Meter ( TAbDBBar ( TAbDBVBar ( TAbDBHBar ( TAbDBTank ( TAbDBLED (
TAbDBThermometer (
TAbDBColBitBtn (
TAbDBRockerSwitch ( TAbDBToggleSwitch (
2.12.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbDBHSlider ( TAbDBVSlider ( TAbDBDial ( TAbDBGearDial ( TAbDBValueInd ( TAbDBHMeter ( TAbDBVMeter ( see page 181) see page 185) see page 193) see page 197) see page 201) see page 205) see page 210) see page 211) see page 213) see page 217) see page 220) Description Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component. Data-aware version of the component.
see page 190)
TAbDBFlexHMeter ( TAbDBFlexVMeter ( TAbDB270Meter ( TAbDB180Meter ( TAbDB120Meter ( TAbDBBar ( TAbDBVBar ( TAbDBHBar ( TAbDBTank ( TAbDBLED (
TAbDBThermometer (
TAbDBColBitBtn (
TAbDBRockerSwitch ( TAbDBToggleSwitch (
180
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.12.1.1 TAbDBHSlider Class

Data-aware version of the component. Hierarchy
Pascal TAbDBHSlider = class(TAbHSlider); C++ class TAbDBHSlider : public TAbHSlider; File AbDBCtrls ( Description This control represents a analog indicator/adjuster which can display and set a field in a dataset. Allowed FieldData-Types are: Boolean, Single and Integer see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) Description Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
see page 79)
see page 79)
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Set of enabled keys to change the value Enables/disables the keyboard input Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control.
ColorNonFocus (
EnableKeyboard ( OnDblClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver (
181
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace OnEndDrag ( OnEnter ( OnExit ( see page 130)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus. Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed. Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed Determines where a control looks for its font information. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Contains settings for the analog signal Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Contains the analog Value Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication Visibility of the component.
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( TAbDBHSlider Class Name DataField (
ValueIndicator (
Description see page 185) see page 185) Specifies the field whose value is displayed by the database text control. Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access. Links the text control to the dataset that contains the field it represents.
DataReadOnly ( DataSource ( private TAbHSlider Class Name BevelOuter ( ButtonSize ( ColorTrench ( Options (
see page 185)
Description see page 300) see page 300) see page 300) Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Size of the slider-button. Color of the trench.
see page 301)
182
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace ScaleSettings ( see page 301)
Classes
private TAbHSlider Class Name BevelOuter ( ButtonSize ( ColorTrench ( Options ( ScaleSettings ( see page 300) see page 300) see page 300) see page 301) Description Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Size of the slider-button. Color of the trench. Class with settings for a scale
see page 301)
published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) Description Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
see page 79)
see page 79)
Color if the component has the focus 183
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace ColorNonFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128)
Abakus VCL Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits
Classes
see page 128)
Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Set of enabled keys to change the value Enables/disables the keyboard input Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus. Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed. Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed Determines where a control looks for its font information. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Contains settings for the analog signal Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Contains the analog Value Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication Visibility of the component.
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( TAbDBHSlider Class Name DataField (
ValueIndicator (
DataReadOnly ( DataSource (
see page 185)
184
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.12.1.1.1.1 TAbDBHSlider.DataField Property

Pascal property DataField: string; C++ __property AnsiString DataField; Description Specifies the field whose value is displayed by the database text control.
2.12.1.1.1.2 TAbDBHSlider.DataReadOnly Property

Pascal property DataReadOnly: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean DataReadOnly; Description Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access.
2.12.1.1.1.3 TAbDBHSlider.DataSource Property

Pascal property DataSource: TDataSource; C++ __property TDataSource DataSource; Description Links the text control to the dataset that contains the field it represents.
2.12.1.2 TAbDBVSlider Class

Pascal TAbDBVSlider = class(TAbVSlider); C++ class TAbDBVSlider : public TAbVSlider; File AbDBCtrls ( Description This control represents a analog indicator/adjuster which can display and set a field in a dataset. Allowed FieldData-Types are: Boolean, Single and Integer see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set.
185
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 79)
see page 79)
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Set of enabled keys to change the value Enables/disables the keyboard input Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus. Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed. Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed Determines where a control looks for its font information. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Contains settings for the analog signal
ColorNonFocus (
SignalSettings (
186
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( TAbDBVSlider Class Name DataField ( see page 189) see page 189) see page 133) see page 133) see page 134)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Contains the analog Value Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication Visibility of the component.
ValueIndicator (
Description Specifies the field whose value is displayed by the database text control. Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access. Links the text control to the dataset that contains the field it represents.
DataReadOnly ( DataSource ( private TAbVSlider Class Name BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( ButtonSize ( ColorTrench ( FontValue ( Options (
see page 190)
Description see page 459) see page 459) see page 459) see page 460) see page 460) see page 460) Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Bevel of the value indicator Size of the slider button Trench color Font, used for the signal value indication Class with settings for a scale
see page 460)
ScaleSettings (
private TAbVSlider Class Name BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( ButtonSize ( ColorTrench ( FontValue ( Options ( see page 459) see page 459) see page 459) see page 460) see page 460) Description Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Bevel of the value indicator Size of the slider button Trench color Font, used for the signal value indication
see page 460)
187
Classes
published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) Description Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
see page 79)
see page 79)
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Set of enabled keys to change the value Enables/disables the keyboard input Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus. Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed. Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control.
ColorNonFocus (
OnMouseDown (
188
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnStartDrag ( see page 131)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed Determines where a control looks for its font information. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Contains settings for the analog signal Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Contains the analog Value Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication Visibility of the component.
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( TAbDBVSlider Class Name DataField (
ValueIndicator (
see page 190)
2.12.1.2.1.1 TAbDBVSlider.DataField Property
2.12.1.2.1.2 TAbDBVSlider.DataReadOnly Property

189
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.12.1.2.1.3 TAbDBVSlider.DataSource Property

2.12.1.3 TAbDBDial Class

Pascal TAbDBDial = class(TAbDial); C++ class TAbDBDial : public TAbDial; File AbDBCtrls ( Description This control represents a analog indicator/adjuster which can display and set a field in a dataset. Allowed FieldData-Types are: Boolean, Single and Integer see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) Description Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
see page 79)
see page 79)
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits 190
ColorNonFocus (
see page 129)
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace Enabled ( see page 129) see page 129) see page 129)
Abakus VCL
Classes
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( TAbDBDial Class Name DataField (
ValueIndicator (
DataReadOnly ( DataSource ( published Name AbInfo (
see page 193)
OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu (
see page 79)
191
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 79)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
ColorNonFocus (
ValueIndicator (
192
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TAbDBDial Class Name DataField ( see page 193) see page 193)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 193)
2.12.1.3.1.1 TAbDBDial.DataField Property
2.12.1.3.1.2 TAbDBDial.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.3.1.3 TAbDBDial.DataSource Property

2.12.1.4 TAbDBGearDial Class

Pascal TAbDBGearDial = class(TAbGearDial);
193
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace C++
Abakus VCL
Classes
class TAbDBGearDial : public TAbGearDial; File AbDBCtrls ( Description This control represents a analog indicator/adjuster which can display and set a field in a dataset. Allowed FieldData-Types are: Boolean, Single and Integer see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) Description Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
see page 79)
see page 79)
ColorNonFocus (
OnMouseDown (
194
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnStartDrag ( see page 131)
Abakus VCL
Classes
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( TAbGearDial Class Name BevelGearDial ( PointerSize ( PointerType ( RotAngle ( StartAngle ( TAbDBGearDial Class Name DataField (
ValueIndicator (
Description see page 279) Determines the style of the round bevel of the dial control. Size of the Dial pointer The dial pointer shape. Angle of rotation in 1 Start Angle (zero position) of the dial pointer see page 279) see page 279) see page 280) see page 280)
see page 197)
Description see page 79) see page 79) Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus (
see page 79)
see page 79)
Description see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit (
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus
ColorNonFocus (
195
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128)
Abakus VCL Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits
Classes
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( TAbGearDial Class Name BevelGearDial ( PointerSize ( PointerType ( RotAngle ( StartAngle ( TAbDBGearDial Class Name DataField (
ValueIndicator (
Description see page 197) Specifies the field whose value is displayed by the database text control.
196
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace DataReadOnly ( DataSource ( see page 197)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access. Links the text control to the dataset that contains the field it represents.
see page 197)
2.12.1.4.1.1 TAbDBGearDial.DataField Property
2.12.1.4.1.2 TAbDBGearDial.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.4.1.3 TAbDBGearDial.DataSource Property

2.12.1.5 TAbDBValueInd Class

Pascal TAbDBValueInd = class(TAbValueInd); C++ class TAbDBValueInd : public TAbValueInd; File AbDBCtrls ( see page 467)
197
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
This control represents a analog/binary indicator or button which can display and set a field in a dataset. Allowed FieldData-Types are: Boolean, Single and Integer
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( Description Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the see page 125) Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
Event occurs if settings has changed Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. Event occurs if signal Value ( see page 125) has changed Settings for the component scale sectors Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. 198
see page 124)
see page 125)
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBValueInd Class Name DataField ( see page 201) see page 201) see page 125)
Abakus VCL Settings for the analog Signal The Signal Value
Classes
see page 125)
DataReadOnly ( DataSource ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale (
see page 201)
OnPosChanged ( TAbValueInd Class Name AutoSize ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale (
Description see page 444) see page 444) see page 444) see page 444) see page 445) If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication
see page 445)
OnPosChanged ( TAbValueInd Class Name AutoSize ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options ( published Name AbInfo (
Description see page 444) see page 444) see page 444) see page 444) see page 445) If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication
see page 445)
OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu (
see page 78)
199
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick (
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 124)
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBValueInd Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
see page 201)
200
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.12.1.5.1.1 TAbDBValueInd.DataField Property

2.12.1.5.1.2 TAbDBValueInd.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.5.1.3 TAbDBValueInd.DataSource Property

2.12.1.6 TAbDBHMeter Class

Pascal TAbDBHMeter = class(TAbHMeter); C++ class TAbDBHMeter : public TAbHMeter; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. 201
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick (
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 124)
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBHMeter Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
Description see page 205) see page 205) Specifies the field whose value is displayed by the database text control. Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access. 202
DataReadOnly (
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace DataSource ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( TAbHMeter Class Name AutoSize ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( FontUnit ( Options ( see page 293) see page 293) see page 293) see page 205)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Links the text control to the dataset that contains the field it represents.
Description Property to select Log10 scale or Linar scale Occurs if component position has changed
Description If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Font, used for the signal unit indication Class with settings for a scale
ScaleSettings (
private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( TAbHMeter Class Name AutoSize ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( FontUnit ( Options ( see page 293) see page 293) see page 293) Description If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Font, used for the signal unit indication Description Property to select Log10 scale or Linar scale Occurs if component position has changed
203
Classes
published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( Description Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the see page 125) Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
Event occurs if settings has changed Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. 204
see page 124)
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace OnValueChange ( SectorSettings ( ShowHint ( see page 124) see page 124)
Abakus VCL Event occurs if signal Value (
Classes see page 125) has changed
Settings for the component scale sectors Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Settings for the analog Signal The Signal Value
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBHMeter Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
see page 205)
2.12.1.6.1.1 TAbDBHMeter.DataField Property
2.12.1.6.1.2 TAbDBHMeter.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.6.1.3 TAbDBHMeter.DataSource Property

2.12.1.7 TAbDBVMeter Class

Data-aware version of the component.
205
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace Hierarchy
Abakus VCL
Classes
Pascal TAbDBVMeter = class(TAbVMeter); C++ class TAbDBVMeter : public TAbVMeter; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
see page 78)
OnMinMaxChange ( OnMouseDown ( OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp (
Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component.
see page 123)
206
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace OnOverflow ( see page 123) see page 124) see page 124)
Abakus VCL Event occurs if the Value ( adjusted range Event occurs if the Value ( sector
Classes see page 125) exceeds the see page 125) exit or enter a
see page 124)
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBVMeter Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
see page 210)
OnPosChanged ( TAbVMeter Class Name AutoSize ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options (
Description see page 451) see page 451) see page 451) see page 452) see page 452) see page 452) If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value bevel. Font of the value indicator Class with settings for a scale
see page 452)
ScaleSettings (
207
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( TAbVMeter Class Name AutoSize ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options ( see page 451) see page 451) see page 451) see page 452) see page 452) see page 452)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value bevel. Font of the value indicator Class with settings for a scale
see page 452)
ScaleSettings (
published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( Description Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
OnDblClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver ( OnEndDrag (
208
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace OnLimit ( see page 122) see page 123)
Abakus VCL Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit
Classes see page 125) exceeds the see page 125)
see page 124)
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBVMeter Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
see page 210)
2.12.1.7.1.1 TAbDBVMeter.DataField Property
2.12.1.7.1.2 TAbDBVMeter.DataReadOnly Property

Pascal property DataReadOnly: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean DataReadOnly;
209
Abakus VCL
Classes
Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access.
2.12.1.7.1.3 TAbDBVMeter.DataSource Property

2.12.1.8 TAbDBFlexHMeter Class

Pascal TAbDBFlexHMeter = class(TAbFlexHMeter); C++ class TAbDBFlexHMeter : public TAbFlexHMeter; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbDBFlexHMeter Class Name DataField ( see page 211) see page 211) Description Specifies the field whose value is displayed by the database text control. Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access. Links the text control to the dataset that contains the field it represents. 210 Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
see page 211)
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbDBFlexHMeter Class Name DataField ( see page 211) see page 211)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 211)
2.12.1.8.1.1 TAbDBFlexHMeter.DataField Property
2.12.1.8.1.2 TAbDBFlexHMeter.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.8.1.3 TAbDBFlexHMeter.DataSource Property

2.12.1.9 TAbDBFlexVMeter Class

Data-aware version of the component. 211
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace Hierarchy
Abakus VCL
Classes
Pascal TAbDBFlexVMeter = class(TAbFlexVMeter); C++ class TAbDBFlexVMeter : public TAbFlexVMeter; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbDBFlexVMeter Class Name DataField ( see page 213) see page 213) Description Specifies the field whose value is displayed by the database text control. Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access. Links the text control to the dataset that contains the field it represents. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
see page 213)
OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbDBFlexVMeter Class Name DataField (
see page 78)
see page 213)
212
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.12.1.9.1.1 TAbDBFlexVMeter.DataField Property

2.12.1.9.1.2 TAbDBFlexVMeter.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.9.1.3 TAbDBFlexVMeter.DataSource Property

2.12.1.10 TAbDB270Meter Class

Pascal TAbDB270Meter = class(TAb270Meter); C++ class TAbDB270Meter : public TAb270Meter; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. 213
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick (
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 124)
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDB270Meter Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
Description see page 216) see page 216) Specifies the field whose value is displayed by the database text control. Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access. 214
DataReadOnly (
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace DataSource ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( see page 216)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
OnSectorChange ( OnSettingsChange (
Event occurs if settings has changed
215
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace OnStartDrag ( see page 124)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 125)
see page 216)
2.12.1.10.1.1 TAbDB270Meter.DataField Property
2.12.1.10.1.2 TAbDB270Meter.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.10.1.3 TAbDB270Meter.DataSource Property

216
Abakus VCL
Classes

see page 78)
see page 123)
217
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnOverflow ( see page 123)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 124)
see page 125)
see page 220)
see page 78)
Description see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit 218
HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper (
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace MinMax ( OnClick ( see page 121) see page 121) see page 122) see page 122) see page 122) see page 122)
Abakus VCL Stores the Min/Max Value (
Classes see page 125) with DateTime
Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the see page 125)
see page 124)
see page 125)
see page 220)
219
Abakus VCL
Classes



To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
220
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick (
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 124)
see page 125)
see page 223)
Description see page 120) see page 120) Property to select Log10 scale or Linar scale Occurs if component position has changed 221
OnPosChanged (
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick (
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 124)
see page 125)
222
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TAbDB120Meter Class Name DataField ( see page 223) see page 223)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 223)


2.12.1.13 TAbDBBar Class

Pascal TAbDBBar = class(TAbBar);
223
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace C++ class TAbDBBar : public TAbBar; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
224
Abakus VCL
Classes
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBBar Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
see page 227)
OnPosChanged ( TAbBar Class Name BarSettings (
Description see page 153) The Bar Settings
BevelOuter ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale (
see page 153)
OnPosChanged (
225
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TAbBar Class Name BarSettings ( see page 153)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description The Bar Settings
BevelOuter ( published Name AbInfo (
see page 153)
see page 78)
Event occurs if settings has changed Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. Event occurs if signal Value ( see page 125) has changed 226
see page 124)
OnValueChange (
see page 124)
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace SectorSettings ( ShowHint ( see page 124)
Abakus VCL Settings for the component scale sectors
Classes
Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Settings for the analog Signal The Signal Value
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBBar Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
see page 227)
2.12.1.13.1.1 TAbDBBar.DataField Property
2.12.1.13.1.2 TAbDBBar.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.13.1.3 TAbDBBar.DataSource Property

2.12.1.14 TAbDBVBar Class

Data-aware version of the component.
227
Abakus VCL
Classes
Hierarchy
Pascal TAbDBVBar = class(TAbVBar); C++ class TAbDBVBar : public TAbVBar; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
see page 78)
see page 123)
228
see page 124)
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBVBar Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
see page 231)
OnPosChanged ( TAbVBar Class Name AutoSize (
Description see page 435) see page 436) see page 436) see page 436) see page 436) see page 436) If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) The Bar Settings Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication
BarSettings ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale (
see page 437)
Description see page 435) see page 436) see page 436) If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) The Bar Settings Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. 229
BarSettings ( BevelInner (
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( see page 436) see page 436) see page 436)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication
see page 437)
see page 78)
see page 124)
see page 125)
230
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TAbDBVBar Class Name DataField ( see page 231) see page 231)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 231)
2.12.1.14.1.1 TAbDBVBar.DataField Property
2.12.1.14.1.2 TAbDBVBar.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.14.1.3 TAbDBVBar.DataSource Property

2.12.1.15 TAbDBHBar Class

Pascal TAbDBHBar = class(TAbHBar);
231
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace C++ class TAbDBHBar : public TAbHBar; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
232
Abakus VCL
Classes
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBHBar Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
see page 235)
OnPosChanged ( TAbHBar Class Name AutoSize (
Description see page 286) see page 286) see page 286) see page 286) see page 286) see page 287) If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Settings for Bar-indications Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication
see page 287)
BarSettings ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options (
see page 287)
233
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick (
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 124)
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBHBar Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
Description see page 235) see page 235) Specifies the field whose value is displayed by the database text control. Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access.
DataReadOnly (
234
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace DataSource ( see page 235)
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.12.1.15.1.1 TAbDBHBar.DataField Property
2.12.1.15.1.2 TAbDBHBar.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.15.1.3 TAbDBHBar.DataSource Property

2.12.1.16 TAbDBThermometer Class

Pascal TAbDBThermometer = class(TAbThermometer); C++ class TAbDBThermometer : public TAbThermometer; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
235
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 124)
see page 125)
236
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TAbDBThermometer Class Name DataField ( see page 239) see page 239)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 239)
OnPosChanged ( TAbThermometer Class Name AutoSize (
Description see page 395) see page 395) see page 395) see page 396) see page 396) see page 396) see page 396) If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Settings for Bar-indications Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the Value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication Class with settings for a scale
see page 396)
ScaleSettings (
ScaleSpacing ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale (
see page 397)
Space Bar and Scale.
Description see page 395) see page 395) If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Settings for Bar-indications 237
BarSettings (
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options ( see page 395) see page 396) see page 396) see page 396) see page 396)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the Value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication Class with settings for a scale
see page 396)
ScaleSettings (
ScaleSpacing ( published Name AbInfo (
see page 397)
see page 78)
see page 123)
238
see page 124)
see page 125)
TAbDBThermometer Class Name DataField ( see page 239) see page 239) Description Specifies the field whose value is displayed by the database text control. Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access. Links the text control to the dataset that contains the field it represents.
see page 239)
2.12.1.16.1.1 TAbDBThermometer.DataField Property
2.12.1.16.1.2 TAbDBThermometer.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.16.1.3 TAbDBThermometer.DataSource Property

Pascal property DataSource: TDataSource; C++ __property TDataSource DataSource;
239
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.12.1.17 TAbDBTank Class

Pascal TAbDBTank = class(TAbTank); C++ class TAbDBTank : public TAbTank; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( Description Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
see page 122)
240
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace OnMinMaxChange ( OnMouseDown ( OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnOverflow ( see page 123)
Abakus VCL Event occurs if a new min or max Value ( has changed
Classes see page 125)
see page 124)
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBTank Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
see page 243)
OnPosChanged ( TAbTank Class Name BevelValue ( FontUnitCol ( Options ( PPH (
Description see page 387) see page 387) Settings for the bevel of the Value indicator. Property to adjust the font color of the signal unit indication. Set of options for the tank component. Property to adjust a Percentage of "Value" shown in a different color. Property to adjust a different color for a certain percentage of the level indication. Some general settings for the Tank component. Property to adjust the horizontal offset of the Value Indicator Property to adjust the vertical offset of the Value Indicator
see page 387)
PPHColor (
TankSettings ( VIndOffsX ( VIndOffsY (
241
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( TAbTank Class Name BevelValue ( FontUnitCol ( Options ( PPH ( see page 387) see page 387)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Settings for the bevel of the Value indicator. Property to adjust the font color of the signal unit indication. Set of options for the tank component. Property to adjust a Percentage of "Value" shown in a different color. Property to adjust a different color for a certain percentage of the level indication. Some general settings for the Tank component. Property to adjust the horizontal offset of the Value Indicator Property to adjust the vertical offset of the Value Indicator
see page 387)
PPHColor (
TankSettings ( VIndOffsX ( VIndOffsY ( published Name AbInfo (
see page 78)
242
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace OnSectorChange ( OnSettingsChange ( OnStartDrag ( see page 124) see page 124)
see page 124)
SignalSettings ( Value ( TAbDBTank Class Name DataField (
see page 125)
see page 243)
2.12.1.17.1.1 TAbDBTank.DataField Property
2.12.1.17.1.2 TAbDBTank.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.17.1.3 TAbDBTank.DataSource Property

Pascal property DataSource: TDataSource; C++ __property TDataSource DataSource; Description Links the text control to the dataset that contains the field it represents. 243
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.12.1.18 TAbDBLED Class

Pascal TAbDBLED = class(TAbLED); C++ class TAbDBLED : public TAbLED; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbDBLED Class Name DataField ( see page 245) see page 245) Description Specifies the field whose value is displayed by the database text control. Specifies that the DataField connection provides read-only access. Links the text control to the dataset that contains the field it represents. Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)
see page 245)
PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible (
see page 135)
244
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TAbDBLED Class Name DataField ( see page 245) see page 245)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 245)
2.12.1.18.1.1 TAbDBLED.DataField Property
2.12.1.18.1.2 TAbDBLED.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.18.1.3 TAbDBLED.DataSource Property

2.12.1.19 TAbDBColBitBtn Class

Pascal TAbDBColBitBtn = class(TAbColBitBtn);
245
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace C++
Abakus VCL
Classes
class TAbDBColBitBtn : public TAbColBitBtn; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbColBitBtn Class Name Beveled ( see page 163) see page 163) see page 163) Description If the BeveledProperty is true (and Flat ( see page 164) = false) then the ButtonBevel ( see page 163) is drawn. Contains a set of properties that determine how button bevel is drawn. Options to adjust what has to change when Checked property change. Disabled color of the button face (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true). Color of the button face if Checked is false. (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true). Color of the button face if Checked is true. (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true). Options to adjust what has to flash when Checked and Flashing properties are true. If the Flat Property is true the button bevel is only drawn if the mouse is over this control. Specifies the bitmap that appears on the selected AbColBitBtn button. The GradBtnFace contains settings for a gradient style. Indicates the number of images that are in the graphic specified in the Glyph ( see page 164) property for use on a AbColBitBtn button. Offset to move the glyph/Text x/y position to increase the button down effect. Offset to correct the horizontal glyph/text position. Offset to correct the vertical glyph/text position. Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)
ButtonBevel (
see page 163)
see page 165)
OffsetDown ( OffsetX ( OffsetY (
see page 165)
246
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace PosGlyph ( see page 166)
Abakus VCL Position where the glyph is drawn.
Classes
PosHorizontal (
see page 166)
PosVertical (
see page 166)
Spacing ( Text3D (
Transparent ( TAbDBColBitBtn Class Name DataField (
see page 249)
PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible (
see page 135)
247
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TAbColBitBtn Class Name Beveled ( see page 163) see page 163) see page 163)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description If the BeveledProperty is true (and Flat ( see page 164) = false) then the ButtonBevel ( see page 163) is drawn. Contains a set of properties that determine how button bevel is drawn. Options to adjust what has to change when Checked property change. Disabled color of the button face (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true). Color of the button face if Checked is false. (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true). Color of the button face if Checked is true. (not used if property Transparent ( see page 168) = true). Options to adjust what has to flash when Checked and Flashing properties are true. If the Flat Property is true the button bevel is only drawn if the mouse is over this control. Specifies the bitmap that appears on the selected AbColBitBtn button. The GradBtnFace contains settings for a gradient style. Indicates the number of images that are in the graphic specified in the Glyph ( see page 164) property for use on a AbColBitBtn button. Offset to move the glyph/Text x/y position to increase the button down effect. Offset to correct the horizontal glyph/text position. Offset to correct the vertical glyph/text position. Position where the glyph is drawn.
ButtonBevel (
see page 163)
see page 165)
OffsetDown ( OffsetX ( OffsetY ( PosGlyph (
see page 165)
PosHorizontal (
see page 166)
PosVertical (
see page 166)
Spacing ( Text3D (
Determines where the image and text appear on a AbColBitBtn. If the Text3D is true then the Button text is drawn in (simple) 3D design.
248
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace TextColDisabled ( TextColOff ( TextColOn ( TextOff ( TextOn ( see page 167)
Abakus VCL
Classes
TextColOn ( see page 168) specify the text color if the button is disabled. TextColOn ( see page 168) specify the text color if the button is not Checked. TextColOn specify the text color if the button is Checked. TextOff property. TextOn property. If the Transparent is true the button face is transparent.
Transparent ( TAbDBColBitBtn Class Name DataField (
see page 249)
2.12.1.19.1.1 TAbDBColBitBtn.DataField Property
2.12.1.19.1.2 TAbDBColBitBtn.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.19.1.3 TAbDBColBitBtn.DataSource Property

249
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.12.1.20 TAbDBRockerSwitch Class

Pascal TAbDBRockerSwitch = class(TAbRockerSwitch); C++ class TAbDBRockerSwitch : public TAbRockerSwitch; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbSwitch Class Name BevelOuter ( see page 376) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) BtnBevelWidth ( BtnColorFace ( Description Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Width of the button bevel. Color of the button face. Highlight Color of the button Bevel. Shadow color of the button Bevel. Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)
BtnColorHighlight ( BtnColorShadow ( TAbDBRockerSwitch Class Name DataField (
see page 251)
Description see page 135) Contact and copyright notes. 250
2.12 AbDBCtrls Namespace PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbSwitch Class Name BevelOuter ( see page 376) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) BtnBevelWidth ( BtnColorFace ( see page 135)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)
see page 135)
Description Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Width of the button bevel. Color of the button face. Highlight Color of the button Bevel. Shadow color of the button Bevel.
BtnColorHighlight ( BtnColorShadow ( TAbDBRockerSwitch Class Name DataField (
see page 251)
2.12.1.20.1.1 TAbDBRockerSwitch.DataField Property
2.12.1.20.1.2 TAbDBRockerSwitch.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.20.1.3 TAbDBRockerSwitch.DataSource Property

Abakus VCL
Classes
2.12.1.21 TAbDBToggleSwitch Class

Pascal TAbDBToggleSwitch = class(TAbToggleSwitch); C++ class TAbDBToggleSwitch : public TAbToggleSwitch; File AbDBCtrls ( Description see page 467)
To allow the component to represent the data for a field, both the DataSource and the DataField properties must be set. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbSwitch Class Name BevelOuter ( see page 376) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) BtnBevelWidth ( BtnColorFace ( Description Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Width of the button bevel. Color of the button face. Highlight Color of the button Bevel. Shadow color of the button Bevel. Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)
BtnColorHighlight ( BtnColorShadow ( TAbDBToggleSwitch Class Name DataField (
see page 253)
2.13 AbDial Namespace PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbSwitch Class Name BevelOuter ( see page 376) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) BtnBevelWidth ( BtnColorFace ( see page 135)
Abakus VCL Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)
see page 135)
BtnColorHighlight ( BtnColorShadow ( TAbDBToggleSwitch Class Name DataField (
see page 253)
2.12.1.21.1.1 TAbDBToggleSwitch.DataField Property
2.12.1.21.1.2 TAbDBToggleSwitch.DataReadOnly Property

2.12.1.21.1.3 TAbDBToggleSwitch.DataSource Property

2.13 AbDial Namespace
Abakus VCL
Classes

Dial (knob, Value adjuster)
Component to adjust analog values. Classes Name TAbDial ( see page 254) Description Dial (knob, Value adjuster)
Structs, Records, Enums Name TDialOption ( Types Name TDialOptions ( see page 258) Description Options for the Dial component. see page 257) Description Options for the Dial component.
2.13.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbDial ( see page 254) Description Dial (knob, Value adjuster)
2.13.1.1 TAbDial Class

Dial (knob, Value adjuster)
254
Abakus VCL
Classes
Hierarchy
Pascal TAbDial = class(TAbAnalogCControl); C++ class TAbDial : public TAbAnalogCControl; File AbDial ( Description Component to adjust analog values. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) Description Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. see page 467)
see page 79)
see page 79)
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Set of enabled keys to change the value Enables/disables the keyboard input Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. 255
ColorNonFocus (
EnableKeyboard ( OnDblClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver ( OnEndDrag ( OnEnter (
see page 130)
2.13 AbDial Namespace OnExit ( see page 131) see page 131)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus. Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed. Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed Determines where a control looks for its font information. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Contains settings for the analog signal Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Contains the analog Value Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication Visibility of the component.
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( published Name AbInfo (
ValueIndicator (
Description see page 79) see page 79) Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled (
see page 79)
see page 79)
Description see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit (
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Set of enabled keys to change the value Enables/disables the keyboard input Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. 256
ColorNonFocus (
EnableKeyboard ( OnDblClick ( OnDragDrop (
2.13 AbDial Namespace OnDragOver ( OnEndDrag ( OnEnter ( OnExit ( see page 130) see page 130)
Abakus VCL
Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus. Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed. Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed Determines where a control looks for its font information. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Contains settings for the analog signal Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Contains the analog Value Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication Visibility of the component.
ValueIndicator (

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TDialOption ( see page 257) Description Options for the Dial component.
2.13.2.1 AbDial.TDialOption Enumeration

Pascal TDialOption = ( opBevelOuter, opUnit, opValue, opName1, opName2, opScale, opScaleText ); C++ enum TDialOption { 257
2.14 AbFlashT Namespace opBevelOuter, opUnit, opValue, opName1, opName2, opScale, opScaleText }; File AbDial ( Members Members opBevelOuter opUnit opValue opName1 opName2 opScale opScaleText Description Options for the Dial component. see page 467)
Abakus VCL
Description Draw outer bevel Draw Signal unit Draw Signal Value Draw SignalName1 Draw SignalName2 Draw Scale Draw Scale Text
2.13.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TDialOptions ( see page 258) Description Options for the Dial component.
2.13.3.1 AbDial.TDialOptions Type

Pascal TDialOptions = set of TDialOption; C++ TDialOption TDialOptions; File AbDial ( Description Options for the Dial component. see page 467)
2.14 AbFlashT Namespace

Unit for our common flash timer component. 258
2.14 AbFlashT Namespace Classes Name TAbFlashTimer ( see page 260)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description TAmFlashTimer is a threaded Timer to supply all our component's with a common time/pulses. The timer-thread will be created when the first component need the timer function. The timer will be destroyed when application terminates.
Constants Name WM_FLASH ( Freq8Hz ( Freq4Hz ( Freq2Hz ( Freq1Hz ( Freq05Hz ( see page 270) see page 270) see page 271) see page 271) see page 271) see page 271) see page 272) Description Windows Message ID for the timer event bit no. in Var "tim ( bit no. in Var "tim ( bit no. in Var "tim ( bit no. in Var "tim ( bit no. in Var "tim ( 0.5Hz bit no. in Var "tim ( second pulses see page 269)" for fixed frequency 8Hz see page 269)" for fixed frequency 4Hz see page 269)" for fixed frequency 2Hz see page 269)" for fixed frequency 1Hz see page 269)" for fixed frequency see page 269)" for synchronized one
SyncOneSec ( Functions
Name AddProc ( DelProc ( DelProcNo ( AddControl ( DelControl ( DelControlNo ( ClearFlashList ( Structs, Records, Enums Name TFlash ( see page 265) see page 266) TFlashFreq ( Types Name TAbFlashProc ( PFlashRecord ( Variables Name dynFlashList ( AFlashRecord ( AbFlashTimer ( NextSecPuls ( running ( tim ( see page 268) see page 268) see page 268) see page 269) see page 267) see page 267) see page 263) see page 263) see page 263) see page 264) see page 264) see page 264) see page 265)
Description Method to add a procedure-call to the List of timer events Method to delete a procedure-call to the List of timer events Method to delete a procedure-call to the List of timer events Method to add a control to the List of timer events Method to delete a control to the List of timer events Method to delete a control to the List of timer events Method to delete all timer events
Description A flash record Type for synchron frequencies
Description Method type to add methods to the flashlist Pointer to a flash record
Description TList for all timer events Pointer to a new record structure The Flashtimer Variable for synchronized one second pulses number of running instances of our flash timer, only one needed! Variable, increased each timer event Variable for synchronized one second impulse
see page 269)
OneSec (
259
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.14.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbFlashTimer ( see page 260) Description TAmFlashTimer is a threaded Timer to supply all our component's with a common time/pulses. The timer-thread will be created when the first component need the timer function. The timer will be destroyed when application terminates.
2.14.1.1 TAbFlashTimer Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbFlashTimer = class(TAbFlash); C++ class TAbFlashTimer : public TAbFlash; File AbFlashT ( Description TAmFlashTimer is a threaded Timer to supply all our component's with a common time/pulses. The timer-thread will be created when the first component need the timer function. The timer will be destroyed when application terminates. see page 467)
Timer Basic-cycle: 16ms
Max deviation: ~ 8ms in sum since Start (the timer counts the interval-error and may correct the next pulse time)
Allowed Interval times: >32ms or one of the Interval-Constants for synchronous time-events. Interval constants: Freq8Hz ( see page 270), Freq4Hz ( see page 271), Freq2Hz ( 271), Freq05Hz ( see page 271) and SyncOneSec ( see page 272) see page 271), Freq1Hz ( see page
260
Abakus VCL
Classes
Use of our timer for your own controls / applications: In general there are two way's to implement our timer in your code:
For Controls: Add a method to handle "WM_FLASH ( Call method "AddControl ( Call method "DelControl ( see page 270)" events
see page 264)(Control: TControl; Interval: Cardinal);" to start see page 264)(Control: TControl);" to stop timer events for this control.
If the timer event occurs for this control the timer will send a "WM_FLASH ( see page 270)" message to the control. This message is send directly to the component (not via windows message queue). To change the interval time you only have to call "AddControl ( see page 264)()" again with the new interval. A Control can only use one Frequency at once.
For Methods: Add a method of type TAbFlashProc ( Longint);) to you project Call "AddProc ( Call 'DelProc ( see page 267) (TAbFlashProc ( see page 267) = Procedure(WPar, LPar :
see page 263)(Proc: TAbFlashProc ( see page 263)(Proc: TAbFlashProc (
see page 267); Interval: Cardinal);" to start see page 267));" to stop timer events.
If the timer event occurs for this method the timer will call directly your method. You can add several methods and call them individually.
Common for both: Interval: interval time in ms or synchronous pulses if a Freq-constants is used Wpar : no of times the "Timer-Basic-cycle" is called since Timer-Start. Lpar : if one of the Frequency constants is used for "Interval" then Lpar toggles between 0 and not 0 each time the event occurs otherwise it's "0"
261
Abakus VCL
Functions
Interval Times e.g: if you start with an interval of 1000ms then the first timer event occurs 1000 ms after start if you start with an interval of "Freq1Hz ( see page 271)" then the timer events occur if the Frequency bit
has changed. If you add several components/methods with the same interval-constant then they will be called synchronous. Members published Name Enabled ( see page 7) see page 7) ThreadPriority ( TAbFlashTimer Class Name AbInfo ( published Name Enabled ( see page 7) see page 7) ThreadPriority ( TAbFlashTimer Class Name AbInfo ( see page 262) Description Information about Package / copyright / ... Description Enables the timer The Thread priority see page 262) Description Information about Package / copyright / ... Description Enables the timer The Thread priority
2.14.1.1.1.1 TAbFlashTimer.AbInfo Property
Pascal property AbInfo: TAbInfo; C++ __property TAbInfo AbInfo; Description Information about Package / copyright / ...
2.14.2 Functions
The following table lists functions in this documentation. Functions Name AddProc ( DelProc ( DelProcNo ( AddControl ( DelControl ( see page 263) see page 263) see page 263) see page 264) see page 264) Description Method to add a procedure-call to the List of timer events Method to delete a procedure-call to the List of timer events Method to delete a procedure-call to the List of timer events Method to add a control to the List of timer events Method to delete a control to the List of timer events 262
2.14 AbFlashT Namespace DelControlNo ( ClearFlashList ( see page 264) see page 265)
Abakus VCL Method to delete a control to the List of timer events Method to delete all timer events
Functions
2.14.2.1 AbFlashT.AddProc Function

Method to add a procedure-call to the List of timer events Pascal procedure AddProc(Proc: TAbFlashProc; Interval: Int64 LongInt); C++ AddProc(TAbFlashProc Proc, Int64 LongInt Interval); File AbFlashT ( Parameters Parameters Proc: TAbFlashProc Interval: Int64 LongInt Description Adds a method to the list of timer events Description the event method The interval time in ms see page 467)
2.14.2.2 AbFlashT.DelProc Function

Method to delete a procedure-call to the List of timer events Pascal procedure DelProc(Proc: TAbFlashProc); C++ DelProc(TAbFlashProc Proc); File AbFlashT ( Parameters Parameters Proc: TAbFlashProc Description Deletes a method to the list of timer events by method name Description the event method see page 467)
2.14.2.3 AbFlashT.DelProcNo Function

Method to delete a procedure-call to the List of timer events Pascal procedure DelProcNo(no: Smallint); C++ DelProcNo(Smallint no);
263
2.14 AbFlashT Namespace File AbFlashT ( Parameters Parameters no: Smallint Description Deletes a method to the list of timer events by number see page 467)
Abakus VCL
Functions
Description the number of the event method
2.14.2.4 AbFlashT.AddControl Function

Method to add a control to the List of timer events Pascal procedure AddControl(Control: TControl; Interval: Int64 LongInt); C++ AddControl(TControl * Control, Int64 LongInt Interval); File AbFlashT ( Parameters Parameters Control: TControl Interval: Int64 LongInt Description Adds a control to the list of timer events Description the control The interval time in ms see page 467)
2.14.2.5 AbFlashT.DelControl Function

Method to delete a control to the List of timer events Pascal procedure DelControl(Control: TControl); C++ DelControl(TControl * Control); File AbFlashT ( Parameters Parameters Control: TControl Description Deletes a control to the list of timer events by control name Description the control see page 467)
2.14.2.6 AbFlashT.DelControlNo Function

Method to delete a control to the List of timer events 264
2.14 AbFlashT Namespace Pascal procedure DelControlNo(no: Smallint); C++ DelControlNo(Smallint no); File AbFlashT ( Parameters Parameters no: Smallint Description Deletes a control to the list of timer events by number see page 467)
Abakus VCL
Description number of the control
2.14.2.7 AbFlashT.ClearFlashList Function

Method to delete all timer events Pascal procedure ClearFlashList; C++ ClearFlashList(); File AbFlashT ( Description Method to clear the complete flash list Deletes all controls and all methods from the list of timer events see page 467)

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TFlashFreq ( Records Name TFlash ( see page 265) Description A flash record see page 266) Description Type for synchron frequencies
2.14.3.1 AbFlashT.TFlash Record

Pascal TFlash = record Control: TControl; FlashProc: TAbFlashProc; IntervalTime: Int64 LongInt; 265
2.14 AbFlashT Namespace NextPulseTime: Int64 LongInt; FlashBit: Boolean; end; C++ struct TFlash { TControl * Control; TAbFlashProc FlashProc; Int64 LongInt IntervalTime; Int64 LongInt NextPulseTime; Boolean FlashBit; }; File AbFlashT ( Members Members Control: TControl; FlashProc: TAbFlashProc; IntervalTime: Int64 LongInt; NextPulseTime: Int64 LongInt; FlashBit: Boolean; Description A flash record see page 467)
Abakus VCL
Description to add a control to the flashlist to add a procedure to the FlashList interval time in ms Next puls in Tickcount bit which toggels each timer event
2.14.3.2 AbFlashT.TFlashFreq Enumeration

Pascal TFlashFreq = ( ff8Hz, ff4Hz, ff2Hz, ff1Hz, ff05Hz ); C++ enum TFlashFreq { ff8Hz, ff4Hz, ff2Hz, ff1Hz, ff05Hz }; File AbFlashT ( Members Members ff8Hz ff4Hz ff2Hz ff1Hz ff05Hz Description Frequency 8Hz Frequency 4Hz Frequency 2Hz Frequency 1Hz Frequency 0.5Hz see page 467)
266
2.14 AbFlashT Namespace Description Type for synchron frequencies
Abakus VCL
Variables
2.14.4 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TAbFlashProc ( PFlashRecord ( see page 267) see page 267) Description Method type to add methods to the flashlist Pointer to a flash record
2.14.4.1 AbFlashT.TAbFlashProc Type

Pascal TAbFlashProc = procedure (WPar, LPar : Longint); C++ (WPar, LPar : Longint) ( TAbFlashProc)(); File AbFlashT ( Description Method type to add methods to the flashlist see page 467)
2.14.4.2 AbFlashT.PFlashRecord Type

Pascal PFlashRecord = ^TFlash; C++ ^TFlash PFlashRecord; File AbFlashT ( Description Pointer to a flash record see page 467)
2.14.5 Variables
The following table lists variables in this documentation. Variables Name dynFlashList ( AFlashRecord ( see page 268) see page 268) Description TList for all timer events Pointer to a new record structure
267
2.14 AbFlashT Namespace AbFlashTimer ( NextSecPuls ( running ( tim ( see page 268) see page 269)
Abakus VCL The Flashtimer Variable for synchronized one second pulses
Variables
see page 269)
number of running instances of our flash timer, only one needed! Variable, increased each timer event Variable for synchronized one second impulse
OneSec (
2.14.5.1 AbFlashT.dynFlashList Variable

Pascal dynFlashList: TList; C++ TList dynFlashList; File AbFlashT ( Description TList for all timer events see page 467)
2.14.5.2 AbFlashT.AFlashRecord Variable

Pascal AFlashRecord: PFlashRecord; C++ PFlashRecord AFlashRecord; File AbFlashT ( Description Pointer to a new record structure see page 467)
2.14.5.3 AbFlashT.AbFlashTimer Variable

Pascal AbFlashTimer: TAbFlashTimer; C++ TAbFlashTimer AbFlashTimer; File AbFlashT ( Description The Flashtimer see page 467)
268
Abakus VCL
Variables
2.14.5.4 AbFlashT.NextSecPuls Variable

Pascal NextSecPuls: TDateTime; C++ TDateTime NextSecPuls; File AbFlashT ( Description Variable for synchronized one second pulses see page 467)
2.14.5.5 AbFlashT.running Variable

Pascal running: Smallint = 0; C++ Smallint running = 0; File AbFlashT ( Description number of running instances of our flash timer, only one needed! see page 467)
2.14.5.6 AbFlashT.tim Variable

Pascal tim: Cardinal = 0; C++ unsigned tim = 0; File AbFlashT ( Description Variable, increased each timer event see page 467)
2.14.5.7 AbFlashT.OneSec Variable

Pascal OneSec: TDateTime; C++ TDateTime OneSec; File AbFlashT ( see page 467)
269
2.14 AbFlashT Namespace Description Variable for synchronized one second impulse
Abakus VCL
Constants
2.14.6 Constants
The following table lists constants in this documentation. Constants Name WM_FLASH ( Freq8Hz ( Freq4Hz ( Freq2Hz ( Freq1Hz ( Freq05Hz ( see page 270) see page 270) see page 271) see page 271) see page 271) see page 271) see page 272) Description Windows Message ID for the timer event bit no. in Var "tim ( bit no. in Var "tim ( bit no. in Var "tim ( bit no. in Var "tim ( bit no. in Var "tim ( 0.5Hz bit no. in Var "tim ( second pulses see page 269)" for fixed frequency 8Hz see page 269)" for fixed frequency 4Hz see page 269)" for fixed frequency 2Hz see page 269)" for fixed frequency 1Hz see page 269)" for fixed frequency see page 269)" for synchronized one
SyncOneSec (
2.14.6.1 AbFlashT.WM_FLASH Constant

Pascal WM_FLASH = WM_USER + 100; C++ WM_FLASH = WM_USER + 100; File AbFlashT ( Description Windows Message ID for the timer event see page 467)
2.14.6.2 AbFlashT.Freq8Hz Constant

Pascal Freq8Hz = 2; C++ Freq8Hz = 2; File AbFlashT ( Description bit no. in Var "tim ( see page 269)" for fixed frequency 8Hz see page 467)
270
Abakus VCL
Constants




Pascal Freq05Hz = 6; C++ Freq05Hz = 6; File AbFlashT ( see page 467)
271
2.15 AbFlexMeter Namespace Description bit no. in Var "tim (
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 269)" for fixed frequency 0.5Hz
2.14.6.7 AbFlashT.SyncOneSec Constant

Pascal SyncOneSec = 32; C++ SyncOneSec = 32; File AbFlashT ( Description bit no. in Var "tim ( see page 269)" for synchronized one second pulses see page 467)
2.15 AbFlexMeter Namespace

Value indicator with flex-scale (no fixed range) Classes Name TAbCustomFlexMeter ( TAbFlexHMeter ( see page 273) Description Base class for Value indicators with flex-scale (no fixed range) horizontal meter with "moving scale"
see page 273)
TAbFlexVMeter (
see page 274)
vertical meter with "moving scale"
2.15.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbCustomFlexMeter ( see page 273) Description Base class for Value indicators with flex-scale (no fixed range)
272
2.15 AbFlexMeter Namespace TAbFlexHMeter ( see page 273)
Abakus VCL horizontal meter with "moving scale"
Classes
TAbFlexVMeter (
see page 274)
2.15.1.1 TAbCustomFlexMeter Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbCustomFlexMeter = class(TAbCustomIndBevel); C++ class TAbCustomFlexMeter : public TAbCustomIndBevel; File AbFlexMeter ( Description Base class for Value indicators with flex-scale (no fixed range) Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. see page 467)
see page 78)
see page 78)
2.15.1.2 TAbFlexHMeter Class

horizontal meter with "moving scale"
273
2.15 AbFlexMeter Namespace Hierarchy
Abakus VCL
Classes
Pascal TAbFlexHMeter = class(TAbCustomFlexMeter); C++ class TAbFlexHMeter : public TAbCustomFlexMeter; File AbFlexMeter ( Description see page 467)
Horizontal value indicator with flex-scale (no fixed range) Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
see page 78)
2.15.1.3 TAbFlexVMeter Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbFlexVMeter = class(TAbCustomFlexMeter); C++ class TAbFlexVMeter : public TAbCustomFlexMeter;
274
2.16 AbGearDial Namespace File AbFlexMeter ( Description see page 467)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Vertical Value indicator with flex-scale (no fixed range) Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
see page 78)
2.16 AbGearDial Namespace

Dial control with multiple turns. Classes Name TAbGearDial ( see page 276) Description Gear dial (knob) control.
2.16.1 Classes
275
2.16 AbGearDial Namespace Classes Name TAbGearDial ( see page 276)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Gear dial (knob) control.
2.16.1.1 TAbGearDial Class

Gear dial (knob) control.
Hierarchy
Pascal TAbGearDial = class(TAbAnalogCControl); C++ class TAbGearDial : public TAbAnalogCControl; File AbGearDial ( Description Dial control with multiple turns. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. see page 468)
see page 79)
see page 79)
276
2.16 AbGearDial Namespace TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128)
Abakus VCL
Classes
ColorNonFocus (
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( TAbGearDial Class Name BevelGearDial ( PointerSize (
ValueIndicator (
Description see page 279) Determines the style of the round bevel of the dial control. Size of the Dial pointer 277 see page 279)
2.16 AbGearDial Namespace PointerType ( RotAngle ( StartAngle ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 279) see page 280)
Abakus VCL The dial pointer shape. Angle of rotation in 1 Start Angle (zero position) of the dial pointer
Classes
see page 280)
see page 79)
see page 79)
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Set of enabled keys to change the value Enables/disables the keyboard input Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus. Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed. Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed Determines where a control looks for its font information.
ColorNonFocus (
OnValueChange ( OnValueChanged ( ParentFont (
see page 132)
278
2.16 AbGearDial Namespace ShowHint ( see page 133) see page 133)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Contains settings for the analog signal Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Contains the analog Value Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication Visibility of the component.
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( TAbGearDial Class Name BevelGearDial ( PointerSize ( PointerType ( RotAngle ( StartAngle (
ValueIndicator (
2.16.1.1.1.1 TAbGearDial.BevelGearDial Property
Pascal property BevelGearDial: TAbSBevel; C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelGearDial; Description Determines the style of the round bevel of the dial control.
2.16.1.1.1.2 TAbGearDial.PointerSize Property

Pascal property PointerSize: Integer; C++ __property int PointerSize; Description Size of the Dial pointer
2.16.1.1.1.3 TAbGearDial.PointerType Property

Pascal property PointerType: TDialPointer; C++ __property TDialPointer PointerType; Description The dial pointer shape.
279
2.17 AbGradient Namespace
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.16.1.1.1.4 TAbGearDial.RotAngle Property

Pascal property RotAngle: Integer; C++ __property int RotAngle; Description Angle of rotation in 1 Example If you want to have a Gear-Dial with 10 turns you have to set RotAngle to 3600
2.16.1.1.1.5 TAbGearDial.StartAngle Property

Pascal property StartAngle: Integer; C++ __property int StartAngle; Description Start Angle (zero position) of the dial pointer Example StartAngle = 0 StartAngle = 270 start is at "12 a'Clock" start is at "9 a'Clock"
2.17 AbGradient Namespace

Unit with a gradient graphic control Classes Name TAbGradient ( see page 281) Description Component to draw a gradient.
2.17.1 Classes
280
2.17 AbGradient Namespace Classes Name TAbGradient ( see page 281)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Component to draw a gradient.
2.17.1.1 TAbGradient Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbGradient = class(TAbGraphicControl); C++ class TAbGradient : public TAbGraphicControl; File AbGradient ( Description Component to draw a gradient. see page 468)
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( private TAbGradient Class Name GradSettings ( private TAbGradient Class Name GradSettings ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) Description Contact and copyright notes. 281 see page 282) Description Stores settings for Gradients see page 282) Description Stores settings for Gradients Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
2.18 AbHBar Namespace OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( see page 78)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
2.17.1.1.1 private
2.17.1.1.1.1 TAbGradient.GradSettings Property
Pascal property GradSettings: TAbGradSettings; C++ __property TAbGradSettings GradSettings; Description Stores settings for Gradients
2.18 AbHBar Namespace

Horizontal bar indicator component Classes Name TAbHBar ( see page 283) Description Horizontal bar indicator component
Structs, Records, Enums Name THBarOption ( Types Name THBarOptions ( see page 288) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 287) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.18.1 Classes
282
2.18 AbHBar Namespace Classes Name TAbHBar ( see page 283)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Horizontal bar indicator component
2.18.1.1 TAbHBar Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbHBar = class(TAbAnalogGControl); C++ class TAbHBar : public TAbAnalogGControl; File AbHBar ( Description Horizontal bar indicator component see page 468)
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( Description Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 78)
283
2.18 AbHBar Namespace OnDblClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver ( OnEndDrag ( OnLimit ( see page 122) see page 122) see page 122) see page 122)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the see page 125)
see page 124)
see page 125)
see page 287)
Description see page 120) see page 120) Property to select Log10 scale or Linar scale Occurs if component position has changed 284
OnPosChanged (
2.18 AbHBar Namespace TAbHBar Class Name AutoSize ( see page 286) see page 286) see page 286) see page 286) see page 286) see page 287)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Settings for Bar-indications Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication
BarSettings ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options ( published Name AbInfo (
see page 287)
see page 78)
Event occurs if settings has changed Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. Event occurs if signal Value ( see page 125) has changed Settings for the component scale sectors
see page 124)
OnValueChange ( SectorSettings (
285
2.18 AbHBar Namespace ShowHint ( see page 125) see page 125)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Settings for the analog Signal The Signal Value
see page 125)
2.18.1.1.1 private
2.18.1.1.1.1 TAbHBar.AutoSize Property
Pascal property AutoSize: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean AutoSize; Description If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..)
2.18.1.1.1.2 TAbHBar.BarSettings Property

Pascal property BarSettings: TBarSettings; C++ __property TBarSettings BarSettings; Description Settings for Bar-indications
2.18.1.1.1.3 TAbHBar.BevelInner Property

2.18.1.1.1.4 TAbHBar.BevelOuter Property

2.18.1.1.1.5 TAbHBar.BevelValue Property

Pascal property BevelValue: TAbSBevel;
286
2.18 AbHBar Namespace C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelValue; Description Determines the style of the value indication bevel.
Abakus VCL
2.18.1.1.1.6 TAbHBar.FontValue Property

Pascal property FontValue: TFont; C++ __property TFont FontValue; Description Font, used for the signal value indication
2.18.1.1.1.7 TAbHBar.Options Property

Pascal property Options: THBarOptions; C++ __property THBarOptions Options;

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name THBarOption ( see page 287) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.18.2.1 AbHBar.THBarOption Enumeration

Pascal THBarOption = ( opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opValue, opName1, opName2, opOverflow, opUnit ); C++ enum THBarOption { opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opValue, opName1, opName2, opOverflow, opUnit };
287
2.19 AbHMeter Namespace File AbHBar ( Members Members opBevelInner opBevelOuter opValue opName1 opName2 opOverflow opUnit Description see page 468)
Abakus VCL
Description InnerBevel OuterBevel Value indication SignalName1 SignalName2 Overflow indication signal unit indication
Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.18.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name THBarOptions ( see page 288) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.18.3.1 AbHBar.THBarOptions Type

Pascal THBarOptions = set of THBarOption; C++ THBarOption THBarOptions; File AbHBar ( Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 468)
2.19 AbHMeter Namespace

Horizontal Meter indicator component
288
2.19 AbHMeter Namespace Classes Name TAbHMeter ( see page 289)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Horizontal Value indicator component
Structs, Records, Enums Name THMeterOption ( Types Name THMeterOptions ( see page 295) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 294) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.19.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbHMeter ( see page 289) Description Horizontal Value indicator component
2.19.1.1 TAbHMeter Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbHMeter = class(TAbAnalogGControl); C++ class TAbHMeter : public TAbAnalogGControl; File AbHMeter ( Description Horizontal Value indicator component see page 468)
289
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 124)
SignalSettings ( Value ( private
see page 125)
290
2.19 AbHMeter Namespace TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( TAbHMeter Class Name AutoSize ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( FontUnit ( Options ( see page 293) see page 293) see page 293)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Font, used for the signal unit indication Class with settings for a scale
ScaleSettings (
private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( TAbHMeter Class Name AutoSize ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( FontUnit ( Options ( see page 293) see page 293) see page 293) Description If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Font, used for the signal unit indication Description Property to select Log10 scale or Linar scale Occurs if component position has changed
291
2.19 AbHMeter Namespace ScaleSettings ( see page 294)
Classes
see page 78)
Event occurs if settings has changed Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. 292
see page 124)
2.19 AbHMeter Namespace OnValueChange ( SectorSettings ( ShowHint ( see page 124) see page 124)
Abakus VCL Event occurs if signal Value (
Classes see page 125) has changed
Settings for the component scale sectors Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Settings for the analog Signal The Signal Value
see page 125)
2.19.1.1.1 private
2.19.1.1.1.1 TAbHMeter.AutoSize Property
2.19.1.1.1.2 TAbHMeter.BevelInner Property

2.19.1.1.1.3 TAbHMeter.BevelOuter Property

2.19.1.1.1.4 TAbHMeter.FontUnit Property

Pascal property FontUnit: TFont; C++ __property TFont FontUnit; Description Font, used for the signal unit indication
293
Abakus VCL
2.19.1.1.1.5 TAbHMeter.Options Property

Pascal property Options: THMeterOptions; C++ __property THMeterOptions Options;
2.19.1.1.1.6 TAbHMeter.ScaleSettings Property

Pascal property ScaleSettings: TScaleSettings; C++ __property TScaleSettings ScaleSettings; Description Class with settings for a scale

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name THMeterOption ( see page 294) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.19.2.1 AbHMeter.THMeterOption Enumeration

Pascal THMeterOption = ( opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opUnit, opName1, opName2, opOverflow, opLimit, opSector );
294
2.20 AbHSlide Namespace C++ enum THMeterOption { opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opUnit, opName1, opName2, opOverflow, opLimit, opSector }; File AbHMeter ( Members Members opBevelInner opBevelOuter opUnit opName1 opName2 opOverflow opLimit opSector Description see page 468)
Abakus VCL
Description InnerBevel OuterBevel signal unit indication SignalName1 SignalName2 Overflow indication Limit indication Sectors
2.19.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name THMeterOptions ( see page 295) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.19.3.1 AbHMeter.THMeterOptions Type

Pascal THMeterOptions = set of THMeterOption; C++ THMeterOption THMeterOptions; File AbHMeter ( Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 468)
295
2.20 AbHSlide Namespace
Abakus VCL
Classes

Horizontal Slider (Value adjuster) Classes Name TAbHSlider ( see page 296) Description Horizontal Slider (Value adjuster)
Structs, Records, Enums Name THSliderOption ( Types Name THSliderOptions ( see page 302) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 301) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.20.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbHSlider ( see page 296) Description Horizontal Slider (Value adjuster)
2.20.1.1 TAbHSlider Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbHSlider = class(TAbAnalogCControl); C++ class TAbHSlider : public TAbAnalogCControl; File AbHSlide ( see page 469)
296
2.20 AbHSlide Namespace Description Horizontal Slider (Value adjuster)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) Description Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
see page 79)
see page 79)
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Set of enabled keys to change the value Enables/disables the keyboard input Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus. Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed. Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component.
ColorNonFocus (
OnMouseDown ( OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp (
see page 132)
297
2.20 AbHSlide Namespace OnStartDrag ( see page 132)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed Determines where a control looks for its font information. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Contains settings for the analog signal Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Contains the analog Value Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication Visibility of the component.
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( private TAbHSlider Class Name BevelOuter ( ButtonSize ( ColorTrench ( Options ( ScaleSettings (
ValueIndicator (
Description see page 300) see page 300) see page 300) see page 301) Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Size of the slider-button. Color of the trench. Class with settings for a scale
see page 301)
private TAbHSlider Class Name BevelOuter ( ButtonSize ( ColorTrench ( Options ( see page 300) see page 300) see page 300) Description Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Size of the slider-button. Color of the trench.
see page 301)
298
2.20 AbHSlide Namespace ScaleSettings ( see page 301)
Classes
see page 79)
see page 79)
ColorNonFocus (
OnMouseDown (
299
2.20 AbHSlide Namespace OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnStartDrag ( see page 131)
Abakus VCL
Classes
ValueIndicator (
2.20.1.1.1 private
2.20.1.1.1.1 TAbHSlider.BevelOuter Property
2.20.1.1.1.2 TAbHSlider.ButtonSize Property

Pascal property ButtonSize: Integer; C++ __property int ButtonSize; Description Size of the slider-button.
2.20.1.1.1.3 TAbHSlider.ColorTrench Property

Pascal property ColorTrench: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorTrench; Description Color of the trench.
300
Abakus VCL
2.20.1.1.1.4 TAbHSlider.Options Property

Pascal property Options: THSliderOptions; C++ __property THSliderOptions Options;
2.20.1.1.1.5 TAbHSlider.ScaleSettings Property


The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name THSliderOption ( see page 301) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.20.2.1 AbHSlide.THSliderOption Enumeration

Pascal THSliderOption = ( opBevelOuter, opName1, opName2, opScaleText ); C++ enum THSliderOption { opBevelOuter, opName1, 301
2.21 AbInfDlg Namespace opName2, opScaleText }; File AbHSlide ( Members Members opBevelOuter opName1 opName2 opScaleText Description see page 469)
Abakus VCL
Description OuterBevel SignalName1 SignalName2 Scale text
2.20.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name THSliderOptions ( see page 302) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.20.3.1 AbHSlide.THSliderOptions Type

Pascal THSliderOptions = set of THSliderOption; C++ THSliderOption THSliderOptions; File AbHSlide ( Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 469)
2.21 AbInfDlg Namespace

Form / Property editor to show information's about registration, Abakus VCL version and how to contact us. Classes Name TAbInfoForm ( see page 303) Description Form for the AbInfo ( see page 12), shows informations about registration, Abakus VCL version and how to contact us.
302
2.22 AbIRDlg Namespace TAbInfoEditor ( see page 303)
Abakus VCL Property editor for the AbInfo ( see page 12) form
2.21.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbInfoForm ( see page 303) Description Form for the AbInfo ( see page 12), shows informations about registration, Abakus VCL version and how to contact us. Property editor for the AbInfo ( see page 12) form
TAbInfoEditor (
see page 303)
2.21.1.1 TAbInfoForm Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbInfoForm = class(TForm); C++ class TAbInfoForm : public TForm; File AbInfDlg ( Description Form for the AbInfo ( see page 12), shows informations about registration, Abakus VCL version and how to contact us. see page 469)
2.21.1.2 TAbInfoEditor Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbInfoEditor = class(TPropertyEditor); C++ class TAbInfoEditor : public TPropertyEditor; File AbInfDlg ( Description Property editor for the AbInfo ( see page 12) form see page 469)
303
2.23 AbLabel Namespace
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.22 AbIRDlg Namespace

Form-/ Property editor for to adjust the indication rectangle e.g. for the operating point display. Classes Name TAbIndRectDlg ( see page 304) Description Form for to adjust the indication rectangle e.g. for the operating point display.
2.22.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbIndRectDlg ( see page 304) Description Form for to adjust the indication rectangle e.g. for the operating point display.
2.22.1.1 TAbIndRectDlg Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbIndRectDlg = class(TForm); C++ class TAbIndRectDlg : public TForm; File AbIRDlg ( Description Form for to adjust the indication rectangle e.g. for the operating point display. see page 469)

Flicker free label which can show different text (DigitText) according an integer input Value (Digit). Classes Name TAbLabel ( see page 305) Description Flicker free label component
304
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.23.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbLabel ( see page 305) Description Flicker free label component
2.23.1.1 TAbLabel Class

Flicker free label component
Hierarchy
Pascal TAbLabel = class(TAbGraphicControl); C++ class TAbLabel : public TAbGraphicControl; File AbLabel ( Description Flicker free label which can show different text (DigitText ( page 307)). Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbLabel Class Name Align ( see page 307) see page 307) Description Determines how the control aligns within its container (parent control). Default text is shown if the Digit ( see page 307) input has a value where no text is available for (in DigitText ( see page 307)). According the Value of Digit a text (DigitText ( 307)) is shown. Contains the semicolon separated text Font for the label text. Height of the label. Occurs when the user clicks the control. 305 see page Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. see page 307)) according an integer input Value (Digit ( see see page 470)
see page 78)
DefaultText (
Digit (
DigitText ( Font ( Height ( OnClick (
2.23 AbLabel Namespace OnDblClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver ( OnEndDrag ( see page 308) see page 308) see page 309) see page 309) see page 309)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. Space (border) arround the text Horizontal text position. Vertical text position. Visibility of the control. Width of the label.
OnMouseDown ( OnMouseUp ( OnStartDrag (
Spacing ( TextPosH ( TextPosV ( Visible ( Width ( published Name AbInfo (
OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbLabel Class Name Align (
see page 78)
Description see page 307) see page 307) Determines how the control aligns within its container (parent control). Default text is shown if the Digit ( see page 307) input has a value where no text is available for (in DigitText ( see page 307)). According the Value of Digit a text (DigitText ( 307)) is shown. Contains the semicolon separated text Font for the label text. Height of the label. Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. Space (border) arround the text Horizontal text position. 306 see page
DefaultText (
Digit (
DigitText ( Font ( Height ( OnClick (
OnDblClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver ( OnEndDrag (
OnMouseDown ( OnMouseUp ( OnStartDrag (
Spacing ( TextPosH (
2.23 AbLabel Namespace TextPosV ( Visible ( Width ( see page 310)
Abakus VCL Vertical text position. Visibility of the control. Width of the label.
Classes
2.23.1.1.1.1 TAbLabel.Align Property
Pascal property Align; C++ __property Align; Description Determines how the control aligns within its container (parent control).
2.23.1.1.1.2 TAbLabel.DefaultText Property

Pascal property DefaultText: string; C++ __property AnsiString DefaultText; Description Default text is shown if the Digit ( 307)). see page 307) input has a value where no text is available for (in DigitText ( see page
2.23.1.1.1.3 TAbLabel.Digit Property

Pascal property Digit: Integer; C++ __property int Digit; Description According the Value of Digit a text (DigitText ( see page 307)) is shown.
2.23.1.1.1.4 TAbLabel.DigitText Property

Pascal property DigitText: string; C++ __property AnsiString DigitText; Description Contains the semicolon separated text Example DigitText = 'Zero;One;Two'
307
Abakus VCL
Classes
Digit ( 0 1 2
see page 307)
Displayed Text Zero One Two DefaultText ( see page 307)
any other
2.23.1.1.1.5 TAbLabel.Font Property

Pascal property Font; C++ __property Font; Description Font for the label text.
2.23.1.1.1.6 TAbLabel.Height Property

Pascal property Height; C++ __property Height; Description Height of the label.
2.23.1.1.1.7 TAbLabel.OnClick Property

Pascal property OnClick; C++ __property OnClick; Description Occurs when the user clicks the control.
2.23.1.1.1.8 TAbLabel.OnDblClick Property

2.23.1.1.1.9 TAbLabel.OnDragDrop Property

Pascal property OnDragDrop;
308
2.23 AbLabel Namespace C++ __property OnDragDrop; Description Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.23.1.1.1.10 TAbLabel.OnDragOver Property

2.23.1.1.1.11 TAbLabel.OnEndDrag Property

2.23.1.1.1.12 TAbLabel.OnMouseDown Property

Pascal property OnMouseDown; C++ __property OnMouseDown; Description Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component.
2.23.1.1.1.13 TAbLabel.OnMouseUp Property

Pascal property OnMouseUp; C++ __property OnMouseUp; Description Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control.
2.23.1.1.1.14 TAbLabel.OnStartDrag Property

Pascal property OnStartDrag; C++ __property OnStartDrag;
309
2.23 AbLabel Namespace Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down.
2.23.1.1.1.15 TAbLabel.Spacing Property

Pascal property Spacing: Integer; C++ __property int Spacing; Description Space (border) arround the text
2.23.1.1.1.16 TAbLabel.TextPosH Property

Horizontal text position. Pascal property TextPosH: TPosH; C++ __property TPosH TextPosH; Description TextPosH determines the horizontal text position within components client area
2.23.1.1.1.17 TAbLabel.TextPosV Property

Vertical text position. Pascal property TextPosV: TPosV; C++ __property TPosV TextPosV; Description TextPosH ( see page 310) determines the vertical text position within components client area
2.23.1.1.1.18 TAbLabel.Visible Property

Pascal property Visible; C++ __property Visible; Description Visibility of the control.
2.23.1.1.1.19 TAbLabel.Width Property

Pascal property Width;
310
2.24 AbLED Namespace C++ __property Width; Description Width of the label.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.24 AbLED Namespace

LED indicator/button. Classes Name TAbLED ( see page 311) Description LED indicator/button.
2.24.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbLED ( see page 311) Description LED indicator/button.
2.24.1.1 TAbLED Class

LED indicator/button.
Hierarchy
Pascal TAbLED = class(TAbBinGControl); C++ class TAbLED : public TAbBinGControl;
311
2.25 AbMTrend Namespace File AbLED ( Description see page 470)
Abakus VCL
This component can be used as normal LED indicator, Button, RadioButton or as Switch. You can group them to indicate / adjust a LongInt Value. A flashing indication with a synchronized frequency can be selected (all LED's will flash synchon). The available frequencies are 0.5Hz, 1Hz, 2Hz, 4Hz and 8Hz. TAbLED has no own timer, he use the common Abakus TAbFlashTimer ( see page 260).
The shape of the LED can be Round (default), Rectangle or Arrow (left, right, up, down). Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen. Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)
see page 135)
2.25 AbMTrend Namespace

2 Channel Trend display. Classes Name TAbMiniTrend ( see page 313) Description 2 Channel Trend display.
312
2.25 AbMTrend Namespace Structs, Records, Enums Name TMiniTrendOption ( Types Name TMiniTrendOptions ( see page 315) see page 314)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Set of MiniTrend Options
Description Set of MiniTrend Options
2.25.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbMiniTrend ( see page 313) Description 2 Channel Trend display.
2.25.1.1 TAbMiniTrend Class

2 Channel Trend display.
Hierarchy
313
2.25 AbMTrend Namespace Pascal TAbMiniTrend = class(TAbGraphicControl); C++
Abakus VCL
class TAbMiniTrend : public TAbGraphicControl; File AbMTrend ( Description This component shows the progression of analog signals with respect to time y(t). Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. see page 470)
see page 78)
see page 78)

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TMiniTrendOption ( see page 314) Description Set of MiniTrend Options
2.25.2.1 AbMTrend.TMiniTrendOption Enumeration

Pascal TMiniTrendOption = ( opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opCaption, opScaleCh1, opScaleCh2, opSignDescCh1, opSignDescCh2, opGrid, opTimeLine ); C++ enum TMiniTrendOption { opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opCaption, 314
2.26 AbNumEdit Namespace opScaleCh1, opScaleCh2, opSignDescCh1, opSignDescCh2, opGrid, opTimeLine }; File AbMTrend ( Members Members opBevelInner opBevelOuter opCaption opScaleCh1 opScaleCh2 opSignDescCh1 opSignDescCh2 opGrid opTimeLine Description Set of MiniTrend Options see page 470)
Abakus VCL
Description Paint inner Bevel Paint outer Bevel Paint Caption Paint Scale channel 1 Paint Scale channel 1 Paint Signal description (legend) channel 1 Paint Signal description (legend) channel 1 Paint Grid lines Paint Time lines
2.25.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TMiniTrendOptions ( see page 315) Description Set of MiniTrend Options
2.25.3.1 AbMTrend.TMiniTrendOptions Type

Pascal TMiniTrendOptions = set of TMiniTrendOption; C++ TMiniTrendOption TMiniTrendOptions; File AbMTrend ( Description Set of MiniTrend Options see page 470)
315
2.26 AbNumEdit Namespace
Abakus VCL
Classes

Unit with Edit field to enter numeric values. Edit field with spin buttons to enter / adjust values. Classes Name TAbNumEdit ( see page 317) Description Number edit control with input validation while typing and selectable base.
TAbNumSpin (
see page 324)
Edit-field with Spin-Buttons to enter/spin Float, Integer, Hexadecimal or Binary Values. all functions of TAbNumEdit ( Minimum + Maximum limitation selectable Increment ( see page 324) (floating point) see page 317)
Increment ( see page 324) usable for multiplication-spin selectable Spin Interval ( see page 327) (>=50ms) see page 327)
selectable Spin StartDelay ( Multiplication-spin
If eoMultiply is selected in Options Increment ( see page 324) is used for multiplication (spin up) and division (spin down).
Structs, Records, Enums Name TEditBase ( see page 327) see page 328) see page 328) see page 329) TNumEditOption ( TBaseProperties ( TNumEditState ( Types Name TNumEditOptions ( see page 330) Description Set of options for the component Description Base for the number edit component. Set of options for the component Contains base properties. State of the number edit component.
316
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.26.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbNumEdit ( see page 317) Description Number edit control with input validation while typing and selectable base.
TAbNumSpin (
see page 324)
Edit-field with Spin-Buttons to enter/spin Float, Integer, Hexadecimal or Binary Values. all functions of TAbNumEdit ( Minimum + Maximum limitation selectable Increment ( see page 324) (floating point) see page 317)
Increment ( see page 324) usable for multiplication-spin selectable Spin Interval ( see page 327) (>=50ms) see page 327)
If eoMultiply is selected in Options Increment ( see page 324) is used for multiplication (spin up) and division (spin down).
2.26.1.1 TAbNumEdit Class

Number edit control with input validation while typing and selectable base.
Hierarchy
317
2.26 AbNumEdit Namespace Pascal TAbNumEdit = class(TCustomEdit); C++ class TAbNumEdit : public TCustomEdit; File AbNumEdit ( Description Functions: selectable "EditBase ( see page 471)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 323)" to enter Integer-, Float-, Hex- or boolean values
user- and Base related Min-/Max limiting prefixes to change the editbase for the value you enter Exponent enabled (e and E) for float inputs multiplicator char (last sign) press "ESC" as Undo (while editing) up/down arrow key support (see Increment ( Prefixes to change the EditBase ( Prefixes $ & % ! see page 324))
see page 323):
Description Hex string Binary string Integer value Floating point value
Supported multiplier Chars
Chars E P T G M k m u n p f a Example EditBase (
meaning Exa Peta Tera Giga Mega Kilo milli Micro nano pico femto atto
factor 1e18 1e15 1e12 1e9 1e6 1e3 1e-3 1e-6 1e-9 1e-12 1e-15 1e-18
see page 323) is ebFloat
Exponent: to enter the Value 1000 you can enter "1e3" or "e3" 318
Abakus VCL
Classes
Multiplier char: to enter 1000 you can enter "1k" or "k" Bool-Input to Float-, Integer- or hex Edit : use prefix "&", e.g.: "&101" Hex-Input to Float-, Integer-, or Boolean Edit: use prefix "&", e.g.: "&FF" Members private Name AbInfo ( Anchors ( see page 320) see page 320) see page 320) see page 321) see page 321) see page 321) see page 321) see page 322) Description Contact and copyright notes. Specifies how the control is anchored to its parent. Determines whether all the text in the edit control is automatically selected when the control gets focus. Determines whether the height of the edit control automatically resizes to accommodate the text. Default background color of the edit field. Background color of the edit field while "valid" editing. Background color if you enter an invalid char or value. Specifies the size constraints for the control. Determines whether a control has a three-dimensional (3-D) or two-dimensional look. Number of digits for the boolean Value. Valid inputs : 0..31 If "0" then no leading "0" are shown. Number of digits for the hexadecimal Value. Valid inputs : 0..8 If "0" then no leading "0" are shown. Indicates the image used to represent the mouse pointer when the control is being dragged. Determines how the control initiates drag-and-drop or drag-and-dock operations. Base for the number edit component. Enables Edit mode. Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Controls the attributes of text written on or in the control. Formats a floating point value. Specifies the amount the Position value changes each time the up or down button is pressed. Specifies the maximum number of characters the user can enter into the edit control. A value of 0 indicates that there is no application-defined limit on the length. User defined upper value limit.
AutoSelect ( AutoSize (
ColorDefault ( ColorEditing ( ColorError ( Constraints ( Ctl3D (
DigitsBool ( DigitsHex ( DragCursor ( DragMode ( EditBase ( Enabled ( Font (
EditorEnabled (
FormatStr ( Increment ( MaxLength (
MaxValue ( private Name AbInfo ( Anchors (
see page 324)
Description see page 320) see page 320) see page 320) see page 321) see page 321) see page 321) Contact and copyright notes. Specifies how the control is anchored to its parent. Determines whether all the text in the edit control is automatically selected when the control gets focus. Determines whether the height of the edit control automatically resizes to accommodate the text. Default background color of the edit field. Background color of the edit field while "valid" editing. 319
ColorDefault ( ColorEditing (
2.26 AbNumEdit Namespace ColorError ( Constraints ( Ctl3D ( see page 321) see page 322)
Abakus VCL Background color if you enter an invalid char or value. Specifies the size constraints for the control.
Classes
Determines whether a control has a three-dimensional (3-D) or two-dimensional look. Number of digits for the boolean Value. Valid inputs : 0..31 If "0" then no leading "0" are shown. Number of digits for the hexadecimal Value. Valid inputs : 0..8 If "0" then no leading "0" are shown. Indicates the image used to represent the mouse pointer when the control is being dragged. Determines how the control initiates drag-and-drop or drag-and-dock operations. Base for the number edit component. Enables Edit mode. Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Controls the attributes of text written on or in the control. Formats a floating point value. Specifies the amount the Position value changes each time the up or down button is pressed. Specifies the maximum number of characters the user can enter into the edit control. A value of 0 indicates that there is no application-defined limit on the length. User defined upper value limit.
EditorEnabled (
MaxValue (
see page 324)
2.26.1.1.1 private
2.26.1.1.1.1 TAbNumEdit.AbInfo Property
2.26.1.1.1.2 TAbNumEdit.Anchors Property

Pascal property Anchors; C++ __property Anchors; Description Specifies how the control is anchored to its parent.
2.26.1.1.1.3 TAbNumEdit.AutoSelect Property

Pascal property AutoSelect;
320
2.26 AbNumEdit Namespace C++ __property AutoSelect; Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
Determines whether all the text in the edit control is automatically selected when the control gets focus.
2.26.1.1.1.4 TAbNumEdit.AutoSize Property

Pascal property AutoSize; C++ __property AutoSize; Description Determines whether the height of the edit control automatically resizes to accommodate the text.
2.26.1.1.1.5 TAbNumEdit.ColorDefault Property

Pascal property ColorDefault: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorDefault; Description Default background color of the edit field.
2.26.1.1.1.6 TAbNumEdit.ColorEditing Property

Background color of the edit field while "valid" editing. Pascal property ColorEditing: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorEditing; Description This color is active after the first valid edit until you press return or enter an invalid char or the component become unfocused.
2.26.1.1.1.7 TAbNumEdit.ColorError Property

Pascal property ColorError: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorError; Description Background color if you enter an invalid char or value.
321
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.26.1.1.1.8 TAbNumEdit.Constraints Property

Pascal property Constraints; C++ __property Constraints; Description Specifies the size constraints for the control.
2.26.1.1.1.9 TAbNumEdit.Ctl3D Property

Pascal property Ctl3D; C++ __property Ctl3D; Description Determines whether a control has a three-dimensional (3-D) or two-dimensional look.
2.26.1.1.1.10 TAbNumEdit.DigitsBool Property

Pascal property DigitsBool: Integer; C++ __property int DigitsBool; Description Number of digits for the boolean Value. Valid inputs : 0..31 If "0" then no leading "0" are shown.
2.26.1.1.1.11 TAbNumEdit.DigitsHex Property

Pascal property DigitsHex: Integer; C++ __property int DigitsHex; Description Number of digits for the hexadecimal Value. Valid inputs : 0..8 If "0" then no leading "0" are shown.
2.26.1.1.1.12 TAbNumEdit.DragCursor Property

Pascal property DragCursor; C++ __property DragCursor; Description Indicates the image used to represent the mouse pointer when the control is being dragged.
322
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.26.1.1.1.13 TAbNumEdit.DragMode Property

Pascal property DragMode; C++ __property DragMode; Description Determines how the control initiates drag-and-drop or drag-and-dock operations.
2.26.1.1.1.14 TAbNumEdit.EditBase Property

Pascal property EditBase: TEditBase; C++ __property TEditBase EditBase; Description Base for the number edit component.
2.26.1.1.1.15 TAbNumEdit.EditorEnabled Property

Pascal property EditorEnabled: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean EditorEnabled; Description Enables Edit mode.
2.26.1.1.1.16 TAbNumEdit.Enabled Property

2.26.1.1.1.17 TAbNumEdit.Font Property

Pascal property Font; C++ __property Font; Description Controls the attributes of text written on or in the control.
2.26.1.1.1.18 TAbNumEdit.FormatStr Property

Formats a floating point value. 323
2.26 AbNumEdit Namespace Pascal property FormatStr: String; C++ __property AnsiString FormatStr; Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
FormatFloat formats the floating-point value given by Value using the format string given by Format. See Delphi/CBuilder FormatFloat.
2.26.1.1.1.19 TAbNumEdit.Increment Property

Pascal property Increment: Single; C++ __property Single Increment; Description Specifies the amount the Position value changes each time the up or down button is pressed.
2.26.1.1.1.20 TAbNumEdit.MaxLength Property

Pascal property MaxLength; C++ __property MaxLength; Description Specifies the maximum number of characters the user can enter into the edit control. A value of 0 indicates that there is no application-defined limit on the length.
2.26.1.1.1.21 TAbNumEdit.MaxValue Property

Pascal property MaxValue: Double; C++ __property Double MaxValue; Description User defined upper value limit.
2.26.1.2 TAbNumSpin Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbNumSpin = class(TAbNumEdit); C++ class TAbNumSpin : public TAbNumEdit; File AbNumEdit ( see page 471) 324
2.26 AbNumEdit Namespace Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
Edit-field with Spin-Buttons to enter/spin Float, Integer, Hexadecimal or Binary Values. all functions of TAbNumEdit ( Minimum + Maximum limitation selectable Increment ( Increment ( see page 324) (floating point) see page 317)
see page 324) usable for multiplication-spin see page 327) (>=50ms) see page 327)
selectable Spin Interval (
If eoMultiply is selected in Options Increment ( down).
see page 324) is used for multiplication (spin up) and division (spin
Minimum / Maximum The adjusted Value can be limited to a min-/maximum (if eoLimitMin/eoLimitMax in Options). In case that a limit appears the corresponding Spinbutton becomes "Not Enabled ( Members private Name AbInfo ( Anchors ( see page 320) see page 320) see page 320) see page 321) see page 321) see page 321) see page 321) see page 322) Description Contact and copyright notes. Specifies how the control is anchored to its parent. Determines whether all the text in the edit control is automatically selected when the control gets focus. Determines whether the height of the edit control automatically resizes to accommodate the text. Default background color of the edit field. Background color of the edit field while "valid" editing. Background color if you enter an invalid char or value. Specifies the size constraints for the control. Determines whether a control has a three-dimensional (3-D) or two-dimensional look. Number of digits for the boolean Value. Valid inputs : 0..31 If "0" then no leading "0" are shown. Number of digits for the hexadecimal Value. Valid inputs : 0..8 If "0" then no leading "0" are shown. Indicates the image used to represent the mouse pointer when the control is being dragged. Determines how the control initiates drag-and-drop or drag-and-dock operations. Base for the number edit component. Enables Edit mode. 325 see page 323)" (grayed)
DigitsBool ( DigitsHex ( DragCursor ( DragMode ( EditBase (
EditorEnabled (
2.26 AbNumEdit Namespace Enabled ( Font ( see page 323)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Controls the attributes of text written on or in the control. Formats a floating point value. Specifies the amount the Position value changes each time the up or down button is pressed. Specifies the maximum number of characters the user can enter into the edit control. A value of 0 indicates that there is no application-defined limit on the length. User defined upper value limit.
MaxValue ( TAbNumSpin Class Name Interval (
see page 324)
Description see page 327) see page 327) Sets the button-interval for auto-repeat if the user holds Spinbutton down. Sets delay before auto-repeat of the Spinbutton
StartDelay ( private Name AbInfo ( Anchors (
Description see page 320) see page 320) see page 320) see page 321) see page 321) see page 321) see page 321) see page 322) Contact and copyright notes. Specifies how the control is anchored to its parent. Determines whether all the text in the edit control is automatically selected when the control gets focus. Determines whether the height of the edit control automatically resizes to accommodate the text. Default background color of the edit field. Background color of the edit field while "valid" editing. Background color if you enter an invalid char or value. Specifies the size constraints for the control. Determines whether a control has a three-dimensional (3-D) or two-dimensional look. Number of digits for the boolean Value. Valid inputs : 0..31 If "0" then no leading "0" are shown. Number of digits for the hexadecimal Value. Valid inputs : 0..8 If "0" then no leading "0" are shown. Indicates the image used to represent the mouse pointer when the control is being dragged. Determines how the control initiates drag-and-drop or drag-and-dock operations. Base for the number edit component. Enables Edit mode. Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Controls the attributes of text written on or in the control. Formats a floating point value. Specifies the amount the Position value changes each time the up or down button is pressed. Specifies the maximum number of characters the user can enter into the edit control. A value of 0 indicates that there is no application-defined limit on the length. User defined upper value limit.
EditorEnabled (
MaxValue (
see page 324)
326
2.26 AbNumEdit Namespace TAbNumSpin Class Name Interval ( see page 327) see page 327)
Abakus VCL
Description Sets the button-interval for auto-repeat if the user holds Spinbutton down. Sets delay before auto-repeat of the Spinbutton
StartDelay (
2.26.1.2.1 private
2.26.1.2.1.1 TAbNumSpin.Interval Property
Pascal property Interval: Integer; C++ __property int Interval; Description Sets the button-interval for auto-repeat if the user holds Spinbutton down.
2.26.1.2.1.2 TAbNumSpin.StartDelay Property

Pascal property StartDelay: Integer; C++ __property int StartDelay; Description Sets delay before auto-repeat of the Spinbutton

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TEditBase ( see page 327) see page 328) see page 329) TNumEditOption ( TNumEditState ( Records Name TBaseProperties ( see page 328) Description Contains base properties. Description Base for the number edit component. Set of options for the component State of the number edit component.
2.26.2.1 AbNumEdit.TEditBase Enumeration

Pascal TEditBase = ( ebBin, ebHex, ebFloat, ebInt 327
2.26 AbNumEdit Namespace ); C++ enum TEditBase { ebBin, ebHex, ebFloat, ebInt }; File AbNumEdit ( Members Members ebBin ebHex ebFloat ebInt Description Base for the number edit component. see page 471)
Abakus VCL
Description Binary value Hexadecimal value Floating point value Integer value
2.26.2.2 AbNumEdit.TNumEditOption Enumeration

Pascal TNumEditOption = ( eoLimitMax, eoLimitMin, eoMultiply ); C++ enum TNumEditOption { eoLimitMax, eoLimitMin, eoMultiply }; File AbNumEdit ( Members Members eoLimitMax eoLimitMin eoMultiply Description Set of options for the component Description LimitMax is active LimitMin is active Multiply is enabled see page 471)
2.26.2.3 AbNumEdit.TBaseProperties Record

Pascal TBaseProperties = record ValidChars: String; ExpEnable: Boolean; 328
2.26 AbNumEdit Namespace MultiEnable: Boolean; Sign: String; MinValue: Extended; MaxValue: Extended; end; C++ struct TBaseProperties { AnsiString ValidChars; Boolean ExpEnable; Boolean MultiEnable; AnsiString Sign; Extended MinValue; Extended MaxValue; }; File AbNumEdit ( Members Members ValidChars: String; ExpEnable: Boolean; MultiEnable: Boolean; Sign: String; MinValue: Extended; MaxValue: Extended; Description Contains base properties. see page 471)
Abakus VCL
Types
Description String with valid chars if true exponent Char is enabled if true multiplicator Char is enabled String with valid sign's (at pos 1) lowest allowed value highest allowed value
2.26.2.4 AbNumEdit.TNumEditState Enumeration

Pascal TNumEditState = ( esNormal, esEditing, esError ); C++ enum TNumEditState { esNormal, esEditing, esError }; File AbNumEdit ( Members Members esNormal esEditing esError Description State of the number edit component. Description normal state editing error, e.g.: invalid char entered see page 471)
329
2.27 AbOpHour Namespace
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.26.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TNumEditOptions ( see page 330) Description Set of options for the component
2.26.3.1 AbNumEdit.TNumEditOptions Type

Pascal TNumEditOptions = set of TNumEditOption; C++ TNumEditOption TNumEditOptions; File AbNumEdit ( Description Set of options for the component see page 471)

TAbOpHourCounter ( Classes Name TTimeSetting ( see page 331) see page 332) TAbOpHourCounter ( Description Stores hour's minutes and seconds. TAbOpHourCounter is used to count the operation time. see page 332) is used to count the operation time.
Structs, Records, Enums Name TOpHrOption ( TOpHrIndicate ( Types Name TOpHrOptions ( see page 340) Description Set of Counter options. see page 339) see page 340) Description Set of Counter options. Indicate property.
330
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.27.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TTimeSetting ( see page 331) see page 332) TAbOpHourCounter ( Description Stores hour's minutes and seconds. TAbOpHourCounter is used to count the operation time.
2.27.1.1 TTimeSetting Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TTimeSetting = class(TPersistent); C++ class TTimeSetting : public TPersistent; File AbOpHour ( Description Stores hour's minutes and seconds. Members published Name Hour ( Min ( Sec ( published Name Hour ( Min ( Sec ( see page 332) see page 332) see page 332) Description Hours read/write. Minutes read/write. Seconds read/write. see page 332) see page 332) see page 332) Description Hours read/write. Minutes read/write. Seconds read/write. see page 471)
331
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.27.1.1.1.1 TTimeSetting.Hour Property

Pascal property Hour: Integer; C++ __property int Hour; Description Hours read/write.
2.27.1.1.1.2 TTimeSetting.Min Property

Minutes read/write. Pascal property Min: Integer; C++ __property int Min; Description Range 0..59. If you set Min to 65 this will be corrected to Hour ( see page 332)+1 and Min to 5
2.27.1.1.1.3 TTimeSetting.Sec Property

Seconds read/write. Pascal property Sec: Integer; C++ __property int Sec; Description Range 0..59. If you set Sec to 65 this will be corrected to Min ( see page 332)+1 and Sec to 5
2.27.1.2 TAbOpHourCounter Class

TAbOpHourCounter is used to count the operation time.
Hierarchy
Pascal TAbOpHourCounter = class(TAbGraphicControl); C++ class TAbOpHourCounter : public TAbGraphicControl;
332
2.27 AbOpHour Namespace File AbOpHour ( Description see page 471)
Abakus VCL
Classes
With this component you can count the time. With the property "Count ( see page 336) = true" the counter will start. An OnLimit ( see page 337) event occurs if the selected limit is reached. Via the property "CountDown ( see page 336) = true" and "Count ( see page 336) = true" the counter counts backwards until 0. If the counted time becomes 0 an OnZero ( see page 338) event occurs. See also the options opResetOnLimit, opStopOnLimit and opPresetOnZero. With the property IniSettings ( see page 337) you can specify a file (ini-style) where the components will save the time. While creation the component will check/load and while destroy the component saves the time to this file. With the method SetTime you can set the time of the counter. With the properties SeparatorChar ( see page 338), SeparatorHour ( see page 338), SeparatorMin ( SeparatorSec ( see page 339) and Indicate ( see page 337) you can change the Indicated informations. Example with a counter value of 238 hours, 49 minutes, 23 seconds Settings: Property SeparatorChar ( SeparatorHour ( SeparatorMin ( SeparatorSec ( see page 338) see page 338) see page 338) see page 339) see page 337) property of Indicated Value 238h 238h 49m 238h 49m 23s value {1 blanc} h m s see page 338),
Result with Indicate ( Indicate ( oiHour oiHourMin oiHourMinSec Members published Name AbInfo (
see page 337) property value
OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( private TAbOpHourCounter Class Name hr ( see page 335) isLimit ( isZero ( mi ( se (
see page 78)
Description Number of hours True if the value is limited True if the Value is zero Number of minutes Number of seconds Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. 333 see page 335) see page 335)
BevelInner ( BevelOuter (
2.27 AbOpHour Namespace Count ( see page 336) see page 336) see page 337)
Abakus VCL If Count becomes true counting will start.
Classes
CountDown ( HourDigits ( Indicate ( Limit (
With the CountDown property you can change the counter to count downwards. Property to change the number of digits for the Hour indication. Indicate property. Settings for access to ini-files. Time Limit settings. An OnLimit event occurs if the selected limit is reached. If the counted time becomes 0 an OnZero event occurs. Presets the counting when "CountDown ( see page 336)" and "opPresetOnZero in Options ( see page 338)" are true and the counting becomes 0. General separator char for indicated time string. Hour separator will be placed directly after the hour Value of the indication. Minutes separator will be placed directly after the minutes Value of the indication. Seconds separator will be placed directly after the seconds Value of the indication.
IniSettings ( OnLimit ( OnZero ( Options (
PresetValue (
SeparatorChar ( SeparatorHour ( SeparatorMin ( SeparatorSec ( private TAbOpHourCounter Class Name hr (
Description Number of hours True if the value is limited True if the Value is zero Number of minutes Number of seconds Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. If Count becomes true counting will start. With the CountDown property you can change the counter to count downwards. Property to change the number of digits for the Hour indication. Indicate property. Settings for access to ini-files. Time Limit settings. An OnLimit event occurs if the selected limit is reached. If the counted time becomes 0 an OnZero event occurs. Presets the counting when "CountDown ( see page 336)" and "opPresetOnZero in Options ( see page 338)" are true and the counting becomes 0. General separator char for indicated time string. Hour separator will be placed directly after the hour Value of the indication. Minutes separator will be placed directly after the minutes Value of the indication. see page 335) see page 335)
see page 335)
isLimit ( isZero ( mi ( se (
BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( Count ( CountDown ( HourDigits ( Indicate ( Limit (
see page 336)
IniSettings ( OnLimit ( OnZero ( Options (
PresetValue (
SeparatorChar ( SeparatorHour ( SeparatorMin (
334
2.27 AbOpHour Namespace SeparatorSec ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( see page 339)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Seconds separator will be placed directly after the seconds Value of the indication.
see page 78)
2.27.1.2.1 private
2.27.1.2.1.1 TAbOpHourCounter.hr Field
Pascal hr: Integer; C++ int hr; Description Number of hours
2.27.1.2.1.2 TAbOpHourCounter.isLimit Field

Pascal isLimit: Boolean; C++ Boolean isLimit; Description True if the value is limited
2.27.1.2.1.3 TAbOpHourCounter.isZero Field

Pascal isZero: Boolean; C++ Boolean isZero; Description True if the Value is zero
2.27.1.2.1.4 TAbOpHourCounter.mi Field

Pascal mi: Integer; C++ int mi; Description Number of minutes
335
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.27.1.2.1.5 TAbOpHourCounter.se Field

Pascal se: Integer; C++ int se; Description Number of seconds
2.27.1.2.1.6 TAbOpHourCounter.BevelInner Property

2.27.1.2.1.7 TAbOpHourCounter.BevelOuter Property

2.27.1.2.1.8 TAbOpHourCounter.Count Property

Pascal property Count: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Count; Description If Count becomes true counting will start.
2.27.1.2.1.9 TAbOpHourCounter.CountDown Property

Pascal property CountDown: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean CountDown; Description With the CountDown property you can change the counter to count downwards.
336
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.27.1.2.1.10 TAbOpHourCounter.HourDigits Property

Pascal property HourDigits: Integer; C++ __property int HourDigits; Description Property to change the number of digits for the Hour indication.
2.27.1.2.1.11 TAbOpHourCounter.Indicate Property

Pascal property Indicate: TOpHrIndicate; C++ __property TOpHrIndicate Indicate; Description Indicate property.
2.27.1.2.1.12 TAbOpHourCounter.IniSettings Property

Pascal property IniSettings: TIniSettings; C++ __property TIniSettings IniSettings; Description Settings for access to ini-files.
2.27.1.2.1.13 TAbOpHourCounter.Limit Property

Time Limit settings. Pascal property Limit: TTimeSetting; C++ __property TTimeSetting Limit; Description When the counter count up and this limit reached an OnLimit ( see page 337) Event occours. If opStopOnLimit in Options ( see page 338) is checked the timer will stop if the limit is reached.
2.27.1.2.1.14 TAbOpHourCounter.OnLimit Property

Pascal property OnLimit: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnLimit; Description An OnLimit event occurs if the selected limit is reached.
337
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.27.1.2.1.15 TAbOpHourCounter.OnZero Property

Pascal property OnZero: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnZero; Description If the counted time becomes 0 an OnZero event occurs.
2.27.1.2.1.16 TAbOpHourCounter.Options Property

Pascal property Options: TOpHrOptions; C++ __property TOpHrOptions Options;
2.27.1.2.1.17 TAbOpHourCounter.PresetValue Property

Pascal property PresetValue: TTimeSetting; C++ __property TTimeSetting PresetValue; Description Presets the counting when "CountDown ( the counting becomes 0. see page 336)" and "opPresetOnZero in Options ( see page 338)" are true and
2.27.1.2.1.18 TAbOpHourCounter.SeparatorChar Property

Pascal property SeparatorChar: string; C++ __property AnsiString SeparatorChar; Description General separator char for indicated time string.
2.27.1.2.1.19 TAbOpHourCounter.SeparatorHour Property

Pascal property SeparatorHour: string; C++ __property AnsiString SeparatorHour; Description Hour separator will be placed directly after the hour Value of the indication.
2.27.1.2.1.20 TAbOpHourCounter.SeparatorMin Property

Pascal property SeparatorMin: string;
338
2.27 AbOpHour Namespace C++ __property AnsiString SeparatorMin; Description
Abakus VCL
Minutes separator will be placed directly after the minutes Value of the indication.
2.27.1.2.1.21 TAbOpHourCounter.SeparatorSec Property

Pascal property SeparatorSec: string; C++ __property AnsiString SeparatorSec; Description Seconds separator will be placed directly after the seconds Value of the indication.

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TOpHrOption ( TOpHrIndicate ( see page 339) see page 340) Description Set of Counter options. Indicate property.
2.27.2.1 AbOpHour.TOpHrOption Enumeration

Pascal TOpHrOption = ( opResetOnLimit, opStopOnLimit, opPresetOnZero ); C++ enum TOpHrOption { opResetOnLimit, opStopOnLimit, opPresetOnZero }; File AbOpHour ( Members Members opResetOnLimit opStopOnLimit opPresetOnZero Description Set of Counter options. 339 Description resets the count value to 0 if the limit is reached Stops counting if the limit is reached presets the counting to "PresetValue" if "CountDown" is true and 0 reached see page 471)
2.28 AbOpPnt Namespace
Abakus VCL
2.27.2.2 AbOpHour.TOpHrIndicate Enumeration

Pascal TOpHrIndicate = ( oiHour, oiHourMin, oiHourMinSec ); C++ enum TOpHrIndicate { oiHour, oiHourMin, oiHourMinSec }; File AbOpHour ( Members Members oiHour oiHourMin oiHourMinSec Description Indicate property. Description only the hours are displayed hours and minutes are displayed hours, minutes and seconds are displayed see page 471)
2.27.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TOpHrOptions ( see page 340) Description Set of Counter options.
2.27.3.1 AbOpHour.TOpHrOptions Type

Pascal TOpHrOptions = set of TOpHrOption; C++ TOpHrOption TOpHrOptions; File AbOpHour ( Description Set of Counter options. see page 471)
340
Abakus VCL
Classes

Unit with cntrol TAbOperatingPoint ( Classes Name TIndRect ( see page 341) see page 341) TAbOperatingPoint ( Description Indication rectangle for the operating-point display. TAbOperatingPoint is used to visualize the characteristic of aggregates y(x). see page 341), used to visualize the characteristic of aggregates y(x)
2.28.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TIndRect ( see page 341) see page 341) TAbOperatingPoint ( Description Indication rectangle for the operating-point display. TAbOperatingPoint is used to visualize the characteristic of aggregates y(x).
2.28.1.1 TIndRect Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TIndRect = class(TPersistent); C++ class TIndRect : public TPersistent; File AbOpPnt ( Description Indication rectangle for the operating-point display. see page 471)
2.28.1.2 TAbOperatingPoint Class

TAbOperatingPoint is used to visualize the characteristic of aggregates y(x).
Hierarchy
341
2.29 AbPanel Namespace Pascal
Abakus VCL
Classes
TAbOperatingPoint = class(TAbGraphicControl); C++ class TAbOperatingPoint : public TAbGraphicControl; File AbOpPnt ( Description A characteristic is configured and displayed as a "static characteristics field", e.g. for a pump. The momentary operating state of the aggregate is displayed dynamically as an operating point within the characteristic field. The operating point progression is displayed as a tail. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. see page 471)
see page 78)
see page 78)
2.29 AbPanel Namespace

Panel component. Classes Name TAbPanel ( see page 343) Description Panel component.
Structs, Records, Enums Name TAbPanelOption ( Types Name TAbPanelOptions ( see page 345) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 344) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
342
2.29 AbPanel Namespace
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.29.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbPanel ( see page 343) Description Panel component.
2.29.1.1 TAbPanel Class

Panel component.
Hierarchy
Pascal TAbPanel = class(TAbCustomControl); C++ class TAbPanel : public TAbCustomControl; File AbPanel ( Description The TAbPanel component is derived from TCustomControl so it can contain other controls. Two bevels are included BevelInner and BevelOuter. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) Description Contact and copyright notes. 343 Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. see page 471)
see page 79)
see page 79)
2.29 AbPanel Namespace OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( see page 79)
Abakus VCL
Types
Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
see page 79)
see page 79)

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TAbPanelOption ( see page 344) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.29.2.1 AbPanel.TAbPanelOption Enumeration

Pascal TAbPanelOption = ( opBevelInner, opBevelOuter ); C++ enum TAbPanelOption { opBevelInner, opBevelOuter }; File AbPanel ( Members Members opBevelInner opBevelOuter Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Description Paint inner Bevel Paint outer Bevel see page 471)
2.29.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TAbPanelOptions ( see page 345) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
344
2.30 AbPrtTrd Namespace
Abakus VCL
2.29.3.1 AbPanel.TAbPanelOptions Type

Pascal TAbPanelOptions = set of TAbPanelOption; C++ TAbPanelOption TAbPanelOptions; File AbPanel ( Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 471)

Contains a Component to print a Trend or draw a trend to a TBitmap
Classes Name TLegendCaptions ( TLegend ( Structs, Records, Enums Name TFormat ( see page 356) see page 357) see page 357) see page 358) TLegendPos ( TLegendOpt ( TPrtTrdOption ( Description Fomat of the printer canvas Position of the legend Options wich informations has to be drawn on the Trend-Legend. Set of options that determine how the component is drawn 345 see page 346) see page 348) Description general info's about record-list Trend ( see page 355) legend settings/options
2.30 AbPrtTrd Namespace Types Name TLegendOptions ( TPrtTrdOptions ( see page 359) see page 359)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Options wich informations has to be drawn on the Trend-Legend. Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.30.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TLegendCaptions ( TLegend ( see page 346) see page 348) Description general info's about record-list Trend ( see page 355) legend settings/options
2.30.1.1 TLegendCaptions Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TLegendCaptions = class(TPersistent); C++ class TLegendCaptions : public TPersistent; File AbPrtTrd ( Description general info's about record-list Members private Name ChannelNo ( lUnit ( Max ( Min ( see page 347) see page 347) see page 347) see page 347) see page 348) see page 348) see page 348) see page 347) Description Header-String for the channel no. Header-String for the signal-Unit. Header-String for the Maximim indication. Header-String for the maximum - date-time Header-String for the minimum indication. Header-String for the minimum DateTime. Header-String for the signale name 1. Header-String for the signal name 2. see page 472)
MaxTime ( MinTime ( Name1 ( Name2 ( private Name ChannelNo ( lUnit ( Max (
Description see page 347) Header-String for the channel no. Header-String for the signal-Unit. Header-String for the Maximim indication. Header-String for the maximum - date-time 346 see page 347) see page 347) see page 347)
MaxTime (
2.30 AbPrtTrd Namespace Min ( see page 347) see page 348) see page 348) see page 348)
Abakus VCL Header-String for the minimum indication. Header-String for the minimum DateTime. Header-String for the signale name 1. Header-String for the signal name 2.
Classes
MinTime ( Name1 ( Name2 (
2.30.1.1.1 private
2.30.1.1.1.1 TLegendCaptions.ChannelNo Property
Pascal property ChannelNo: string; C++ __property AnsiString ChannelNo; Description Header-String for the channel no.
2.30.1.1.1.2 TLegendCaptions.lUnit Property

Pascal property lUnit: string; C++ __property AnsiString lUnit; Description Header-String for the signal-Unit.
2.30.1.1.1.3 TLegendCaptions.Max Property

Pascal property Max: string; C++ __property AnsiString Max; Description Header-String for the Maximim indication.
2.30.1.1.1.4 TLegendCaptions.MaxTime Property

Pascal property MaxTime: string; C++ __property AnsiString MaxTime; Description Header-String for the maximum - date-time
2.30.1.1.1.5 TLegendCaptions.Min Property

Pascal property Min: string;
347
2.30 AbPrtTrd Namespace C++ __property AnsiString Min; Description Header-String for the minimum indication.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.30.1.1.1.6 TLegendCaptions.MinTime Property

Pascal property MinTime: string; C++ __property AnsiString MinTime; Description Header-String for the minimum DateTime.
2.30.1.1.1.7 TLegendCaptions.Name1 Property

Pascal property Name1: string; C++ __property AnsiString Name1; Description Header-String for the signale name 1.
2.30.1.1.1.8 TLegendCaptions.Name2 Property

Pascal property Name2: string; C++ __property AnsiString Name2; Description Header-String for the signal name 2.
2.30.1.2 TLegend Class

Trend ( Hierarchy see page 355) legend settings/options
Pascal TLegend = class(TPersistent); C++ class TLegend : public TPersistent; File AbPrtTrd ( Description The Trend ( see page 355) - Legend ( see page 353) can display the channel number, SignalName1+2, the min-/ and 348 see page 472)
2.30 AbPrtTrd Namespace maximum value with date+time and the signal-Unit. Members private Name DrawTrendBmp ( ExPrintTrend ( PrintTrend ( published Name AbInfo ( BkColor ( Font ( FontSize ( Format ( see page 351) see page 351) see page 352) see page 352) see page 352) see page 351) see page 350) see page 350)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Draws a trend to a TBitmap. Draws a trend to a printer at x/y position. Draws a trend to a printer at x/y position.
see page 351)
Description Contact and copyright notes. Background color Font for the trend Caption and scales. Font ( Trend ( see page 351) size, used for the scale and legend. see page 355) caption font size.
FontSizeCaption (
Format for the properties FontSize ( see page 352), FontSizeCaption ( see page 352), Height ( see page 352), LegendSpace, OuterBorder ( see page 354), ScaleSpacing ( see page 355), TrendSpace ( see page 356) and Width ( see page 356) in Inch, Metric or Pixel Height of the trend incl. legend and caption. Trend ( see page 355) legend settings/options Logical pixel of the screen. This event occurs when you start a printjob with method "PrintTrend ( see page 351)" before the trend will be drawn. This event occurs when you start a printjob with method "PrintTrend ( see page 351)" after the trend is drawn. This event occurs each time you change the settings of the component. Set of options. Space arround the thend (incl. scale, caption and legend). Print preview paintbox. Link this property to a painbox if you like to see a preview of the trend. This preview can be zoomed with the PreviewZoom ( see page 354) property. Zoom factor of the trend-preview. Limit: 0.1-10. This property influence only the preview and not the printed trend. Number of the first record you like to print. Number of the last record you like to print. Space between the trend channels. Number of steps for the time-scale. Default=10. Link to the trend you like to print. Space between the trend and scale + time. Width of the trend.
Height ( Legend (
LogPixelScreen ( OnAfterBeginDoc ( OnBeforeEndDoc (
OnSettingsChange ( Options (
OuterBorder (
PreviewPaintBox (
PreviewZoom (
see page 354)
RecFrom ( RecTo (
see page 355)
ScaleSpacing ( Trend ( Width ( private Name DrawTrendBmp ( ExPrintTrend ( PrintTrend (
TimeScaleSteps ( TrendSpace (
Description see page 350) Draws a trend to a TBitmap. Draws a trend to a printer at x/y position. Draws a trend to a printer at x/y position. see page 350)
see page 351)
349
2.30 AbPrtTrd Namespace published Name AbInfo ( BkColor ( Font ( FontSize ( Format ( see page 351) see page 351) see page 352) see page 352) see page 352) see page 351)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Contact and copyright notes. Background color Font for the trend Caption and scales. Font ( Trend ( see page 351) size, used for the scale and legend. see page 355) caption font size.
FontSizeCaption (
Format for the properties FontSize ( see page 352), FontSizeCaption ( see page 352), Height ( see page 352), LegendSpace, OuterBorder ( see page 354), ScaleSpacing ( see page 355), TrendSpace ( see page 356) and Width ( see page 356) in Inch, Metric or Pixel Height of the trend incl. legend and caption. Trend ( see page 355) legend settings/options Logical pixel of the screen. This event occurs when you start a printjob with method "PrintTrend ( see page 351)" before the trend will be drawn. This event occurs when you start a printjob with method "PrintTrend ( see page 351)" after the trend is drawn. This event occurs each time you change the settings of the component. Set of options. Space arround the thend (incl. scale, caption and legend). Print preview paintbox. Link this property to a painbox if you like to see a preview of the trend. This preview can be zoomed with the PreviewZoom ( see page 354) property. Zoom factor of the trend-preview. Limit: 0.1-10. This property influence only the preview and not the printed trend. Number of the first record you like to print. Number of the last record you like to print. Space between the trend channels. Number of steps for the time-scale. Default=10. Link to the trend you like to print. Space between the trend and scale + time. Width of the trend.
Height ( Legend (
LogPixelScreen ( OnAfterBeginDoc ( OnBeforeEndDoc (
OnSettingsChange ( Options (
OuterBorder (
PreviewPaintBox (
PreviewZoom (
see page 354)
RecFrom ( RecTo (
see page 355)
ScaleSpacing ( Trend ( Width (
TimeScaleSteps ( TrendSpace (
2.30.1.2.1 private
2.30.1.2.1.1 TLegend.DrawTrendBmp Method
Pascal procedure DrawTrendBmp(Bmp: TBitmap); C++ __fastcall DrawTrendBmp(TBitmap Bmp); Description Draws a trend to a TBitmap.
2.30.1.2.1.2 TLegend.ExPrintTrend Method

Draws a trend to a printer at x/y position. 350
2.30 AbPrtTrd Namespace Pascal
Abakus VCL
Classes
procedure ExPrintTrend(x: Integer; y: Integer); C++ __fastcall ExPrintTrend(int x, int y); Description Use this routine if you want to draw several trends to one page. Before you call this routine you must call "Printer.BeginDoc", after all trends ar drawn call "Printer.EndDoc" to finish the printjob. If you want to print a single trend use the method "PrintTrend ( see page 351)". see page 352) property (Metric, Inch or Pixel).
The unit/format of the x/y (left / top) integer-value depends on the Format (
2.30.1.2.1.3 TLegend.PrintTrend Method

Draws a trend to a printer at x/y position. Pascal procedure PrintTrend(x: Integer; y: Integer); C++ __fastcall PrintTrend(int x, int y); Description The unit/format of the x/y (left / top) integer-value depends on the Format ( see page 352) property (Metric, Inch or Pixel). see page 350)".
If you want to print several trends on one page use the method "ExPrintTrend (
2.30.1.2.2.1 TLegend.AbInfo Property
2.30.1.2.2.2 TLegend.BkColor Property

Pascal property BkColor: TColor; C++ __property TColor BkColor; Description Background color
2.30.1.2.2.3 TLegend.Font Property

Pascal property Font: TFont;
351
2.30 AbPrtTrd Namespace C++ __property TFont Font; Description Font for the trend Caption and scales. Notes
Abakus VCL
Classes
The size/height property of the font will be ignored. Use FontSize ( to adjust.
see page 352) and FontSizeCaption (
see page 352)
2.30.1.2.2.4 TLegend.FontSize Property

Pascal property FontSize: Integer; C++ __property int FontSize; Description Font ( see page 351) size, used for the scale and legend.
2.30.1.2.2.5 TLegend.FontSizeCaption Property

Pascal property FontSizeCaption: Integer; C++ __property int FontSizeCaption; Description Trend ( see page 355) caption font size.
2.30.1.2.2.6 TLegend.Format Property

Pascal property Format: TFormat; C++ __property TFormat Format; Description Format for the properties FontSize ( see page 352), FontSizeCaption ( see page 352), Height ( see page 352), LegendSpace, OuterBorder ( see page 354), ScaleSpacing ( see page 355), TrendSpace ( see page 356) and Width ( see page 356) in Inch, Metric or Pixel
2.30.1.2.2.7 TLegend.Height Property

Pascal property Height: Integer; C++ __property int Height; Description Height of the trend incl. legend and caption.
352
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.30.1.2.2.8 TLegend.Legend Property

Trend ( Pascal property Legend: TLegend; C++ __property TLegend Legend; Description The Trend ( see page 355) - Legend can display the channel number, SignalName1+2, the min-/ and maximum value with date+time and the signal-Unit. see page 355) legend settings/options
2.30.1.2.2.9 TLegend.LogPixelScreen Property

Logical pixel of the screen. Pascal property LogPixelScreen: Integer; C++ __property int LogPixelScreen; Description By default this property gets the solution of the screen from the windows-settings. You may change the default settings to adjust the correct screen(bmp)-size if you use the Format ( see page 352) Inch or Pixel.
2.30.1.2.2.10 TLegend.OnAfterBeginDoc Property

This event occurs when you start a printjob with method "PrintTrend ( Pascal property OnAfterBeginDoc: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnAfterBeginDoc; Description Note: You will not get this event when you use method "ExPrintTrend ( see page 350)" see page 351)" before the trend will be drawn.
2.30.1.2.2.11 TLegend.OnBeforeEndDoc Property

This event occurs when you start a printjob with method "PrintTrend ( Pascal property OnBeforeEndDoc: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnBeforeEndDoc; Description Note: You will not get this event when you use method "ExPrintTrend ( see page 350)" see page 351)" after the trend is drawn.
2.30.1.2.2.12 TLegend.OnSettingsChange Property

Pascal property OnSettingsChange: TNotifyEvent;
353
2.30 AbPrtTrd Namespace C++
Abakus VCL
Classes
__property TNotifyEvent OnSettingsChange; Description This event occurs each time you change the settings of the component.
2.30.1.2.2.13 TLegend.Options Property

Pascal property Options: TPrtTrdOptions; C++ __property TPrtTrdOptions Options; Description Set of options.
2.30.1.2.2.14 TLegend.OuterBorder Property

Pascal property OuterBorder: Integer; C++ __property int OuterBorder; Description Space arround the thend (incl. scale, caption and legend).
2.30.1.2.2.15 TLegend.PreviewPaintBox Property

Pascal property PreviewPaintBox: TPaintBox; C++ __property TPaintBox PreviewPaintBox; Description Print preview paintbox. Link this property to a painbox if you like to see a preview of the trend. This preview can be zoomed with the PreviewZoom ( see page 354) property.
2.30.1.2.2.16 TLegend.PreviewZoom Property

Pascal property PreviewZoom: Single; C++ __property Single PreviewZoom; Description Zoom factor of the trend-preview. Limit: 0.1-10. This property influence only the preview and not the printed trend. Example With PreviewZoom of 0.5 the preview is 50% of the original size.
354
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.30.1.2.2.17 TLegend.RecFrom Property

Pascal property RecFrom: Integer; C++ __property int RecFrom; Description Number of the first record you like to print.
2.30.1.2.2.18 TLegend.RecTo Property

Pascal property RecTo: Integer; C++ __property int RecTo; Description Number of the last record you like to print. Notes If you adjust a to hight number the displayed records will be limited to the last record.
2.30.1.2.2.19 TLegend.ScaleSpacing Property

Pascal property ScaleSpacing: Integer; C++ __property int ScaleSpacing; Description Space between the trend channels.
2.30.1.2.2.20 TLegend.TimeScaleSteps Property

Pascal property TimeScaleSteps: Integer; C++ __property int TimeScaleSteps; Description Number of steps for the time-scale. Default=10.
2.30.1.2.2.21 TLegend.Trend Property

Pascal property Trend: TAbTrend; C++ __property TAbTrend Trend; Description Link to the trend you like to print.
355
Abakus VCL
2.30.1.2.2.22 TLegend.TrendSpace Property

Pascal property TrendSpace: Integer; C++ __property int TrendSpace; Description Space between the trend and scale + time.
2.30.1.2.2.23 TLegend.Width Property

Pascal property Width: Integer; C++ __property int Width; Description Width of the trend.

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TFormat ( see page 356) see page 357) see page 357) see page 358) TLegendPos ( TLegendOpt ( TPrtTrdOption ( Description Fomat of the printer canvas Position of the legend Options wich informations has to be drawn on the Trend-Legend. Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.30.2.1 AbPrtTrd.TFormat Enumeration

Pascal TFormat = ( Inch, Metric, Pixel ); C++ enum TFormat { Inch, Metric, Pixel }; File AbPrtTrd ( see page 472)
356
2.30 AbPrtTrd Namespace Members Members Inch Metric Pixel Description Fomat of the printer canvas
Abakus VCL
Description Format is inch Format is metric Format is in Pixel
2.30.2.2 AbPrtTrd.TLegendPos Enumeration

Pascal TLegendPos = ( lpSplit, lpLeft, lpCenter, lpRight ); C++ enum TLegendPos { lpSplit, lpLeft, lpCenter, lpRight }; File AbPrtTrd ( Members Members lpSplit lpLeft lpCenter lpRight Description Position of the legend Description Legend position is in two blocks left and right Legend position is left Legend position is centered Legend position is right see page 472)
2.30.2.3 AbPrtTrd.TLegendOpt Enumeration

Pascal TLegendOpt = ( loName1, loName2, loMin, loMinTime, loMax, loMaxTime, loUnit ); C++ enum TLegendOpt { loName1, loName2, 357
2.30 AbPrtTrd Namespace loMin, loMinTime, loMax, loMaxTime, loUnit }; File AbPrtTrd ( Members Members loName1 loName2 loMin loMinTime loMax loMaxTime loUnit Description see page 472)
Abakus VCL
Description SignalName1 SignalName2 the minimum-value date/time of the minimum-value the maximum-value date/time of the maximum-value the Signal-unit
Options wich informations has to be drawn on the Trend-Legend.
2.30.2.4 AbPrtTrd.TPrtTrdOption Enumeration

Pascal TPrtTrdOption = ( ptCaption, ptLegend, ptColor, ptVerticalScale, ptSelScaleOnly, ptUseTrdBkCol ); C++ enum TPrtTrdOption { ptCaption, ptLegend, ptColor, ptVerticalScale, ptSelScaleOnly, ptUseTrdBkCol }; File AbPrtTrd ( Members Members ptCaption ptLegend ptColor ptVerticalScale ptSelScaleOnly ptUseTrdBkCol Description Caption (Trend caption) a channel legend in color or black and white scale-text vertical use trend-background color print only only one scale (selected in trend "AbsScaleCh") see page 472)
358
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace Description
Abakus VCL
2.30.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TLegendOptions ( TPrtTrdOptions ( see page 359) see page 359) Description Options wich informations has to be drawn on the Trend-Legend. Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.30.3.1 AbPrtTrd.TLegendOptions Type

Pascal TLegendOptions = set of TLegendOpt; C++ TLegendOpt TLegendOptions; File AbPrtTrd ( Description Options wich informations has to be drawn on the Trend-Legend. see page 472)
2.30.3.2 AbPrtTrd.TPrtTrdOptions Type

Pascal TPrtTrdOptions = set of TPrtTrdOption; C++ TPrtTrdOption TPrtTrdOptions; File AbPrtTrd ( Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 472)
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace

Unit with components TAb120Meter ( Classes Name TAbRMeter ( see page 361) Description Base class for our round meters 359 see page 369), TAb180Meter ( see page 367), TAb270Meter ( see page 364)
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace TAbRScale ( see page 363) see page 364)
Abakus VCL Settings for the indicator scale Round meter (270)
Classes
TAb270Meter (
TAb180Meter (
see page 367)
Round meter (180)
TAb120Meter (
see page 369)
Round meter (120)
Structs, Records, Enums Name TRMeterOption ( TMeterType ( Types Name TRMeterOptions ( see page 374) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 372) see page 373) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Meter type
2.31.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbRMeter ( TAbRScale ( see page 361) see page 363) Description Base class for our round meters Settings for the indicator scale
360
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace TAb270Meter ( see page 364)
Abakus VCL Round meter (270)
Classes
TAb180Meter (
see page 367)
Round meter (180)
TAb120Meter (
see page 369)
Round meter (120)
2.31.1.1 TAbRMeter Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbRMeter = class(TAbAnalogGControl); C++ class TAbRMeter : public TAbAnalogGControl; File AbRMeter ( Description Base class for our round meters Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). 361 see page 472)
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( see page 78)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
see page 124)
see page 125)
OnPosChanged (
362
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick (
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 124)
see page 125)
2.31.1.2 TAbRScale Class

Hierarchy
363
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace Pascal TAbRScale = class(TAbScale); C++ class TAbRScale : public TAbScale; File AbRMeter ( Description Settings for the indicator scale Members published Name OnChange ( TAbScale Class Name Angle ( Font ( see page 65) see page 65) see page 66) see page 66) see page 66) see page 65) AngleMode ( StepLines ( Text ( see page 59) see page 472)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Text angel of the scale numbers. Angle mode for the scale numbers. Font of the scale numbers. Settings for the step lines. Settings for the sub-step lines. Delimerted Text for the scale numbers. Alignment of the scale numbers. Horizontal offset for the scale numbers. Vertical offset for the scale numbers.
SubStepLines ( TextAlignment ( TextOffsetX ( TextOffsetY ( published Name OnChange ( TAbScale Class Name Angle ( Font (
Description see page 65) see page 65) see page 66) see page 66) see page 66) see page 65) Text angel of the scale numbers. Angle mode for the scale numbers. Font of the scale numbers. Settings for the step lines. Settings for the sub-step lines. Delimerted Text for the scale numbers. Alignment of the scale numbers. Horizontal offset for the scale numbers. Vertical offset for the scale numbers.
AngleMode ( StepLines ( Text (
2.31.1.3 TAb270Meter Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAb270Meter = class(TAbRMeter); 364
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace C++ class TAb270Meter : public TAbRMeter; File AbRMeter ( Description Round meter (270) see page 472)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 123)
365
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace OnOverflow ( see page 123) see page 124) see page 124)
see page 124)
see page 125)
see page 78)
OnMinMaxChange (
366
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace OnMouseDown ( OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnOverflow ( see page 123) see page 123)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 124)
see page 125)

Hierarchy
Pascal TAb180Meter = class(TAbRMeter); C++ class TAb180Meter : public TAbRMeter; File AbRMeter ( Description Round meter (180) see page 472)
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. 367
see page 78)
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick (
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 124)
see page 125)
OnPosChanged (
368
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick (
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 124)
see page 125)

Hierarchy
369
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace Pascal TAb120Meter = class(TAbRMeter); C++ class TAb120Meter : public TAbRMeter; File AbRMeter ( Description Round meter (120) see page 472)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
370
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace OnSectorChange ( OnSettingsChange ( OnStartDrag ( see page 124) see page 124)
see page 124)
see page 125)
see page 78)
see page 123)
371
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnOverflow ( see page 123)
Abakus VCL
see page 124)
see page 125)

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TRMeterOption ( TMeterType ( see page 372) see page 373) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Meter type
2.31.2.1 AbRMeter.TRMeterOption Enumeration

Pascal TRMeterOption = ( opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opName1, opName2, opOverflow, opLimit, opSector, opUnit ); C++ enum TRMeterOption { opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opName1, opName2, opOverflow, opLimit, opSector, opUnit }; File AbRMeter ( see page 472) 372
2.31 AbRMeter Namespace Members Members opBevelInner opBevelOuter opName1 opName2 opOverflow opLimit opSector opUnit Description
Abakus VCL
Types
Description InnerBevel OuterBevel SignalName1 SignalName2 Overflow indication Limit indication sector indication signal unit indication
2.31.2.2 AbRMeter.TMeterType Enumeration

Pascal TMeterType = ( Ab360Meter, Ab270Meter, Ab180Meter, Ab120Meter ); C++ enum TMeterType { Ab360Meter, Ab270Meter, Ab180Meter, Ab120Meter }; File AbRMeter ( Members Members Ab360Meter Ab270Meter Ab180Meter Ab120Meter Description Meter type Description Round meter 360 Round meter 270 Round meter 180 Round meter 120 see page 472)
2.31.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TRMeterOptions ( see page 374) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
373
2.32 AbSwitch Namespace
Abakus VCL
2.31.3.1 AbRMeter.TRMeterOptions Type

Pascal TRMeterOptions = set of TRMeterOption; C++ TRMeterOption TRMeterOptions; File AbRMeter ( Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 472)

Namespace for our switch components Classes Name TAbSwitch ( see page 375) see page 377) TAbRockerSwitch ( Description General class for "Switch" components. TAbRockSwitch is used as a two state switch.
TAbToggleSwitch (
see page 379)
TAbToggleSwitch is used as a two state switch.
374
2.32 AbSwitch Namespace Structs, Records, Enums Name TBtnOrientation ( see page 380)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Orientation of the switch
2.32.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbSwitch ( see page 375) see page 377) TAbRockerSwitch ( Description General class for "Switch" components. TAbRockSwitch is used as a two state switch.
TAbToggleSwitch (
see page 379)
TAbToggleSwitch is used as a two state switch.
2.32.1.1 TAbSwitch Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbSwitch = class(TAbBinGControl); C++ class TAbSwitch : public TAbBinGControl; 375
2.32 AbSwitch Namespace File AbSwitch ( Description General class for "Switch" components. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbSwitch Class Name BevelOuter ( see page 376) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) BtnBevelWidth ( BtnColorFace ( see page 472)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)
BtnColorHighlight ( BtnColorShadow ( published Name AbInfo (
PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbSwitch Class Name BevelOuter (
see page 135)
Description see page 376) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Width of the button bevel. Color of the button face. Highlight Color of the button Bevel. Shadow color of the button Bevel.
BtnBevelWidth ( BtnColorFace (
BtnColorHighlight ( BtnColorShadow (
2.32.1.1.1.1 TAbSwitch.BevelOuter Property
376
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.32.1.1.1.2 TAbSwitch.BtnBevelWidth Property

Pascal property BtnBevelWidth: Integer; C++ __property int BtnBevelWidth; Description Width of the button bevel.
2.32.1.1.1.3 TAbSwitch.BtnColorFace Property

Pascal property BtnColorFace: TColor; C++ __property TColor BtnColorFace; Description Color of the button face.
2.32.1.1.1.4 TAbSwitch.BtnColorHighlight Property

Pascal property BtnColorHighlight: TColor; C++ __property TColor BtnColorHighlight; Description Highlight Color of the button Bevel.
2.32.1.1.1.5 TAbSwitch.BtnColorShadow Property

Pascal property BtnColorShadow: TColor; C++ __property TColor BtnColorShadow; Description Shadow color of the button Bevel.
2.32.1.2 TAbRockerSwitch Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbRockerSwitch = class(TAbSwitch); C++ class TAbRockerSwitch : public TAbSwitch; File AbSwitch ( see page 472) 377
2.32 AbSwitch Namespace Description TAbRockSwitch is used as a two state switch.
Abakus VCL
Classes
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbSwitch Class Name BevelOuter ( see page 376) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) BtnBevelWidth ( BtnColorFace ( Description Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Width of the button bevel. Color of the button face. Highlight Color of the button Bevel. Shadow color of the button Bevel. Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)
PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbSwitch Class Name BevelOuter (
see page 135)
Description see page 376) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Width of the button bevel. Color of the button face. Highlight Color of the button Bevel. Shadow color of the button Bevel.
BtnBevelWidth ( BtnColorFace (
378
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.32.1.3 TAbToggleSwitch Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbToggleSwitch = class(TAbSwitch); C++ class TAbToggleSwitch : public TAbSwitch; File AbSwitch ( Description TAbToggleSwitch is used as a two state switch. see page 472)
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 135) see page 135) see page 135) PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbSwitch Class Name BevelOuter ( see page 376) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) BtnBevelWidth ( BtnColorFace ( Description Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Width of the button bevel. Color of the button face. Highlight Color of the button Bevel. Shadow color of the button Bevel. Description Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)
Description see page 135) see page 135) Contact and copyright notes. Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
PopupMenu (
379
2.33 AbTank Namespace ShowHint ( Visible ( TAbSwitch Class Name BevelOuter ( see page 376) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) see page 377) BtnBevelWidth ( BtnColorFace ( see page 135)
Abakus VCL Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Determines whether the component appears onscreen.
see page 135)

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TBtnOrientation ( see page 380) Description Orientation of the switch
2.32.2.1 AbSwitch.TBtnOrientation Enumeration

Pascal TBtnOrientation = ( boHorizontal, boVertical ); C++ enum TBtnOrientation { boHorizontal, boVertical }; File AbSwitch ( Members Members boHorizontal boVertical Description Orientation of the switch Description horizontal vertical see page 472)
2.33 AbTank Namespace

Tank level indicator.
380
2.33 AbTank Namespace Classes Name TTankSettings ( TAbTank ( see page 381) see page 384)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description stores settings/information's for a Tank component Tank level indicator.
Structs, Records, Enums Name TTankOption ( TTankStyle ( Types Name TTankOptions ( see page 390) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 389) see page 389) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Style / shape of the tank.
2.33.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TTankSettings ( TAbTank ( see page 381) see page 384) Description stores settings/information's for a Tank component Tank level indicator.
2.33.1.1 TTankSettings Class

Hierarchy
381
2.33 AbTank Namespace Pascal TTankSettings = class(TPersistent); C++
Abakus VCL
Classes
class TTankSettings : public TPersistent; File AbTank ( Description stores settings/information's for a Tank component Members published Name BkColor ( Color ( see page 382) see page 383) see page 383) see page 383) see page 383) Description Procedure to set the background color of the tank. Property to set the color of the Tank-level indication. Property to set the Tank crater width. Event which occurs when changes are done that requires a "Full" redraw. Event which occurs when changes are done that does not requires a "Full" redraw. Property to set the pen color of the Tank. Property to set the pen width of Tank. Property to set the style of the tank. see page 473)
CraterWidth ( OnChange ( OnChange2 ( PenColor ( PenWidth ( Style ( published Name BkColor ( Color (
see page 384)
Description see page 382) see page 383) see page 383) see page 383) Procedure to set the background color of the tank. Property to set the color of the Tank-level indication. Property to set the Tank crater width. Event which occurs when changes are done that requires a "Full" redraw. Event which occurs when changes are done that does not requires a "Full" redraw. Property to set the pen color of the Tank. Property to set the pen width of Tank. Property to set the style of the tank. see page 383)
CraterWidth ( OnChange ( OnChange2 ( PenColor ( PenWidth ( Style (
see page 384)
2.33.1.1.1.1 TTankSettings.BkColor Property
Pascal property BkColor: TColor; C++ __property TColor BkColor; Description Procedure to set the background color of the tank.
382
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.33.1.1.1.2 TTankSettings.Color Property

Pascal property Color: TColor; C++ __property TColor Color; Description Property to set the color of the Tank-level indication.
2.33.1.1.1.3 TTankSettings.CraterWidth Property

Pascal property CraterWidth: Smallint; C++ __property Smallint CraterWidth; Description Property to set the Tank crater width.
2.33.1.1.1.4 TTankSettings.OnChange Property

Pascal property OnChange: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnChange; Description Event which occurs when changes are done that requires a "Full" redraw.
2.33.1.1.1.5 TTankSettings.OnChange2 Property

Pascal property OnChange2: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnChange2; Description Event which occurs when changes are done that does not requires a "Full" redraw.
2.33.1.1.1.6 TTankSettings.PenColor Property

Pascal property PenColor: TColor; C++ __property TColor PenColor; Description Property to set the pen color of the Tank.
383
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.33.1.1.1.7 TTankSettings.PenWidth Property

Pascal property PenWidth: Smallint; C++ __property Smallint PenWidth; Description Property to set the pen width of Tank.
2.33.1.1.1.8 TTankSettings.Style Property

Pascal property Style: TTankStyle; C++ __property TTankStyle Style; Description Property to set the style of the tank.
2.33.1.2 TAbTank Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbTank = class(TAbAnalogGControl); C++ class TAbTank : public TAbAnalogGControl; File AbTank ( Description Tank level indicator. see page 473)
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) Description Contact and copyright notes.
384
2.33 AbTank Namespace OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( see page 78)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 124)
see page 125)
OnPosChanged ( TAbTank Class Name BevelValue ( FontUnitCol (
Description see page 387) see page 387) Settings for the bevel of the Value indicator. Property to adjust the font color of the signal unit indication. 385
2.33 AbTank Namespace Options ( PPH ( see page 387)
Abakus VCL Set of options for the tank component. Property to adjust a Percentage of "Value" shown in a different color.
Classes
PPHColor (
Property to adjust a different color for a certain percentage of the level indication. Some general settings for the Tank component. Property to adjust the horizontal offset of the Value Indicator Property to adjust the vertical offset of the Value Indicator
TankSettings ( VIndOffsX ( VIndOffsY ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale (
OnPosChanged ( TAbTank Class Name BevelValue ( FontUnitCol ( Options ( PPH (
Description see page 387) see page 387) Settings for the bevel of the Value indicator. Property to adjust the font color of the signal unit indication. Set of options for the tank component. Property to adjust a Percentage of "Value" shown in a different color. Property to adjust a different color for a certain percentage of the level indication. Some general settings for the Tank component. Property to adjust the horizontal offset of the Value Indicator Property to adjust the vertical offset of the Value Indicator
see page 387)
PPHColor (
TankSettings ( VIndOffsX ( VIndOffsY ( published Name AbInfo (
see page 78)
Description see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the
see page 122)
386
2.33 AbTank Namespace OnMinMaxChange ( OnMouseDown ( OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnOverflow ( see page 123)
Abakus VCL Event occurs if a new min or max Value ( has changed
Classes see page 125)
see page 124)
see page 125)
2.33.1.2.1 private
2.33.1.2.1.1 TAbTank.BevelValue Property
Pascal property BevelValue: TAbSBevel; C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelValue; Description Settings for the bevel of the Value indicator.
2.33.1.2.1.2 TAbTank.FontUnitCol Property

Pascal property FontUnitCol: TColor; C++ __property TColor FontUnitCol; Description Property to adjust the font color of the signal unit indication.
2.33.1.2.1.3 TAbTank.Options Property

Pascal property Options: TTankOptions; C++ __property TTankOptions Options;
387
2.33 AbTank Namespace Description Set of options for the tank component.
Abakus VCL
2.33.1.2.1.4 TAbTank.PPH Property

Pascal property PPH: Single; C++ __property Single PPH; Description Property to adjust a Percentage of "Value" shown in a different color.
2.33.1.2.1.5 TAbTank.PPHColor Property

Pascal property PPHColor: TColor; C++ __property TColor PPHColor; Description Property to adjust a different color for a certain percentage of the level indication.
2.33.1.2.1.6 TAbTank.TankSettings Property

Pascal property TankSettings: TTankSettings; C++ __property TTankSettings TankSettings; Description Some general settings for the Tank component.
2.33.1.2.1.7 TAbTank.VIndOffsX Property

Pascal property VIndOffsX: Integer; C++ __property int VIndOffsX; Description Property to adjust the horizontal offset of the Value Indicator
2.33.1.2.1.8 TAbTank.VIndOffsY Property

Pascal property VIndOffsY: Integer; C++ __property int VIndOffsY; Description Property to adjust the vertical offset of the Value Indicator
388
Abakus VCL

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TTankOption ( TTankStyle ( see page 389) see page 389) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Style / shape of the tank.
2.33.2.1 AbTank.TTankOption Enumeration

Pascal TTankOption = ( opUseSectorColors, opValue, opUnit ); C++ enum TTankOption { opUseSectorColors, opValue, opUnit }; File AbTank ( Members Members opUseSectorColors opValue opUnit Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Description sector-colors used for level indication show value indicator Schow signal unit. see page 473)
2.33.2.2 AbTank.TTankStyle Enumeration

Pascal TTankStyle = ( tsHorizontal, tsVertical, tsEllipse, tsRoundRect, tsCrater, tsRectangle ); C++ enum TTankStyle { tsHorizontal, tsVertical, tsEllipse, tsRoundRect, 389
2.34 AbThMet Namespace tsCrater, tsRectangle }; File AbTank ( Members Members tsHorizontal tsVertical tsEllipse tsRoundRect tsCrater tsRectangle Description Style / shape of the tank. see page 473)
Abakus VCL
Description horizontal tank shape vertical tank shape elliptic tank shape round rectangle tank shape crater tank shape rectangle tank shape
2.33.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TTankOptions ( see page 390) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.33.3.1 AbTank.TTankOptions Type

Pascal TTankOptions = set of TTankOption; C++ TTankOption TTankOptions; File AbTank ( Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 473)
2.34 AbThMet Namespace

Vertical bar indicator with scale and digital Value-indication.
390
2.34 AbThMet Namespace Classes Name TAbThermometer ( see page 391)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Vertical bar indicator with scale and digital Value-indication.
Structs, Records, Enums Name TThMetOption ( Types Name TThMetOptions ( see page 398) Description set of options that determine how the component is drawn. see page 397) Description set of options that determine how the component is drawn.
2.34.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbThermometer ( see page 391) Description Vertical bar indicator with scale and digital Value-indication.
2.34.1.1 TAbThermometer Class

Vertical bar indicator with scale and digital Value-indication.
391
Abakus VCL
Classes
Hierarchy
Pascal TAbThermometer = class(TAbAnalogGControl); C++ class TAbThermometer : public TAbAnalogGControl; File AbThMet ( Description This component display's the value in form of a scaled-bar with digital value indication. You can change the signal unit (default C) to any other Unit to display other signals like pressure or voltage. Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( Description Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the see page 125) Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. see page 473)
see page 78)
see page 123)
392
2.34 AbThMet Namespace OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnOverflow ( see page 123)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 124)
see page 125)
Description see page 395) see page 395) see page 395) see page 396) see page 396) see page 396) see page 396) If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Settings for Bar-indications Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the Value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication Class with settings for a scale
see page 396)
ScaleSettings (
ScaleSpacing (
see page 397)
393
2.34 AbThMet Namespace private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( TAbThermometer Class Name AutoSize ( see page 395) see page 395) see page 395) see page 396) see page 396) see page 396) see page 396)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Settings for Bar-indications Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the Value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication Class with settings for a scale
see page 396)
ScaleSettings (
ScaleSpacing ( published Name AbInfo (
see page 397)
see page 78)
Description see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) Signal Value ( see page 125) in Digit Options for the components hint indication Signal lower limit Signal upper limit Stores the Min/Max Value ( see page 125) with DateTime Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control.
OnDblClick ( OnDragDrop ( OnDragOver (
394
2.34 AbThMet Namespace OnEndDrag ( OnLimit ( see page 122)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by dropping the object or by canceling the dragging. Event occurs if the Value ( Lower or upper limit see page 125) exceeds the see page 125)
see page 124)
see page 125)
2.34.1.1.1 private
2.34.1.1.1.1 TAbThermometer.AutoSize Property
2.34.1.1.1.2 TAbThermometer.BarSettings Property

Pascal property BarSettings: TBarSettings; C++ __property TBarSettings BarSettings; Description Settings for Bar-indications
2.34.1.1.1.3 TAbThermometer.BevelInner Property

Pascal property BevelInner: TAbSBevel; 395
2.34 AbThMet Namespace C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelInner; Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component.
2.34.1.1.1.4 TAbThermometer.BevelOuter Property

2.34.1.1.1.5 TAbThermometer.BevelValue Property

Pascal property BevelValue: TAbSBevel; C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelValue; Description Determines the style of the Value indication bevel.
2.34.1.1.1.6 TAbThermometer.FontValue Property

2.34.1.1.1.7 TAbThermometer.Options Property

Pascal property Options: TThMetOptions; C++ __property TThMetOptions Options;
2.34.1.1.1.8 TAbThermometer.ScaleSettings Property

396
Abakus VCL
2.34.1.1.1.9 TAbThermometer.ScaleSpacing Property

Pascal property ScaleSpacing: Integer; C++ __property int ScaleSpacing; Description Space Bar and Scale.

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TThMetOption ( see page 397) Description set of options that determine how the component is drawn.
2.34.2.1 AbThMet.TThMetOption Enumeration

Pascal TThMetOption = ( opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opValue, opName1, opName2, opUnit ); C++ enum TThMetOption { opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opValue, opName1, opName2, opUnit };
397
2.35 AbTrend Namespace File AbThMet ( Members Members opBevelInner opBevelOuter opValue opName1 opName2 opUnit Description see page 473)
Abakus VCL
Description show inner bevel show outer bevel show value indicator show signal name 1 show signal name 2 show signal unit
set of options that determine how the component is drawn.
2.34.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TThMetOptions ( see page 398) Description set of options that determine how the component is drawn.
2.34.3.1 AbThMet.TThMetOptions Type

Pascal TThMetOptions = set of TThMetOption; C++ TThMetOption TThMetOptions; File AbThMet ( Description set of options that determine how the component is drawn. see page 473)
2.35 AbTrend Namespace

8 Channel Trend display (recorder). Classes Name TTrendLimit ( TRecInfo ( see page 400) see page 401) Description Strores information about Limit indication. gSummary: eneral info's about record-list These information will be updated each time if the record-number has changed. (add, delete, load)
398
2.35 AbTrend Namespace TVAtCursor ( TAbTrend ( see page 403) see page 407)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Property to show the Value, Time ( see page 405) and Record number at cursor position. Read only! 8 Channel Trend display (recorder).
Structs, Records, Enums Name TTrendOption ( SignRec ( Types Name TTrendOptions ( ChArray ( PSignRec ( see page 431) see page 431) see page 431) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Array for signal-digit 1..8 Pointer to the signal-record structure see page 429) see page 430) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Structure of an Signal-record
2.35.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TTrendLimit ( TRecInfo ( see page 400) see page 401) Description Strores information about Limit indication. gSummary: eneral info's about record-list These information will be updated each time if the record-number has changed. (add, delete, load) Property to show the Value, Time ( see page 405) and Record number at cursor position. Read only!
TVAtCursor (
see page 403)
399
2.35 AbTrend Namespace TAbTrend ( see page 407)
Abakus VCL 8 Channel Trend display (recorder).
Classes
2.35.1.1 TTrendLimit Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TTrendLimit = class(TPersistent); C++ class TTrendLimit : public TPersistent; File AbTrend ( Description Strores information about Limit indication. Members private Name Color ( Filled ( Value ( private Name Color ( Filled ( Value ( see page 401) see page 401) see page 401) see page 401) Enabled ( Description Color which is used to show the limitation. If enables the limitation is shown. Filled limitation. The limit value. see page 401) see page 401) see page 401) see page 401) Enabled ( Description Color which is used to show the limitation. If enables the limitation is shown. Filled limitation. The limit value. see page 473)
2.35.1.1.1 private
400
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.35.1.1.1.1 TTrendLimit.Color Property

Pascal property Color: TColor; C++ __property TColor Color; Description Color which is used to show the limitation.
2.35.1.1.1.2 TTrendLimit.Enabled Property

Pascal property Enabled: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Enabled; Description If enables the limitation is shown.
2.35.1.1.1.3 TTrendLimit.Filled Property

Pascal property Filled: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Filled; Description Filled limitation.
2.35.1.1.1.4 TTrendLimit.Value Property

Pascal property Value: Single; C++ __property Single Value; Description The limit value.
2.35.1.2 TRecInfo Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TRecInfo = class(TPersistent); C++ class TRecInfo : public TPersistent; File AbTrend ( see page 473) 401
2.35 AbTrend Namespace Description gSummary: eneral info's about record-list
Abakus VCL
Classes
These information will be updated each time if the record-number has changed. (add, delete, load) Members published Name FirstDisplayedRec ( FirstRecord ( LastRecord ( TotalRecords ( published Name FirstDisplayedRec ( FirstRecord ( LastRecord ( TotalRecords ( LastDisplayedRec ( see page 402) see page 402) see page 402) see page 403) see page 403) Description Number of the first displayed record DateTime of the first record Number of the last displayed record DateTime of the last record Total number of stored records LastDisplayedRec ( see page 402) see page 402) see page 402) see page 403) see page 403) Description Number of the first displayed record DateTime of the first record Number of the last displayed record DateTime of the last record Total number of stored records
2.35.1.2.1.1 TRecInfo.FirstDisplayedRec Property
Pascal property FirstDisplayedRec: Integer; C++ __property int FirstDisplayedRec; Description Number of the first displayed record
2.35.1.2.1.2 TRecInfo.FirstRecord Property

Pascal property FirstRecord: TDateTime; C++ __property TDateTime FirstRecord; Description DateTime of the first record
2.35.1.2.1.3 TRecInfo.LastDisplayedRec Property

Pascal property LastDisplayedRec: Integer; C++ __property int LastDisplayedRec;
402
2.35 AbTrend Namespace Description Number of the last displayed record
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.35.1.2.1.4 TRecInfo.LastRecord Property

Pascal property LastRecord: TDateTime; C++ __property TDateTime LastRecord; Description DateTime of the last record
2.35.1.2.1.5 TRecInfo.TotalRecords Property

Pascal property TotalRecords: Cardinal; C++ __property unsigned TotalRecords; Description Total number of stored records
2.35.1.3 TVAtCursor Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TVAtCursor = class(TPersistent); C++ class TVAtCursor : public TPersistent; File AbTrend ( Description Property to show the Value, Time ( Members private Name FValueCh ( published Name DataValid ( RecordNo ( Time ( ValueCh1 ( ValueCh2 ( see page 404) see page 405) see page 405) see page 405) Description Data's are Valid if true Number of this record. Time of this record. The Value of Channel 1 The Value of Channel 2 403 see page 404) Description Array with chanel signal values see page 405) and Record number at cursor position. Read only! see page 473)
see page 405)
2.35 AbTrend Namespace ValueCh3 ( ValueCh4 ( ValueCh5 ( ValueCh6 ( ValueCh7 ( ValueCh8 ( private Name FValueCh ( published Name DataValid ( RecordNo ( Time ( ValueCh1 ( ValueCh2 ( ValueCh3 ( ValueCh4 ( ValueCh5 ( ValueCh6 ( ValueCh7 ( ValueCh8 ( see page 404) see page 405) see page 405) see page 405) see page 405) see page 406) see page 406) see page 406) see page 406) see page 406) see page 404) see page 405) see page 406) see page 406) see page 406) see page 406) see page 406)
Abakus VCL The Value of Channel 3 The Value of Channel 4 The Value of Channel 5 The Value of Channel 6 The Value of Channel 7 The Value of Channel 8
Classes
Description Array with chanel signal values
Description Data's are Valid if true Number of this record. Time of this record. The Value of Channel 1 The Value of Channel 2 The Value of Channel 3 The Value of Channel 4 The Value of Channel 5 The Value of Channel 6 The Value of Channel 7 The Value of Channel 8
see page 405)
2.35.1.3.1 private
2.35.1.3.1.1 TVAtCursor.FValueCh Field
Pascal FValueCh: array[1..8] of Single; C++ array[1..8] of Single FValueCh; Description Array with chanel signal values
2.35.1.3.2.1 TVAtCursor.DataValid Property
Pascal property DataValid: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean DataValid; Description Data's are Valid if true
404
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.35.1.3.2.2 TVAtCursor.RecordNo Property

Pascal property RecordNo: Integer; C++ __property int RecordNo; Description Number of this record.
2.35.1.3.2.3 TVAtCursor.Time Property

Pascal property Time: TDateTime; C++ __property TDateTime Time; Description Time of this record.
2.35.1.3.2.4 TVAtCursor.ValueCh1 Property

Pascal property ValueCh1: Single; C++ __property Single ValueCh1; Description The Value of Channel 1


405
Abakus VCL
Classes





406
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.35.1.4 TAbTrend Class

8 Channel Trend display (recorder).
Hierarchy
Pascal TAbTrend = class(TAbGraphicControl); C++ class TAbTrend : public TAbGraphicControl; File AbTrend ( Description This component shows/records the progression of analog signals with respect to time y(t). Some of the hightlights: variable number of records (stored in a TList) save to file load from file vertical zoom (in & out) variable y-offsett jump to past / present cursorline to read values / time at cursor position channel fill function two relative scales (0..100%) or selectable absolute scale (e.g.: 4..20mA) displayed and flicker free..... Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). see page 473)
407
2.35 AbTrend Namespace PopupMenu ( TAbTrend Class Name AbsScaleCh ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( CaptionFont ( Channel1 ( see page 421) see page 422) see page 422) see page 422) see page 422) see page 78)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control.
Description Number of the channel (1..8) used for the absolute scale indication. (right scale) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Font for used for the caption of the component. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Color of the cursor line. The cursor line is drawn with the Pen.Mode "pmNotMask" so that the actual color depends on the "ColorCursorLine" and the background colors. Color of the trend-grid. Color of the separation line. Used to separate parts of the records if opSeparator in Options ( see page 428). Color of the trend time indication. If true the cursor-line is shown if you move with the mouse in the trend-display. Pen mode of the cursor-line. Number of the filled channel. (0..8). You can select one channel to fill from trend-bottom until value. If you select 0 then no channel is filled. This alow the curves to be displayed in a dynamic (Flow = true) or stationary state (Flow = false). In the dynamic state, the curves are updated cyclically and shifted to the left. In the stationary state, the curve is not being updated. The property Flow has no influence to the running ( see page 269) recording (recording is going on). The status of the flow property has only effects if StartRecord = true.
Channel2 (
see page 422)
Channel3 (
see page 423)
Channel4 (
see page 423)
Channel5 (
see page 423)
Channel6 (
see page 423)
Channel7 (
see page 423)
Channel8 (
see page 424)
ColorCursorLine (
see page 424)
ColorGrid (
ColorSeparator ( ColorTime ( CursorLine (
CursorLinePenMode ( FillChannelNo (
see page 425)
Flow (
see page 425)
408
2.35 AbTrend Namespace GridXPixel ( see page 425)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Number of pixel (records) between the vertical grid lines (and time indication). This number is also used if you reach the maximum records. In this case the component will erase this number of records from the begining of the record-list. Number of y-steps for the grid- and scale- indication Determines the amount of time, in milliseconds, that passes before the next record is stored. (must be >= 100) Determines the amount of time, in milliseconds, that passes before the next record is stored. Interval2 is used to change the record-interval for a given number of records. (must be >= 100) Number of the channel (1..8) used for the absolute scale indication. (left scale) Stores information about lower - Limit indication. Stores information about upper - Limit indication. Maximum number of records stored in the memory. Only active if Flow ( see page 425) is true. In case that you reach the maximum the component will erase "GridXPixel ( see page 425)" of records from the begining of the record-list. The OnInterval event occurs on interval (timer), before the trend is updated. May place routines to read/calculate the values of channel 1..8 here. The OnMaxRecords event occurs when the maximum number of records reached before a block of signals will be deleted. The OnNewCursorPos event occurs when you move the mouse to a new point within the trend. Use this event if you want to read the Value at cursor position. The OnRecNoChanged event occurs each time if the record-number has changed. (record(s) add, delete, load) gSummary: eneral info's about record-list These information will be updated each time if the record-number has changed. (add, delete, load) This property is used to start or stop recording. Time format string Property to show the Value, Time ( see page 405) and Record number at cursor position. Read only!
GridYSteps ( Interval ( Interval2 (
see page 426)
LeftScaleCh ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MaxRecords (
OnInterval (
see page 427)
OnMaxRecords (
see page 427)
OnNewCursorPos (
see page 427)
OnRecNoChanged ( Options (
see page 428)
RecordInfo (
StartRecording ( TimeFormat ( ValueAtCursor ( private TAbTrend Class Name AddDigit ( AddValue (
see page 428)
Description see page 412) see page 413) see page 414) see page 414) see page 414) see page 415) see page 415) see page 416) see page 416) see page 413) Procedure to add a set of digit to the RecordList. Procedure to add an separator at a selectable position. Procedure to add a set of values to the RecordList. This method will erase all records. deletes number of records from the begin of the list Converts a digit signal to a value. Draws the cursor line Method to search for min-/maximum. Procedure to add an record to the RecordList. This function will Load a record-list from file. All new item will be added to the existing trend-list. This function will Load a record-list from file.
AddSeparator ( ClearRecords ( DeleteRecords ( DigitToValue ( FindMinMax ( GetData ( LoadFromFile (
DrawCursorLine (
see page 415)
LoadFromFileEx (
409
2.35 AbTrend Namespace MoveX ( MoveY ( see page 416) see page 417) see page 417)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Procedure to move back-/forward in the list of records. Use this procedure to move indicated courves up-/down. Procedure to paint the selected records. This procedure paints "RecordFrom" - "RecordTo" from the RecordList. Procedure to read a record in digit from the RecordList. Procedure to read the DateTime of a record from the RecordList. Reads record "RecNo" from the RecordList and returns Procedure to read a records "Value" from the RecordList. This function will change the recording speed to Interval2 ( see page 426) for 'NoOfRecords' times. Saves the a part of the actual record-list to a file. Saves the actual record-list to a file. Sets the cursor line to position x + y Used to zoom to default range. Converts Value to Digital signal. Used to zoom (in/out) the signals. Used to zoom 'in' the signals. Used to zoom 'out' the signals.
PaintRecords (
ReadDigit (
ReadRecTime (
ReadValue ( RunInterval2 (
SavePartToFile ( SaveToFile ( SetYDefault ( ValueToDigit ( ZoomY ( ZoomYIn ( ZoomYOut ( private TAbTrend Class Name AddDigit ( AddValue ( SetCursorLine (
Description see page 412) see page 413) see page 414) see page 414) see page 414) see page 415) see page 415) see page 416) see page 416) see page 413) Procedure to add a set of digit to the RecordList. Procedure to add an separator at a selectable position. Procedure to add a set of values to the RecordList. This method will erase all records. deletes number of records from the begin of the list Converts a digit signal to a value. Draws the cursor line Method to search for min-/maximum. Procedure to add an record to the RecordList. This function will Load a record-list from file. All new item will be added to the existing trend-list. This function will Load a record-list from file. Procedure to move back-/forward in the list of records. Use this procedure to move indicated courves up-/down. Procedure to paint the selected records. This procedure paints "RecordFrom" - "RecordTo" from the RecordList. Procedure to read a record in digit from the RecordList. Procedure to read the DateTime of a record from the RecordList. Reads record "RecNo" from the RecordList and returns Procedure to read a records "Value" from the RecordList. This function will change the recording speed to Interval2 ( see page 426) for 'NoOfRecords' times. Saves the a part of the actual record-list to a file. Saves the actual record-list to a file. Sets the cursor line to position x + y
AddSeparator ( ClearRecords ( DeleteRecords ( DigitToValue ( FindMinMax ( GetData ( LoadFromFile (
DrawCursorLine (
see page 415)
LoadFromFileEx ( MoveX ( MoveY (
PaintRecords (
ReadDigit (
ReadRecTime (
ReadValue ( RunInterval2 (
SavePartToFile ( SaveToFile ( SetCursorLine (
see page 420)
410
2.35 AbTrend Namespace SetYDefault ( ValueToDigit ( ZoomY ( ZoomYIn ( ZoomYOut ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbTrend Class Name AbsScaleCh ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( CaptionFont ( Channel1 ( see page 421) see page 422) see page 422) see page 422) see page 422) see page 420) see page 420)
Abakus VCL Used to zoom to default range. Converts Value to Digital signal. Used to zoom (in/out) the signals. Used to zoom 'in' the signals. Used to zoom 'out' the signals.
Classes
see page 78)
Description Number of the channel (1..8) used for the absolute scale indication. (right scale) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Font for used for the caption of the component. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value. Color of the cursor line. The cursor line is drawn with the Pen.Mode "pmNotMask" so that the actual color depends on the "ColorCursorLine" and the background colors. Color of the trend-grid. Color of the separation line. Used to separate parts of the records if opSeparator in Options ( see page 428). Color of the trend time indication. If true the cursor-line is shown if you move with the mouse in the trend-display. Pen mode of the cursor-line.
Channel2 (
see page 422)
Channel3 (
see page 423)
Channel4 (
see page 423)
Channel5 (
see page 423)
Channel6 (
see page 423)
Channel7 (
see page 423)
Channel8 (
see page 424)
ColorCursorLine (
see page 424)
ColorGrid (
ColorSeparator ( ColorTime ( CursorLine (
CursorLinePenMode (
411
2.35 AbTrend Namespace FillChannelNo ( see page 425)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Number of the filled channel. (0..8). You can select one channel to fill from trend-bottom until value. If you select 0 then no channel is filled. This alow the curves to be displayed in a dynamic (Flow = true) or stationary state (Flow = false). In the dynamic state, the curves are updated cyclically and shifted to the left. In the stationary state, the curve is not being updated. The property Flow has no influence to the running ( see page 269) recording (recording is going on). The status of the flow property has only effects if StartRecord = true. Number of pixel (records) between the vertical grid lines (and time indication). This number is also used if you reach the maximum records. In this case the component will erase this number of records from the begining of the record-list. Number of y-steps for the grid- and scale- indication Determines the amount of time, in milliseconds, that passes before the next record is stored. (must be >= 100) Determines the amount of time, in milliseconds, that passes before the next record is stored. Interval2 is used to change the record-interval for a given number of records. (must be >= 100) Number of the channel (1..8) used for the absolute scale indication. (left scale) Stores information about lower - Limit indication. Stores information about upper - Limit indication. Maximum number of records stored in the memory. Only active if Flow ( see page 425) is true. In case that you reach the maximum the component will erase "GridXPixel ( see page 425)" of records from the begining of the record-list. The OnInterval event occurs on interval (timer), before the trend is updated. May place routines to read/calculate the values of channel 1..8 here. The OnMaxRecords event occurs when the maximum number of records reached before a block of signals will be deleted. The OnNewCursorPos event occurs when you move the mouse to a new point within the trend. Use this event if you want to read the Value at cursor position. The OnRecNoChanged event occurs each time if the record-number has changed. (record(s) add, delete, load) gSummary: eneral info's about record-list These information will be updated each time if the record-number has changed. (add, delete, load) This property is used to start or stop recording. Time format string Property to show the Value, Time ( see page 405) and Record number at cursor position. Read only!
Flow (
see page 425)
GridXPixel (
see page 425)
GridYSteps ( Interval ( Interval2 (
see page 426)
LeftScaleCh ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MaxRecords (
OnInterval (
see page 427)
OnMaxRecords (
see page 427)
OnNewCursorPos (
see page 427)
OnRecNoChanged ( Options (
see page 428)
RecordInfo (
StartRecording ( TimeFormat ( ValueAtCursor (
see page 428)
2.35.1.4.1 private
2.35.1.4.1.1 TAbTrend.AddDigit Method
Procedure to add a set of digit to the RecordList.
412
2.35 AbTrend Namespace Pascal
Abakus VCL
Classes
function AddDigit(d1: integer; d2: integer; d3: integer; d4: integer; d5: integer; d6: integer; d7: integer; d8: integer): Boolean; C++ __fastcall Boolean AddDigit(int d1, int d2, int d3, int d4, int d5, int d6, int d7, int d8); Parameters Parameters d1: integer d2: integer d3: integer d4: integer d5: integer d6: integer d7: integer d8: integer Returns Returns true if ok. Description Add's a new record with the digital signal for channel1..8 (d1..d8) to the RecordList. For the channel digits integer variables are used but the valid range is limited to min max SignalSettings.DigitalFrom SignalSettings.DigitalFrom + 65535 Description digit value for channel 1 digit value for channel 2 digit value for channel 3 digit value for channel 4 digit value for channel 5 digit value for channel 6 digit value for channel 7 digit value for channel 8
This function will not force an update of the trend display (also no OnRecNoChanged ( see page 428) event occurs). So you can add a set of records without updating the display. To update call PaintRecords ( see page 417).
2.35.1.4.1.2 TAbTrend.AddSeparator Method

Procedure to add an separator at a selectable position. Pascal procedure AddSeparator(Pos: Integer); C++ __fastcall AddSeparator(int Pos); Parameters Parameters Pos: Integer Description Add's a line (width := 3pixel) to separate records. (opSeparator in Options ( see page 428) must be selected) Description position (record number) after the line will be added
2.35.1.4.1.3 TAbTrend.AddValue Method

Procedure to add a set of values to the RecordList. Pascal function AddValue(v1: Single; v2: Single; v3: Single; v4: Single; v5: Single; v6: Single; v7: Single; v8: Single): Boolean;
413
2.35 AbTrend Namespace C++
Abakus VCL
Classes
__fastcall Boolean AddValue(Single v1, Single v2, Single v3, Single v4, Single v5, Single v6, Single v7, Single v8); Parameters Parameters v1: Single v2: Single v3: Single v4: Single v5: Single v6: Single v7: Single v8: Single Returns Returns true if ok. Description Add's a new record with the values for channel1..8 (v1..v8) to the RecordList. For the channel value variables the valid range is limited to min max SignalSettings.ValueFrom SignalSettings.ValueTo Description value for channel 1 value for channel 2 value for channel 3 value for channel 4 value for channel 5 value for channel 6 value for channel 7 value for channel 8
This function will not force an update of the trend display (also no OnRecNoChanged ( see page 428) event occurs). So you can add a set of records without updating the display. To update call PaintRecords ( see page 417).
2.35.1.4.1.4 TAbTrend.ClearRecords Method

This method will erase all records. Pascal procedure ClearRecords; C++ __fastcall ClearRecords();
2.35.1.4.1.5 TAbTrend.DeleteRecords Method

deletes number of records from the begin of the list Pascal procedure DeleteRecords(no: Integer); C++ __fastcall DeleteRecords(int no); Parameters Parameters no: Integer Description number of records to delete
2.35.1.4.1.6 TAbTrend.DigitToValue Method

Pascal function DigitToValue(Ch: Integer; Digit: Word): Single; 414
2.35 AbTrend Namespace C++
Abakus VCL
Classes
__fastcall Single DigitToValue(int Ch, Word Digit); Parameters Parameters Ch: Integer Digit: Word Returns the converted signal as single Value Description Converts a digit signal to a value. Description the channel number the digital value
2.35.1.4.1.7 TAbTrend.DrawCursorLine Method

Draws the cursor line Pascal procedure DrawCursorLine(Full: Boolean); C++ __fastcall DrawCursorLine(Boolean Full);
2.35.1.4.1.8 TAbTrend.FindMinMax Method

Method to search for min-/maximum. Pascal function FindMinMax(FromRec: Integer; ToRec: Integer): Boolean; C++ __fastcall Boolean FindMinMax(int FromRec, int ToRec); Parameters Parameters FromRec: Integer RoRec Returns The function returns 'false' if RecFrom or RecTo is out of range. Description This function will find the min-/maximum value. The result is stored in an Array ( MinMax[1..8] of TMinMax ( ). see page 112) Description Search start at this record Search stops at this record
2.35.1.4.1.9 TAbTrend.GetData Method

Procedure to add an record to the RecordList. Pascal procedure GetData; C++ __fastcall GetData(); Description This procedure will add the Values (Ch1..8) to the RecordList and updates the display.
415
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.35.1.4.1.10 TAbTrend.LoadFromFile Method

This function will Load a record-list from file. All new item will be added to the existing trend-list. Pascal function LoadFromFile(FileName: string): Integer; C++ __fastcall int LoadFromFile(AnsiString FileName); Parameters Parameters FileName: string Returns The return Var is the IOResult-errorcode (see Delphi/C++Builder Help), returns '0' if there was no error. Description This will load the file 'FileName' and add's the records to the end of the existing record-list. If you call this function while recording then the recording will stop. Use 'ClearRecords ( see page 414)' before loading if you want to load this file to an empty list. File format: The format of the file to store a trend is "File of SignRecord". Description File name for the record-file
2.35.1.4.1.11 TAbTrend.LoadFromFileEx Method

This function will Load a record-list from file. Pascal function LoadFromFileEx(FileName: string; ClearList: Boolean): Integer; C++ __fastcall int LoadFromFileEx(AnsiString FileName, Boolean ClearList); Parameters Parameters FileName: string ClearList: Boolean Returns The return Var is the IOResult-errorcode (see Delphi/C++Builder Help), returns '0' if there was no error. Description If ClearList = false All new items will be added to the existing trend-list. If ClearList = true Clears a existing trend-list Add all loaded items File format: The format of the file to store a trend is "File of SignRecord". Description File name for the record-file clears a existing trend-list
2.35.1.4.1.12 TAbTrend.MoveX Method

Procedure to move back-/forward in the list of records. Pascal procedure MoveX(NoOffRecords: Integer); 416
2.35 AbTrend Namespace C++ __fastcall MoveX(int NoOffRecords); Parameters Parameters NoOffRecords: Integer Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Number of records to jump
Set NoOfRecords to <0 to jump to the past, >0 to jump to the present.
2.35.1.4.1.13 TAbTrend.MoveY Method

Use this procedure to move indicated courves up-/down. Pascal procedure MoveY(Percent: Integer); C++ __fastcall MoveY(int Percent); Description e.g.: If your vertical scale shows a range from 0..10V and you call MoveY(10) the range will change to 1..11V (10% up), if you call MoveY(-10) the range will be -1..9V. Percent - Percentage to move
2.35.1.4.1.14 TAbTrend.PaintRecords Method

Procedure to paint the selected records. This procedure paints "RecordFrom" - "RecordTo" from the RecordList. Pascal procedure PaintRecords(RecordFrom: Integer; RecordTo: Integer); C++ __fastcall PaintRecords(int RecordFrom, int RecordTo); Parameters Parameters RecordFrom: Integer RecordTo: Integer Description first record to paint Last record to paint
2.35.1.4.1.15 TAbTrend.ReadDigit Method

Procedure to read a record in digit from the RecordList. Pascal function ReadDigit(RecNo: Integer; var t: TDateTime; var d1: Integer; var d2: Integer; var d3: Integer; var d4: Integer; var d5: Integer; var d6: Integer; var d7: Integer; var d8: Integer): Boolean; C++ __fastcall Boolean ReadDigit(int RecNo, TDateTime t, int d1, int d2, int d3, int d4, int d5, int d6, int d7, int d8); Parameters Parameters RecNo: Integer var t: TDateTime var d1: Integer Description number of the Record to read DateTime of this record Channel 1 signal digit value 417
2.35 AbTrend Namespace var d2: Integer var d3: Integer var d4: Integer var d5: Integer var d6: Integer var d7: Integer var d8: Integer Returns The function-result is true if reading is valid. Description
Abakus VCL Channel 2 signal digit value Channel 3 signal digit value Channel 4 signal digit value Channel 5 signal digit value Channel 6 signal digit value Channel 7 signal digit value Channel 8 signal digit value
Classes
Reads record "RecNo" from the RecordList and returns For the channel digits integer variables are used but the valid range is limited to min max SignalSettings.DigitalFrom SignalSettings.DigitalFrom + 65535
2.35.1.4.1.16 TAbTrend.ReadRecTime Method

Procedure to read the DateTime of a record from the RecordList. Reads record "RecNo" from the RecordList and returns Pascal function ReadRecTime(RecNo: Integer; var t: TDateTime): Boolean; C++ __fastcall Boolean ReadRecTime(int RecNo, TDateTime t); Parameters Parameters RecNo: Integer var t: TDateTime Returns The function-result is true if reading is valid. Description number of the Record to read DateTime of this record
2.35.1.4.1.17 TAbTrend.ReadValue Method

Procedure to read a records "Value" from the RecordList. Pascal function ReadValue(RecNo: Integer; var t: TDateTime; var v1: Single; var v2: Single; var v3: Single; var v4: Single; var v5: Single; var v6: Single; var v7: Single; var v8: Single): Boolean; C++ __fastcall Boolean ReadValue(int RecNo, TDateTime t, Single v1, Single v2, Single v3, Single v4, Single v5, Single v6, Single v7, Single v8); Parameters Parameters RecNo: Integer var t: TDateTime var v1: Single Description number of the Record to read DateTime of this record Channel 1 signal value 418
2.35 AbTrend Namespace var v2: Single var v3: Single var v4: Single var v5: Single var v6: Single var v7: Single var v8: Single Returns The function-result is true if reading is valid. Description
Abakus VCL Channel 2 signal value Channel 3 signal value Channel 4 signal value Channel 5 signal value Channel 6 signal value Channel 7 signal value Channel 8 signal value
Classes
Reads record "RecNo" from the RecordList and returns
2.35.1.4.1.18 TAbTrend.RunInterval2 Method

This function will change the recording speed to Interval2 ( Pascal procedure RunInterval2(NoOffRecords: Integer); C++ __fastcall RunInterval2(int NoOffRecords); Parameters Parameters NoOffRecords: Integer Description Changes the recording Speed for a number of records. Description Number of records to run with interval2 see page 426) for 'NoOfRecords' times.
2.35.1.4.1.19 TAbTrend.SavePartToFile Method

Saves the a part of the actual record-list to a file. Pascal function SavePartToFile(FileName: string; FromRecord: Integer; ToRecord: Integer): Integer; C++ __fastcall int SavePartToFile(AnsiString FileName, int FromRecord, int ToRecord); Parameters Parameters FileName: string FromRecord: Integer ToRecord: Integer Returns The return Var is the IOResult-errorcode (see Delphi/C++Builder Help), returns '0' if there was no error. Description Saves the records 'FromRecord' until 'ToRecords' to file 'FileName'. If the file allredy exists these records will be added to the end of the file. File format: The format of the file to store a trend is "File of SignRecord". Description the filename for the record First record to save last record to save
419
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.35.1.4.1.20 TAbTrend.SaveToFile Method

Saves the actual record-list to a file. Pascal function SaveToFile(FileName: string): Integer; C++ __fastcall int SaveToFile(AnsiString FileName); Parameters Parameters FileName: string Returns The return Var is the IOResult-errorcode (see Delphi/C++Builder Help), returns '0' if there was no error. Notes If an existing file contains 2000 records and you save a list with 1000 records only the first 1000 records will be overwriten. File format: The format of the file to store a trend is "File of SignRecord". Description the filename for the record
2.35.1.4.1.21 TAbTrend.SetCursorLine Method

Sets the cursor line to position x + y Pascal procedure SetCursorLine(x: Integer; y: Integer); C++ __fastcall SetCursorLine(int x, int y);
2.35.1.4.1.22 TAbTrend.SetYDefault Method

Used to zoom to default range. Pascal procedure SetYDefault; C++ __fastcall SetYDefault();
2.35.1.4.1.23 TAbTrend.ValueToDigit Method

Converts Value to Digital signal. Pascal function ValueToDigit(Ch: Integer; Value: Single): Word; C++ __fastcall Word ValueToDigit(int Ch, Single Value); Parameters Parameters Ch: Integer Value: Single Returns The signal digit value Description Channel number of the signal to convert The signal value to convert
420
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.35.1.4.1.24 TAbTrend.ZoomY Method

Used to zoom (in/out) the signals. Pascal procedure ZoomY(Value: Single); C++ __fastcall ZoomY(Single Value); Parameters Parameters Value: Single Description vertical zoom in/out, Value 1..10 Value 0.1..1 Value 1 ZoomOut ZoomIn default Description Zoom value
2.35.1.4.1.25 TAbTrend.ZoomYIn Method

Used to zoom 'in' the signals. Pascal procedure ZoomYIn; C++ __fastcall ZoomYIn();
2.35.1.4.1.26 TAbTrend.ZoomYOut Method

Used to zoom 'out' the signals. Pascal procedure ZoomYOut; C++ __fastcall ZoomYOut();
2.35.1.4.2.1 TAbTrend.AbsScaleCh Property
Pascal property AbsScaleCh: Integer; C++ __property int AbsScaleCh; Description Number of the channel (1..8) used for the absolute scale indication. (right scale)
421
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.35.1.4.2.2 TAbTrend.BevelInner Property

2.35.1.4.2.3 TAbTrend.BevelOuter Property

2.35.1.4.2.4 TAbTrend.CaptionFont Property

Pascal property CaptionFont: TFont; C++ __property TFont CaptionFont; Description Font for used for the caption of the component.
2.35.1.4.2.5 TAbTrend.Channel1 Property

Pascal property Channel1: TChSettings; C++ __property TChSettings Channel1; Description Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's used to set the value.

422
Abakus VCL
Classes





Pascal property Channel7: TChSettings; C++ __property TChSettings Channel7; Description Determines all information about the signal. Via this property you can set the general informations about this signal and it's 423
2.35 AbTrend Namespace used to set the value.
Abakus VCL
Classes

2.35.1.4.2.13 TAbTrend.ColorCursorLine Property

Pascal property ColorCursorLine: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorCursorLine; Description Color of the cursor line. The cursor line is drawn with the Pen.Mode "pmNotMask" so that the actual color depends on the "ColorCursorLine" and the background colors.
2.35.1.4.2.14 TAbTrend.ColorGrid Property

Pascal property ColorGrid: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorGrid; Description Color of the trend-grid.
2.35.1.4.2.15 TAbTrend.ColorSeparator Property

Pascal property ColorSeparator: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorSeparator; Description Color of the separation line. Used to separate parts of the records if opSeparator in Options ( see page 428).
2.35.1.4.2.16 TAbTrend.ColorTime Property

Pascal property ColorTime: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorTime; Description Color of the trend time indication. 424
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.35.1.4.2.17 TAbTrend.CursorLine Property

Pascal property CursorLine: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean CursorLine; Description If true the cursor-line is shown if you move with the mouse in the trend-display.
2.35.1.4.2.18 TAbTrend.CursorLinePenMode Property

Pascal property CursorLinePenMode: TPenMode; C++ __property TPenMode CursorLinePenMode; Description Pen mode of the cursor-line.
2.35.1.4.2.19 TAbTrend.FillChannelNo Property

Pascal property FillChannelNo: Integer; C++ __property int FillChannelNo; Description Number of the filled channel. (0..8). You can select one channel to fill from trend-bottom until value. If you select 0 then no channel is filled.
2.35.1.4.2.20 TAbTrend.Flow Property

Pascal property Flow: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean Flow; Description This alow the curves to be displayed in a dynamic (Flow = true) or stationary state (Flow = false). In the dynamic state, the curves are updated cyclically and shifted to the left. In the stationary state, the curve is not being updated. The property Flow has no influence to the running ( see page 269) recording (recording is going on).
The status of the flow property has only effects if StartRecord = true.
2.35.1.4.2.21 TAbTrend.GridXPixel Property

Pascal property GridXPixel: Integer; C++ __property int GridXPixel;
425
2.35 AbTrend Namespace Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
Number of pixel (records) between the vertical grid lines (and time indication). This number is also used if you reach the maximum records. In this case the component will erase this number of records from the begining of the record-list.
2.35.1.4.2.22 TAbTrend.GridYSteps Property

Pascal property GridYSteps: Integer; C++ __property int GridYSteps; Description Number of y-steps for the grid- and scale- indication
2.35.1.4.2.23 TAbTrend.Interval Property

Pascal property Interval: Cardinal; C++ __property unsigned Interval; Description Determines the amount of time, in milliseconds, that passes before the next record is stored. (must be >= 100)
2.35.1.4.2.24 TAbTrend.Interval2 Property

Pascal property Interval2: Cardinal; C++ __property unsigned Interval2; Description Determines the amount of time, in milliseconds, that passes before the next record is stored. Interval2 is used to change the record-interval for a given number of records. (must be >= 100)
2.35.1.4.2.25 TAbTrend.LeftScaleCh Property

Pascal property LeftScaleCh: Integer; C++ __property int LeftScaleCh; Description Number of the channel (1..8) used for the absolute scale indication. (left scale)
2.35.1.4.2.26 TAbTrend.LimitLower Property

Pascal property LimitLower: TTrendLimit; C++ __property TTrendLimit LimitLower;
426
2.35 AbTrend Namespace Description Stores information about lower - Limit indication.
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.35.1.4.2.27 TAbTrend.LimitUpper Property

Pascal property LimitUpper: TTrendLimit; C++ __property TTrendLimit LimitUpper; Description Stores information about upper - Limit indication.
2.35.1.4.2.28 TAbTrend.MaxRecords Property

Pascal property MaxRecords: Integer; C++ __property int MaxRecords; Description Maximum number of records stored in the memory. Only active if Flow ( see page 425) is true. In case that you reach the maximum the component will erase "GridXPixel ( see page 425)" of records from the begining of the record-list.
2.35.1.4.2.29 TAbTrend.OnInterval Property

Pascal property OnInterval: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnInterval; Description The OnInterval event occurs on interval (timer), before the trend is updated. May place routines to read/calculate the values of channel 1..8 here.
2.35.1.4.2.30 TAbTrend.OnMaxRecords Property

Pascal property OnMaxRecords: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnMaxRecords; Description The OnMaxRecords event occurs when the maximum number of records reached before a block of signals will be deleted.
2.35.1.4.2.31 TAbTrend.OnNewCursorPos Property

Pascal property OnNewCursorPos: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnNewCursorPos;
427
2.35 AbTrend Namespace Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
The OnNewCursorPos event occurs when you move the mouse to a new point within the trend. Use this event if you want to read the Value at cursor position.
2.35.1.4.2.32 TAbTrend.OnRecNoChanged Property

Pascal property OnRecNoChanged: TNotifyEvent; C++ __property TNotifyEvent OnRecNoChanged; Description The OnRecNoChanged event occurs each time if the record-number has changed. (record(s) add, delete, load)
2.35.1.4.2.33 TAbTrend.Options Property

Pascal property Options: TTrendOptions; C++ __property TTrendOptions Options;
2.35.1.4.2.34 TAbTrend.RecordInfo Property

Pascal property RecordInfo: TRecInfo; C++ __property TRecInfo RecordInfo; Description gSummary: eneral info's about record-list These information will be updated each time if the record-number has changed. (add, delete, load)
2.35.1.4.2.35 TAbTrend.StartRecording Property

Pascal property StartRecording: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean StartRecording; Description This property is used to start or stop recording.
2.35.1.4.2.36 TAbTrend.TimeFormat Property

Pascal property TimeFormat: String; C++ __property AnsiString TimeFormat; Description Time format string
428
Abakus VCL
2.35.1.4.2.37 TAbTrend.ValueAtCursor Property

Pascal property ValueAtCursor: TVAtCursor; C++ __property TVAtCursor ValueAtCursor; Description Property to show the Value, Time ( see page 405) and Record number at cursor position. Read only!

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TTrendOption ( Records Name SignRec ( see page 430) Description Structure of an Signal-record see page 429) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.35.2.1 AbTrend.TTrendOption Enumeration

Pascal TTrendOption = ( opCaption, opGrid, opCursorOnRec, opSeparator, opDate, opTime, opCh7isUL, opCh8isLL, opLeftScale, opRightScale, opShowLast ); C++ enum TTrendOption { opCaption, opGrid, opCursorOnRec, opSeparator, opDate, opTime, opCh7isUL, opCh8isLL, opLeftScale, opRightScale, opShowLast }; File AbTrend ( see page 473)
429
2.35 AbTrend Namespace Members Members opCaption opGrid opCursorOnRec opSeparator opDate opTime opCh7isUL opCh8isLL opLeftScale opRightScale opShowLast Description
Abakus VCL
Types
Description Trend caption Trend grid enables to show the cursor-line while recording and flow is on Separator-line can be added (proc AddSeparator) the date (and time) is shown on the time-scale show time use channel 7 as upper limit use channel 8 as lower limit show left scale show right scale after loading from file show last record
2.35.2.2 AbTrend.SignRec Record

Pascal SignRec = record Time: TDateTime; Ch: ChArray; end; C++ struct SignRec { TDateTime Time; ChArray Ch; }; File AbTrend ( Members Members Time: TDateTime; Ch: ChArray; Description Structure of an Signal-record Description TimeDate of this rec FChannel[1..8] Digit see page 473)
2.35.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TTrendOptions ( ChArray ( PSignRec ( see page 431) see page 431) see page 431) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Array for signal-digit 1..8 Pointer to the signal-record structure 430
2.36 AbVBar Namespace
Abakus VCL
2.35.3.1 AbTrend.TTrendOptions Type

Pascal TTrendOptions = set of TTrendOption; C++ TTrendOption TTrendOptions; File AbTrend ( Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 473)
2.35.3.2 AbTrend.ChArray Type

Pascal ChArray = array[1..8] of Word; C++ array[1..8] of Word ChArray; File AbTrend ( Description Array for signal-digit 1..8 see page 473)
2.35.3.3 AbTrend.PSignRec Type

Pascal PSignRec = ^SignRec; C++ ^SignRec PSignRec; File AbTrend ( Description Pointer to the signal-record structure see page 473)

Vertical bar indicator component
431
2.36 AbVBar Namespace Classes Name TAbVBar ( see page 432)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Vertical bar indicator component
Structs, Records, Enums Name TVBarOption ( Types Name TVBarOptions ( see page 438) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 437) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.36.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbVBar ( see page 432) Description Vertical bar indicator component
2.36.1.1 TAbVBar Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbVBar = class(TAbAnalogGControl);
432
2.36 AbVBar Namespace C++
Abakus VCL
Classes
class TAbVBar : public TAbAnalogGControl; File AbVBar ( Description Vertical bar indicator component see page 473)
see page 78)
see page 123)
433
2.36 AbVBar Namespace OnOverflow ( see page 123) see page 124) see page 124)
see page 124)
see page 125)
see page 437)
BarSettings ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options ( published Name AbInfo (
see page 437)
2.36 AbVBar Namespace OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( see page 78)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 124)
see page 125)
2.36.1.1.1 private
2.36.1.1.1.1 TAbVBar.AutoSize Property
Pascal property AutoSize: Boolean; C++ __property Boolean AutoSize;
435
2.36 AbVBar Namespace Description
Abakus VCL
Classes
If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..)
2.36.1.1.1.2 TAbVBar.BarSettings Property

Pascal property BarSettings: TBarSettings; C++ __property TBarSettings BarSettings; Description The Bar Settings
2.36.1.1.1.3 TAbVBar.BevelInner Property

2.36.1.1.1.4 TAbVBar.BevelOuter Property

2.36.1.1.1.5 TAbVBar.BevelValue Property

Pascal property BevelValue: TAbSBevel; C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelValue; Description Determines the style of the value indication bevel.
2.36.1.1.1.6 TAbVBar.FontValue Property

436
Abakus VCL
Types
2.36.1.1.1.7 TAbVBar.Options Property

Pascal property Options: TVBarOptions; C++ __property TVBarOptions Options;

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TVBarOption ( see page 437) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.36.2.1 AbVBar.TVBarOption Enumeration

Pascal TVBarOption = ( opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opValue, opName1, opName2, opOverflow, opUnit ); C++ enum TVBarOption { opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opValue, opName1, opName2, opOverflow, opUnit }; File AbVBar ( Members Members opBevelInner opBevelOuter opValue opName1 opName2 opOverflow opUnit Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Description Inner Bevel Outer Bevel Value indication SignalName1 SignalName2 Overflow indication signal unit indication see page 473)
437
2.37 AbVCInd Namespace
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.36.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TVBarOptions ( see page 438) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.36.3.1 AbVBar.TVBarOptions Type

Pascal TVBarOptions = set of TVBarOption; C++ TVBarOption TVBarOptions; File AbVBar ( Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 473)

Namespace with the component TAbVCInd ( Classes Name TAbVCInd ( see page 439) Description "Special" indicator which combines "Course-, Pitch- and Roll indication". see page 439).
438
Abakus VCL
Classes
2.37.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbVCInd ( see page 439) Description "Special" indicator which combines "Course-, Pitch- and Roll indication".
2.37.1.1 TAbVCInd Class

"Special" indicator which combines "Course-, Pitch- and Roll indication".
Hierarchy
439
2.38 AbVInd Namespace Pascal TAbVCInd = class(TAbGraphicControl); C++
Abakus VCL
class TAbVCInd : public TAbGraphicControl; File AbVCInd ( Description Used e.g.: for remote controlled vehicles Highlights: rotating Course scale rotating Roll scale artificial horizon (variable scale) Course : 0..360 CourseShould : 0..360 deviation : +/- 180 Pitch : +/- 180 Roll : +/- 180 Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. see page 473)
see page 78)
see page 78)
2.38 AbVInd Namespace

Digital Value indicator Classes Name TAbValueInd ( see page 441) Description Digital Value indicator
440
2.38 AbVInd Namespace Structs, Records, Enums Name TValueIndOption ( Types Name TValueIndOptions ( see page 446) see page 445)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Contains a set of options that determine how the component is drawn.
Description Contains a set of options that determine how the component is drawn.
2.38.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbValueInd ( see page 441) Description Digital Value indicator
2.38.1.1 TAbValueInd Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbValueInd = class(TAbAnalogGControl); C++ class TAbValueInd : public TAbAnalogGControl; File AbVInd ( Description Digital Value indicator see page 474)
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) Description Contact and copyright notes. 441
2.38 AbVInd Namespace OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( see page 78)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 78)
see page 124)
see page 125)
OnPosChanged ( TAbValueInd Class Name AutoSize (
Description see page 444) If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..)
442
2.38 AbVInd Namespace BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options ( private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( TAbValueInd Class Name AutoSize ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options ( published Name AbInfo ( see page 77) see page 78) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( TAbAnalogGControl Class Name Digit ( see page 120) see page 121) see page 121) see page 121) HintOptions ( LimitLower ( LimitUpper ( MinMax ( OnClick ( see page 444) see page 444) see page 444) see page 444) see page 445) see page 444) see page 444) see page 444) see page 445)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication
see page 445)
Description If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value indication bevel. Font, used for the signal value indication
see page 445)
see page 78)
OnMinMaxChange ( OnMouseDown ( OnMouseMove (
Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control.
443
2.38 AbVInd Namespace OnMouseUp ( OnOverflow ( see page 123) see page 123) see page 124) see page 124)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Event occurs if the Value ( adjusted range Event occurs if the Value ( sector see page 125) exceeds the see page 125) exit or enter a
see page 124)
see page 125)
2.38.1.1.1 private
2.38.1.1.1.1 TAbValueInd.AutoSize Property
2.38.1.1.1.2 TAbValueInd.BevelInner Property

2.38.1.1.1.3 TAbValueInd.BevelOuter Property

2.38.1.1.1.4 TAbValueInd.BevelValue Property

Pascal property BevelValue: TAbSBevel; 444
2.38 AbVInd Namespace C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelValue; Description Determines the style of the value indication bevel.
Abakus VCL
2.38.1.1.1.5 TAbValueInd.FontValue Property

2.38.1.1.1.6 TAbValueInd.Options Property

Pascal property Options: TValueIndOptions; C++ __property TValueIndOptions Options;

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TValueIndOption ( see page 445) Description Contains a set of options that determine how the component is drawn.
2.38.2.1 AbVInd.TValueIndOption Enumeration

Pascal TValueIndOption = ( opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opName1, opName2, opUnit ); C++ enum TValueIndOption { opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opName1, opName2, opUnit }; File AbVInd ( see page 474)
445
2.39 AbVMeter Namespace Members Members opBevelInner opBevelOuter opName1 opName2 opUnit Description
Abakus VCL
Description show inner bevel show outer bevel show signal name 1 show signal name 2 show signal unit
Contains a set of options that determine how the component is drawn.
2.38.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TValueIndOptions ( see page 446) Description Contains a set of options that determine how the component is drawn.
2.38.3.1 AbVInd.TValueIndOptions Type

Pascal TValueIndOptions = set of TValueIndOption; C++ TValueIndOption TValueIndOptions; File AbVInd ( Description Contains a set of options that determine how the component is drawn. see page 474)
2.39 AbVMeter Namespace

Vertical Value indicator component
446
2.39 AbVMeter Namespace Classes Name TAbVMeter ( see page 447)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Vertical Value indicator component
Structs, Records, Enums Name TAbVMeterOption ( Types Name TAbVMeterOptions ( see page 454) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 453) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.39.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbVMeter ( see page 447) Description Vertical Value indicator component
2.39.1.1 TAbVMeter Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbVMeter = class(TAbAnalogGControl); 447
2.39 AbVMeter Namespace C++
Abakus VCL
Classes
class TAbVMeter : public TAbAnalogGControl; File AbVMeter ( Description Vertical Value indicator component see page 474)
see page 78)
Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. 448
see page 123)
2.39 AbVMeter Namespace OnOverflow ( see page 123) see page 124) see page 124)
see page 124)
see page 125)
OnPosChanged ( TAbVMeter Class Name AutoSize ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options (
Description see page 451) see page 451) see page 451) see page 452) see page 452) see page 452) If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value bevel. Font of the value indicator Class with settings for a scale
see page 452)
ScaleSettings (
private TAbAnalogGControl Class Name LogScale ( see page 120) see page 120) OnPosChanged ( Description Property to select Log10 scale or Linar scale Occurs if component position has changed
449
2.39 AbVMeter Namespace TAbVMeter Class Name AutoSize ( BevelInner ( BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( FontValue ( Options ( see page 451) see page 451) see page 451) see page 452) see page 452) see page 452)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description If true then the component size is calculated (according font, scaleSettings,..) Determines the style of the inner bevel of a component. Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Determines the style of the value bevel. Font of the value indicator Class with settings for a scale
see page 452)
ScaleSettings (
see page 78)
see page 123)
450
2.39 AbVMeter Namespace OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnOverflow ( see page 123)
Abakus VCL
Classes
see page 124)
see page 125)
2.39.1.1.1 private
2.39.1.1.1.1 TAbVMeter.AutoSize Property
2.39.1.1.1.2 TAbVMeter.BevelInner Property

2.39.1.1.1.3 TAbVMeter.BevelOuter Property

451
Abakus VCL
2.39.1.1.1.4 TAbVMeter.BevelValue Property

Pascal property BevelValue: TAbSBevel; C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelValue; Description Determines the style of the value bevel.
2.39.1.1.1.5 TAbVMeter.FontValue Property

Pascal property FontValue: TFont; C++ __property TFont FontValue; Description Font of the value indicator
2.39.1.1.1.6 TAbVMeter.Options Property

Pascal property Options: TAbVMeterOptions; C++ __property TAbVMeterOptions Options;
2.39.1.1.1.7 TAbVMeter.ScaleSettings Property

452
Abakus VCL
Types

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TAbVMeterOption ( see page 453) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.39.2.1 AbVMeter.TAbVMeterOption Enumeration

Pascal TAbVMeterOption = ( opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opValue, opName1, opName2, opOverflow, opLimit, opSector, opUnit ); C++ enum TAbVMeterOption { opBevelInner, opBevelOuter, opValue, opName1, opName2, opOverflow, opLimit, opSector, opUnit }; File AbVMeter ( Members Members opBevelInner opBevelOuter opValue opName1 opName2 opOverflow opLimit opSector opUnit Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Description InnerBevel OuterBevel signal unit indication SignalName1 SignalName2 Overflow indication Limit indication Sectors Signal unit indication see page 474)
453
2.40 AbVSlide Namespace
Abakus VCL
2.39.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TAbVMeterOptions ( see page 454) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.39.3.1 AbVMeter.TAbVMeterOptions Type

Pascal TAbVMeterOptions = set of TAbVMeterOption; C++ TAbVMeterOption TAbVMeterOptions; File AbVMeter ( Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 474)

Vertical Slider (Value adjuster) Classes Name TAbVSlider ( see page 455) Description Vertical Slider (Value adjuster)
Structs, Records, Enums Name TVSliderOption ( see page 461) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
454
2.40 AbVSlide Namespace Types Name TVSliderOptions ( see page 462)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.40.1 Classes
The following table lists classes in this documentation. Classes Name TAbVSlider ( see page 455) Description Vertical Slider (Value adjuster)
2.40.1.1 TAbVSlider Class

Hierarchy
Pascal TAbVSlider = class(TAbAnalogCControl); C++ class TAbVSlider : public TAbAnalogCControl; File AbVSlide ( Description Vertical Slider (Value adjuster) see page 474)
455
Abakus VCL
Classes
Members published Name AbInfo ( see page 79) see page 79) OnContextPopup ( PopupMenu ( ShowHint ( TAbAnalogCControl Class Name ChangeLarge ( ChangeSmall ( ColorFocus ( CursorSlide ( Digit ( Enabled ( see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) see page 128) Description Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) Inc/dec Value ( see page 129) see page 133) for large changes in Digit ( see page 133) for small changes in Digit ( Description Contact and copyright notes. Occurs when the right-clicks the control or otherwise invokes the popup menu (such as using the keyboard). Identifies the pop-up menu associated with the control. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control.
see page 79)
see page 79)
Color if the component has the focus Color if the component has no focus Cursor if mouse is over the slider Contains the analog Value ( see page 133) in digits Controls whether the control responds to mouse, keyboard, and timer events. Set of enabled keys to change the value Enables/disables the keyboard input Occurs when the user clicks the control. Occurs when the user double-clicks the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the control. Occurs when the user drops an object being dragged. Occurs when the user drags an object over a control. Occurs when the dragging of an object ends, either by docking the object or by canceling the dragging. Occurs when a control receives the input focus. Occurs when the input focus shifts away from one control to another. Occurs when a user presses any key while the control has focus. Occurs when the user releases a key that has been pressed. Occurs when the user presses a mouse button with the mouse pointer over a control. Occurs when the user moves the mouse pointer while the mouse pointer is over a control. 456
ColorNonFocus (
OnMouseDown ( OnMouseMove (
2.40 AbVSlide Namespace OnMouseUp ( OnStartDrag ( see page 132) see page 132)
Abakus VCL
Classes
Occurs when the user releases a mouse button that was pressed with the mouse pointer over a component. Occurs when the user begins to drag the control or an object it contains by left-clicking on the control and holding the mouse button down. OnValueChange Event occurs while value changes OnValueChanged Event occurs after value has changed Determines where a control looks for its font information. Determines whether the control displays a Help Hint when the mouse pointer rests momentarily on the control. Contains settings for the analog signal Indicates the position of the control in its parent's tab order. Determines if the user can tab to a control. Contains the analog Value Settings for the Value ( see page 133) indication Visibility of the component.
SignalSettings ( TabOrder ( TabStop ( Value ( Visible ( private TAbVSlider Class Name BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( ButtonSize ( ColorTrench ( FontValue ( Options (
ValueIndicator (
Description see page 459) see page 459) see page 459) see page 460) see page 460) see page 460) Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Bevel of the value indicator Size of the slider button Trench color Font, used for the signal value indication Class with settings for a scale
see page 460)
ScaleSettings (
private TAbVSlider Class Name BevelOuter ( BevelValue ( ButtonSize ( ColorTrench ( FontValue ( Options ( see page 459) see page 459) see page 459) see page 460) see page 460) Description Determines the style of the outer bevel of a component. Bevel of the value indicator Size of the slider button Trench color Font, used for the signal value indication
see page 460)
457
2.40 AbVSlide Namespace ScaleSettings ( see page 460)
Classes
see page 79)
see page 79)
ColorNonFocus (
OnMouseDown (
458
2.40 AbVSlide Namespace OnMouseMove ( OnMouseUp ( OnStartDrag ( see page 131)
Abakus VCL
Classes
ValueIndicator (
2.40.1.1.1 private
2.40.1.1.1.1 TAbVSlider.BevelOuter Property
2.40.1.1.1.2 TAbVSlider.BevelValue Property

Pascal property BevelValue: TAbSBevel; C++ __property TAbSBevel BevelValue; Description Bevel of the value indicator
2.40.1.1.1.3 TAbVSlider.ButtonSize Property

Pascal property ButtonSize: Integer; C++ __property int ButtonSize; Description Size of the slider button
459
Abakus VCL
2.40.1.1.1.4 TAbVSlider.ColorTrench Property

Pascal property ColorTrench: TColor; C++ __property TColor ColorTrench; Description Trench color
2.40.1.1.1.5 TAbVSlider.FontValue Property

2.40.1.1.1.6 TAbVSlider.Options Property

Pascal property Options: TVSliderOptions; C++ __property TVSliderOptions Options;
2.40.1.1.1.7 TAbVSlider.ScaleSettings Property

460
Abakus VCL
Types

The following table lists structs, records, enums in this documentation. Enumerations Name TVSliderOption ( see page 461) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn
2.40.2.1 AbVSlide.TVSliderOption Enumeration

Pascal TVSliderOption = ( opBevelOuter, opUnit, opValue, opName1, opName2, opScaleText ); C++ enum TVSliderOption { opBevelOuter, opUnit, opValue, opName1, opName2, opScaleText }; File AbVSlide ( Members Members opBevelOuter opUnit opValue opName1 opName2 opScaleText Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn Description OuterBevel Value unit indication Value indication SignalName1 SignalName2 Scale text see page 474)
2.40.3 Types
The following table lists types in this documentation. Types Name TVSliderOptions ( see page 462) Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn 461
Abakus VCL
Types
2.40.3.1 AbVSlide.TVSliderOptions Type

Pascal TVSliderOptions = set of TVSliderOption; C++ TVSliderOption TVSliderOptions; File AbVSlide ( Description Set of options that determine how the component is drawn see page 474)
462
Abakus VCL
3 Files
The following table lists files in this documentation. Units Name _AbDB.pas ( see page 464) see page 464) see page 465) Description Contains TAbFieldDataLink wich is used for the Data-Link of our DB-Aware components. Unit with our common threaded timer. Unit AbInfo contains info's about version and copyright. File AbInfo contains info's about version and copyright. Namespace with information about version and copyright. Unit AbInfo contains info's about version and copyright. Unit with some general used methods. Arrow shapes for round meters This file contains Abakus VCL general used Methods/classes. Horizontal / vertical bar Value indicator Simple beveled control with two bevels (outer and inner). Contains AbColBitBtn, a two state button/switch/indicator. Unit contains the TAbClock component. Contains a A clock indicator graphic control Unit contains the TAbCompass component. Contains a Compass component. Unit with Abakus VCL DB-Aware version of our components. Unit wit the DB-Aware versions of our components. Unit contains the TAbDial component. Unit contains a Dial (knob, Value adjuster) Unit contains the TAbFlashTimer component. Unit for our common flash timer component. Unit contains the FlexMeter components. Unit with Value indicators with flex-scale (no fixed range) Unit contains the TAbGearDial component. Contains a Dial control with multiple turns. Unit contains the TAbGradient component. Unit with a gradient graphic control Unit contains the TAbHBar component. Unit with a Horizontal bar indicator component Unit contains the TAbHMeter component. Unit with a Horizontal Meter indicator component Unit contains the TAbHSlider component. Contains a Horizontal Slider (Value adjuster) Unit contains the AbInfo dialog. Form / Property editor to show information's about registration Unit contains the TAbIndRectDlg property editor. Form-/ Property editor for to adjust the indication rectangle e.g. for the operating point display. Unit contains the Abakus VCL DB-Aware components registration routine.
_AbFlash.pas ( _AbInfo.pas (
_AbProc.pas ( _Arrow.pas ( _GClass.pas ( AbBar.pas ( AbBevel.pas ( AbCBitBt.pas ( AbClock.pas (
AbCompas.pas ( AbDBCtrls.pas ( AbDial.pas (
AbFlashT.pas (
AbFlexMeter.pas ( AbGearDial.pas ( AbGradient.pas ( AbHBar.pas ( AbHMeter.pas ( AbHSlide.pas ( AbInfDlg.pas (
AbIRDlg.pas (
see page 469)
AbkDBStd.pas (
see page 469)
463
3.3 _AbInfo.pas AbkLib.pas ( abks.inc ( see page 469)
Abakus VCL Registration file contains for the Abakus VCL component editors. Abakus VCL include file with general definitions to support all the different Delphi/C++ Builder compiler by a single source. Unit contains the Abakus VCL components registration routine. Unit with a Flicker free label control This file contains Abakus VCL TAbLED component. This file contains Abakus VCL TAbMiniTrend component. This file contains Abakus VCL TAbNumEdit and TAbNumSpin controls. This file contains Abakus VCL TAbOpHour component. This file contains Abakus VCL TAbOperatingPoint component. This file contains Abakus VCL TAbPanel component. This file contains Abakus VCL TAbPrintTrend component. This file contains Abakus VCL round meter components. This file contains Abakus VCL switch components. Unit AbTank ( see page 380) contains classes/methods/fields for a Tank-level indicator This file contains Abakus VCL Thermometer component. This file contains Abakus VCL Trend indicator component. This file contains Abakus VCL TAbVBar component. Unit contains the TAbVCInd component. Unit contains the TAbValueInd component. Unit contains the TAbVMeter component. Unit contains the TAbVSlider component.
see page 470) see page 470) see page 470) see page 470) see page 470) see page 471) see page 471) see page 471) see page 471) see page 472) see page 472) see page 472) see page 473) see page 473) see page 473) see page 473) see page 473) see page 474) see page 474) see page 474)
AbkStd.pas ( AbLabel.pas ( AbLED.pas (
AbMTrend.pas ( AbNumEdit.pas ( AbOpHour.pas ( AbOpPnt.pas ( AbPanel.pas ( AbPrtTrd.pas ( AbRMeter.pas ( AbSwitch.pas ( AbTank.pas ( AbThMet.pas ( AbTrend.pas ( AbVBar.pas ( AbVCInd.pas ( AbVInd.pas ( AbVSlide.pas ( AbVMeter.pas (
3.1 _AbDB.pas
Contains TAbFieldDataLink wich is used for the Data-Link of our DB-Aware components. Namespaces Name _AbDB ( see page 3) Description Contains TAbFieldDataLink ( see page 3) which is used for the Data-Link of our DB-Aware components.
3.2 _AbFlash.pas
Unit with our common threaded timer. Namespaces Name _AbFlash ( see page 5) Description Unit with our common threaded timer.
464
3.7 AbBar.pas
Abakus VCL
3.3 _AbInfo.pas
Unit AbInfo contains info's about version and copyright. File AbInfo contains info's about version and copyright. Namespace with information about version and copyright. Unit AbInfo contains info's about version and copyright. Namespaces Name _AbInfo ( see page 8) Description Unit AbInfo ( see page 12) contains info's about version and copyright.
3.4 _AbProc.pas
Unit with some general used methods. Namespaces Name _AbProc ( see page 12) Description Unit with some general used methods.
3.5 _Arrow.pas
Arrow shapes for round meters Namespaces Name _Arrow ( see page 53) Description Arrow shapes for round meters
3.6 _GClass.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL general used Methods/classes. Namespaces Name _GClass ( see page 54) Description This file contains Abakus VCL general used Methods/classes.
3.7 AbBar.pas
Horizontal / vertical bar Value indicator 465
3.12 AbDBCtrls.pas Namespaces Name AbBar ( see page 149)
Abakus VCL
Description Unit with a Horizontal / vertical bar Component
3.8 AbBevel.pas
Simple beveled control with two bevels (outer and inner). Namespaces Name AbBevel ( see page 154) Description Simple beveled control with two bevels (outer and inner).
3.9 AbCBitBt.pas
Contains AbColBitBtn, a two state button/switch/indicator. Namespaces Name AbCBitBt ( see page 158) Description Contains AbColBitBtn, a two state button/switch/indicator.
3.10 AbClock.pas
Unit contains the TAbClock component. Contains a A clock indicator graphic control Namespaces Name AbClock ( see page 171) Description A clock indicator graphic control
3.11 AbCompas.pas
Unit contains the TAbCompass component. Contains a Compass component. Namespaces Name AbCompas ( see page 174) Description A Compass component.
466
3.16 AbGearDial.pas
Abakus VCL
3.12 AbDBCtrls.pas
Unit with Abakus VCL DB-Aware version of our components. Unit wit the DB-Aware versions of our components. Namespaces Name AbDBCtrls ( see page 179) Description Unit wit the DB-Aware versions of our components.
3.13 AbDial.pas
Unit contains the TAbDial component. Unit contains a Dial (knob, Value adjuster) Namespaces Name AbDial ( see page 254) Description Dial (knob, Value adjuster) Component to adjust analog values.
3.14 AbFlashT.pas
Unit contains the TAbFlashTimer component. Unit for our common flash timer component. Namespaces Name AbFlashT ( see page 258) Description Unit for our common flash timer component.
3.15 AbFlexMeter.pas
Unit contains the FlexMeter components. Unit with Value indicators with flex-scale (no fixed range) Namespaces Name AbFlexMeter ( see page 272) Description Value indicator with flex-scale (no fixed range)
467
3.20 AbHSlide.pas
Abakus VCL
3.16 AbGearDial.pas
Unit contains the TAbGearDial component. Contains a Dial control with multiple turns. Namespaces Name AbGearDial ( see page 275) Description Dial control with multiple turns.
3.17 AbGradient.pas
Unit contains the TAbGradient component. Unit with a gradient graphic control Namespaces Name AbGradient ( see page 280) Description Unit with a gradient graphic control
3.18 AbHBar.pas
Unit contains the TAbHBar component. Unit with a Horizontal bar indicator component Namespaces Name AbHBar ( see page 282) Description Horizontal bar indicator component
3.19 AbHMeter.pas
Unit contains the TAbHMeter component. Unit with a Horizontal Meter indicator component Namespaces Name AbHMeter ( see page 288) Description Horizontal Meter indicator component
468
3.25 abks.inc
Abakus VCL
3.20 AbHSlide.pas
Unit contains the TAbHSlider component. Contains a Horizontal Slider (Value adjuster) Namespaces Name AbHSlide ( see page 296) Description Horizontal Slider (Value adjuster)
3.21 AbInfDlg.pas
Unit contains the AbInfo dialog. Form / Property editor to show information's about registration Namespaces Name AbInfDlg ( see page 302) Description Form / Property editor to show information's about registration, Abakus VCL version and how to contact us.
3.22 AbIRDlg.pas
Unit contains the TAbIndRectDlg property editor. Form-/ Property editor for to adjust the indication rectangle e.g. for the operating point display. Namespaces Name AbIRDlg ( see page 304) Description Form-/ Property editor for to adjust the indication rectangle e.g. for the operating point display.
3.23 AbkDBStd.pas
Unit contains the Abakus VCL DB-Aware components registration routine.
3.24 AbkLib.pas
Registration file contains for the Abakus VCL component editors. 469
3.30 AbNumEdit.pas
Abakus VCL
3.25 abks.inc
Abakus VCL include file with general definitions to support all the different Delphi/C++ Builder compiler by a single source.
3.26 AbkStd.pas
Unit contains the Abakus VCL components registration routine.
3.27 AbLabel.pas
Unit with a Flicker free label control Namespaces Name AbLabel ( see page 304) Description Flicker free label which can show different text (DigitText) according an integer input Value (Digit).
3.28 AbLED.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL TAbLED component. Namespaces Name AbLED ( see page 311) Description LED indicator/button.
3.29 AbMTrend.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL TAbMiniTrend component. Namespaces Name AbMTrend ( see page 312) Description 2 Channel Trend display.
470
3.34 AbPrtTrd.pas
Abakus VCL
3.30 AbNumEdit.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL TAbNumEdit and TAbNumSpin controls. Namespaces Name AbNumEdit ( see page 316) Description Unit with Edit field to enter numeric values. Edit field with spin buttons to enter / adjust values.
3.31 AbOpHour.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL TAbOpHour component. Namespaces Name AbOpHour ( see page 330) Description TAbOpHourCounter ( operation time. see page 332) is used to count the
3.32 AbOpPnt.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL TAbOperatingPoint component. Namespaces Name AbOpPnt ( see page 341) Description Unit with cntrol TAbOperatingPoint ( see page 341), used to visualize the characteristic of aggregates y(x)
3.33 AbPanel.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL TAbPanel component. Namespaces Name AbPanel ( see page 342) Description Panel component.
471
3.36 AbSwitch.pas
Abakus VCL
3.34 AbPrtTrd.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL TAbPrintTrend component. Namespaces Name AbPrtTrd ( see page 345) Description Contains a Component to print a Trend or draw a trend to a TBitmap
3.35 AbRMeter.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL round meter components. Namespaces Name AbRMeter ( see page 359) Description Unit with components TAb120Meter ( see page 369), TAb180Meter ( see page 367), TAb270Meter ( see page 364)
3.36 AbSwitch.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL switch components.
472
3.41 AbVCInd.pas Namespaces Name AbSwitch ( see page 374)
Abakus VCL
Description Namespace for our switch components
3.37 AbTank.pas
Unit AbTank ( Namespaces Name AbTank ( see page 380) Description Tank level indicator. see page 380) contains classes/methods/fields for a Tank-level indicator
3.38 AbThMet.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL Thermometer component. Namespaces Name AbThMet ( see page 390) Description Vertical bar indicator with scale and digital Value-indication.
3.39 AbTrend.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL Trend indicator component. Namespaces Name AbTrend ( see page 398) Description 8 Channel Trend display (recorder).
3.40 AbVBar.pas
This file contains Abakus VCL TAbVBar component. Namespaces Name AbVBar ( see page 431) Description Vertical bar indicator component
3.41 AbVCInd.pas
Unit contains the TAbVCInd component. 473
3.44 AbVSlide.pas Namespaces Name AbVCInd ( see page 438)
Abakus VCL
Description Namespace with the component TAbVCInd ( 439). see page
3.42 AbVInd.pas
Unit contains the TAbValueInd component. Namespaces Name AbVInd ( see page 440) Description Digital Value indicator
3.43 AbVMeter.pas
Unit contains the TAbVMeter component. Namespaces Name AbVMeter ( see page 446) Description Vertical Value indicator component
3.44 AbVSlide.pas
Unit contains the TAbVSlider component. Namespaces Name AbVSlide ( see page 454) Description Vertical Slider (Value adjuster)
474
Abakus VCL _AbProc.AbGetRadius function 36 _AbProc.AbGetTextSize function 28 _AbProc.AbGradFill function 43
Index _
_AbDB namespace 3 _AbDB.pas 464 _AbDB.TDType enumeration 5 _AbFlash namespace 5 _AbFlash.pas 464 _AbInfo namespace 8 _AbInfo.AbInfo variable 12 _AbInfo.LoadAbakusInfo function 10 _AbInfo.pas 465 _AbInfo.Reg constant 12 _AbInfo.tn function 11 _AbProc namespace 12 _AbProc.Ab3DEllipse function 39 _AbProc.AbakusKeyPath constant 52 _AbProc.AbakusRootKey constant 52 _AbProc.AbArrowDraw function 20 _AbProc.AbArrowSettings function 35 _AbProc.AbBinToInt function 18 _AbProc.AbBinToLWord function 17 _AbProc.AbBinToSingle function 18 _AbProc.AbBorder function 34 _AbProc.AbBtnBevel function 42 _AbProc.AbCalcColor function 44 _AbProc.AbCalcLogStr function 23 _AbProc.AbCBIsRunning function 38 _AbProc.AbCenterPoint function 35 _AbProc.AbCharCount function 27 _AbProc.AbCircleAtPoint function 39 _AbProc.AbCircleGradFill function 42 _AbProc.AbDelphiIsRunning function 38 _AbProc.AbDrawHPointer function 21 _AbProc.AbDrawLED function 44 _AbProc.AbEllipse3D function 38 _AbProc.AbExecuteFile function 37 _AbProc.AbGetAngle function 40 _AbProc.AbGetMaxRect function 36 _AbProc.AbGetMaxTokenSize function 29 _AbProc.AbGetMaxTokenSize2 function 29
_AbProc.AbHorizScala function 20 _AbProc.AbInCircle function 41 _AbProc.AbInRect function 32 _AbProc.AbIntToBin function 16 _AbProc.AbkRoot variable 50 _AbProc.AbLoadFormPos function 19 _AbProc.AbLog10 function 22 _AbProc.AbLogRangeStr function 23 _AbProc.AbMakeCenterSquare function 41 _AbProc.AbMakeSquare function 41 _AbProc.AbMaxInt function 31 _AbProc.AbMinInt function 30 _AbProc.AbMinMaxInt function 31 _AbProc.AbMultiBorder function 34 _AbProc.AbPower function 22 _AbProc.AbRangeStr function 28 _AbProc.AbRectInRect function 33 _AbProc.AbRectIntersection function 32 _AbProc.AbRectIsRect function 33 _AbProc.AbRemoveSign function 24 _AbProc.AbRotate function 36 _AbProc.AbRotTextOut function 26 _AbProc.AbRoundLogValue function 24 _AbProc.AbRoundSector function 19 _AbProc.AbSaveFormPos function 19 _AbProc.AbSetBrightness function 43 _AbProc.AbSingleToBin function 17 _AbProc.AbStrToken function 30 _AbProc.AbTextOut function 25 _AbProc.AbTextOut3D function 27 _AbProc.AbTextOutMultiLine function 25 _AbProc.AbTextOutMultiLine3D function 26 _AbProc.AbThumb function 40 _AbProc.AppPath variable 49 _AbProc.CalcTotalDigit function 21 _AbProc.Company constant 51 _AbProc.Copyright constant 51 _AbProc.crHand constant 53 _AbProc.GetBkUpImage function 30
4 _AbProc.GetComponentRoot function 45 _AbProc.Mail constant 52 _AbProc.pas 465 _AbProc.pName constant 51 _AbProc.pVersion constant 51 _AbProc.TGradientStyle enumeration 46 _AbProc.TLEDPos enumeration 48 _AbProc.TLEDShape enumeration 48 _AbProc.toPos enumeration 46 _AbProc.VCLRoot variable 50 _AbProc.WWW constant 52 _Arrow namespace 53 _Arrow.AbArrowField function 53 _Arrow.pas 465 _GClass namespace 54 _GClass.GroupUpdate variable 149 _GClass.pas 465 _GClass.TAngleMode enumeration 139 _GClass.TBarDirection enumeration 141 _GClass.TBarOption enumeration 142 _GClass.TBarOptions type 148 _GClass.TBarStyle enumeration 141 _GClass.TBevelLine enumeration 144 _GClass.TDialPointer enumeration 145 _GClass.TEnabledKey enumeration 140 _GClass.TEnabledKeys type 147 _GClass.THandleIniEvent type 148 _GClass.THintOption enumeration 139 _GClass.THintOptions type 147 _GClass.TLimitEvent type 146 _GClass.TMode enumeration 144 _GClass.TNumGlyphs type 148 _GClass.TOverflowEvent type 146 _GClass.TPos enumeration 142 _GClass.TPosH enumeration 143 _GClass.TPosV enumeration 143 _GClass.TSectorChangeEvent type 147
Abakus VCL AbBevel.pas 466 AbBevel.TAbBevelOption enumeration 157 AbBevel.TAbBevelOptions type 158 AbCBitBt namespace 158 AbCBitBt.pas 466 AbCBitBt.TCheckedOption enumeration 169 AbCBitBt.TCheckedOptions type 170 AbCBitBt.TFlashOption enumeration 169 AbCBitBt.TFlashOptions type 170 AbClock namespace 171 AbClock.pas 466 AbClock.TClockOption enumeration 173 AbCompas namespace 174 AbCompas.pas 466 AbCompas.TCompassOption enumeration 178 AbCompas.TCompassOptions type 179 AbDBCtrls namespace 179 AbDBCtrls.pas 467 AbDial namespace 254 AbDial.pas 467 AbDial.TDialOption enumeration 257 AbDial.TDialOptions type 258 AbFlashT namespace 258 AbFlashT.AbFlashTimer variable 268 AbFlashT.AddControl function 264 AbFlashT.AddProc function 263 AbFlashT.AFlashRecord variable 268 AbFlashT.ClearFlashList function 265 AbFlashT.DelControl function 264 AbFlashT.DelControlNo function 264 AbFlashT.DelProc function 263 AbFlashT.DelProcNo function 263 AbFlashT.dynFlashList variable 268 AbFlashT.Freq05Hz constant 271 AbFlashT.Freq1Hz constant 271 AbFlashT.Freq2Hz constant 271 AbFlashT.Freq4Hz constant 271 AbFlashT.Freq8Hz constant 270
A
AbBar namespace 149 AbBar.pas 465 AbBevel namespace 154
AbFlashT.NextSecPuls variable 269 AbFlashT.OneSec variable 269 AbFlashT.pas 467 AbFlashT.PFlashRecord type 267
4 AbFlashT.running variable 269 AbFlashT.SyncOneSec constant 272 AbFlashT.TAbFlashProc type 267 AbFlashT.TFlash record 265 AbFlashT.TFlashFreq enumeration 266 AbFlashT.tim variable 269 AbFlashT.WM_FLASH constant 270 AbFlexMeter namespace 272 AbFlexMeter.pas 467 AbGearDial namespace 275 AbGearDial.pas 468 AbGradient namespace 280 AbGradient.pas 468 AbHBar namespace 282 AbHBar.pas 468 AbHBar.THBarOption enumeration 287 AbHBar.THBarOptions type 288 AbHMeter namespace 288 AbHMeter.pas 468 AbHMeter.THMeterOption enumeration 294 AbHMeter.THMeterOptions type 295 AbHSlide namespace 296 AbHSlide.pas 469 AbHSlide.THSliderOption enumeration 301 AbHSlide.THSliderOptions type 302 AbInfDlg namespace 302 AbInfDlg.pas 469 AbIRDlg namespace 304 AbIRDlg.pas 469 AbkDBStd.pas 469 AbkLib.pas 469 abks.inc 470 AbkStd.pas 470 AbLabel namespace 304 AbLabel.pas 470 AbLED namespace 311 AbLED.pas 470 AbMTrend namespace 312 AbMTrend.pas 470 AbMTrend.TMiniTrendOption enumeration 314 AbMTrend.TMiniTrendOptions type 315 AbNumEdit namespace 316
Abakus VCL AbNumEdit.pas 471 AbNumEdit.TBaseProperties record 328 AbNumEdit.TEditBase enumeration 327 AbNumEdit.TNumEditOption enumeration 328 AbNumEdit.TNumEditOptions type 330 AbNumEdit.TNumEditState enumeration 329 AbOpHour namespace 330 AbOpHour.pas 471 AbOpHour.TOpHrIndicate enumeration 340 AbOpHour.TOpHrOption enumeration 339 AbOpHour.TOpHrOptions type 340 AbOpPnt namespace 341 AbOpPnt.pas 471 AbPanel namespace 342 AbPanel.pas 471 AbPanel.TAbPanelOption enumeration 344 AbPanel.TAbPanelOptions type 345 AbPrtTrd namespace 345 AbPrtTrd.pas 472 AbPrtTrd.TFormat enumeration 356 AbPrtTrd.TLegendOpt enumeration 357 AbPrtTrd.TLegendOptions type 359 AbPrtTrd.TLegendPos enumeration 357 AbPrtTrd.TPrtTrdOption enumeration 358 AbPrtTrd.TPrtTrdOptions type 359 AbRMeter namespace 359 AbRMeter.pas 472 AbRMeter.TMeterType enumeration 373 AbRMeter.TRMeterOption enumeration 372 AbRMeter.TRMeterOptions type 374 AbSwitch namespace 374 AbSwitch.pas 472 AbSwitch.TBtnOrientation enumeration 380 AbTank namespace 380 AbTank.pas 473 AbTank.TTankOption enumeration 389 AbTank.TTankOptions type 390 AbTank.TTankStyle enumeration 389 AbThMet namespace 390 AbThMet.pas 473 AbThMet.TThMetOption enumeration 397 AbThMet.TThMetOptions type 398
4 AbTrend namespace 398 AbTrend.ChArray type 431 AbTrend.pas 473 AbTrend.PSignRec type 431 AbTrend.SignRec record 430 AbTrend.TTrendOption enumeration 429 AbTrend.TTrendOptions type 431 AbVBar namespace 431 AbVBar.pas 473 AbVBar.TVBarOption enumeration 437 AbVBar.TVBarOptions type 438 AbVCInd namespace 438 AbVCInd.pas 473 AbVInd namespace 440 AbVInd.pas 474 AbVInd.TValueIndOption enumeration 445 AbVInd.TValueIndOptions type 446 AbVMeter namespace 446 AbVMeter.pas 474 AbVMeter.TAbVMeterOption enumeration 453 AbVMeter.TAbVMeterOptions type 454 AbVSlide namespace 454 AbVSlide.pas 474 AbVSlide.TVSliderOption enumeration 461 AbVSlide.TVSliderOptions type 462
Abakus VCL EnableKeyboard 129 OnClick 129 OnDblClick 130 OnDragDrop 130 OnDragOver 130 OnEndDrag 130 OnEnter 130 OnExit 131 OnKeyDown 131 OnKeyUp 131 OnMouseDown 131 OnMouseMove 131 OnMouseUp 132 OnStartDrag 132 OnValueChange 132 OnValueChanged 132 ParentFont 132 ShowHint 133 SignalSettings 133 TabOrder 133 TabStop 133 Value 133 ValueIndicator 134 Visible 134 TAbAnalogCControl.ChangeLarge property 128 TAbAnalogCControl.ChangeSmall property 128
F
Files 463
TAbAnalogCControl.ColorFocus property 128 TAbAnalogCControl.ColorNonFocus property 128 TAbAnalogCControl.CursorSlide property 128
T
TAb120Meter class 369 TAb180Meter class 367 TAb270Meter class 364 TAbAnalogCControl class 125 ChangeLarge 128 ChangeSmall 128 ColorFocus 128 ColorNonFocus 128 CursorSlide 128 Digit 129 Enabled 129 EnabledKeys 129
TAbAnalogCControl.Digit property 129 TAbAnalogCControl.Enabled property 129 TAbAnalogCControl.EnabledKeys property 129 TAbAnalogCControl.EnableKeyboard property 129 TAbAnalogCControl.OnClick property 129 TAbAnalogCControl.OnDblClick property 130 TAbAnalogCControl.OnDragDrop property 130 TAbAnalogCControl.OnDragOver property 130 TAbAnalogCControl.OnEndDrag property 130 TAbAnalogCControl.OnEnter property 130 TAbAnalogCControl.OnExit property 131 TAbAnalogCControl.OnKeyDown property 131 TAbAnalogCControl.OnKeyUp property 131
4 TAbAnalogCControl.OnMouseDown property 131 TAbAnalogCControl.OnMouseMove property 131 TAbAnalogCControl.OnMouseUp property 132 TAbAnalogCControl.OnStartDrag property 132 TAbAnalogCControl.OnValueChange property 132 TAbAnalogCControl.OnValueChanged property 132 TAbAnalogCControl.ParentFont property 132 TAbAnalogCControl.ShowHint property 133 TAbAnalogCControl.SignalSettings property 133 TAbAnalogCControl.TabOrder property 133 TAbAnalogCControl.TabStop property 133 TAbAnalogCControl.Value property 133 TAbAnalogCControl.ValueIndicator property 134 TAbAnalogCControl.Visible property 134 TAbAnalogGControl class 118 Digit 120 HintOptions 121 LimitLower 121 LimitUpper 121 LogScale 120 MinMax 121 OnClick 121 OnDblClick 122 OnDragDrop 122 OnDragOver 122 OnEndDrag 122 OnLimit 122 OnMinMaxChange 123 OnMouseDown 123 OnMouseMove 123 OnMouseUp 123 OnOverflow 123 OnPosChanged 120 OnSectorChange 124 OnSettingsChange 124 OnStartDrag 124 OnValueChange 124 SectorSettings 124 ShowHint 125 SignalSettings 125 Value 125 TAbAnalogGControl.Digit property 120
Abakus VCL TAbAnalogGControl.HintOptions property 121 TAbAnalogGControl.LimitLower property 121 TAbAnalogGControl.LimitUpper property 121 TAbAnalogGControl.LogScale property 120 TAbAnalogGControl.MinMax property 121 TAbAnalogGControl.OnClick property 121 TAbAnalogGControl.OnDblClick property 122 TAbAnalogGControl.OnDragDrop property 122 TAbAnalogGControl.OnDragOver property 122 TAbAnalogGControl.OnEndDrag property 122 TAbAnalogGControl.OnLimit event 122 TAbAnalogGControl.OnMinMaxChange property 123 TAbAnalogGControl.OnMouseDown property 123 TAbAnalogGControl.OnMouseMove property 123 TAbAnalogGControl.OnMouseUp property 123 TAbAnalogGControl.OnOverflow event 123 TAbAnalogGControl.OnPosChanged property 120 TAbAnalogGControl.OnSectorChange event 124 TAbAnalogGControl.OnSettingsChange property 124 TAbAnalogGControl.OnStartDrag property 124 TAbAnalogGControl.OnValueChange property 124 TAbAnalogGControl.SectorSettings property 124 TAbAnalogGControl.ShowHint property 125 TAbAnalogGControl.SignalSettings property 125 TAbAnalogGControl.Value property 125 TAbBar class 150 BarSettings 153 BevelOuter 153 TAbBar.BarSettings property 153 TAbBar.BevelOuter property 153 TAbBevel class 156 TAbBevelSettings class 60 ColorFrom 61 ColorTo 61 Width 62 TAbBevelSettings.ColorFrom property 61 TAbBevelSettings.ColorTo property 61 TAbBevelSettings.Width property 62 TAbBinGControl class 134 AbInfo 135 PopupMenu 135 ShowHint 135
4 Visible 135 TAbBinGControl.AbInfo property 135 TAbBinGControl.PopupMenu property 135 TAbBinGControl.ShowHint property 135 TAbBinGControl.Visible property 135 TAbBtnBevel class 95 HighlightColFrom 96 HighlightColTo 97 ShadowColFrom 97 ShadowColTo 97 Width 97 TAbBtnBevel.HighlightColFrom property 96 TAbBtnBevel.HighlightColTo property 97 TAbBtnBevel.ShadowColFrom property 97 TAbBtnBevel.ShadowColTo property 97 TAbBtnBevel.Width property 97 TAbClock class 171 AutoHint 172 BevelInner 173 BevelOuter 173 ClockOption 173 TAbClock.AutoHint property 172 TAbClock.BevelInner property 173 TAbClock.BevelOuter property 173 TAbClock.ClockOption property 173 TAbColBitBtn class 159 Beveled 163 ButtonBevel 163 CheckedOptions 163 ColorDisabled 163 ColorOff 163 ColorOn 164 FlashOptions 164 Flat 164 Glyph 164 GradBtnFace 165 NumGlyph 165 OffsetDown 165 OffsetX 165 OffsetY 166 PosGlyph 166 PosHorizontal 166
Abakus VCL PosVertical 166 Spacing 167 Text3D 167 TextColDisabled 167 TextColOff 167 TextColOn 168 TextOff 168 TextOn 168 Transparent 168 TAbColBitBtn.Beveled property 163 TAbColBitBtn.ButtonBevel property 163 TAbColBitBtn.CheckedOptions property 163 TAbColBitBtn.ColorDisabled property 163 TAbColBitBtn.ColorOff property 163 TAbColBitBtn.ColorOn property 164 TAbColBitBtn.FlashOptions property 164 TAbColBitBtn.Flat property 164 TAbColBitBtn.Glyph property 164 TAbColBitBtn.GradBtnFace property 165 TAbColBitBtn.NumGlyph property 165 TAbColBitBtn.OffsetDown property 165 TAbColBitBtn.OffsetX property 165 TAbColBitBtn.OffsetY property 166 TAbColBitBtn.PosGlyph property 166 TAbColBitBtn.PosHorizontal property 166 TAbColBitBtn.PosVertical property 166 TAbColBitBtn.Spacing property 167 TAbColBitBtn.Text3D property 167 TAbColBitBtn.TextColDisabled property 167 TAbColBitBtn.TextColOff property 167 TAbColBitBtn.TextColOn property 168 TAbColBitBtn.TextOff property 168 TAbColBitBtn.TextOn property 168 TAbColBitBtn.Transparent property 168 TAbCompass class 175 TAbCustomBevel class 155 TAbCustomControl class 78 AbInfo 79 OnContextPopup 79 PopupMenu 79 ShowHint 79 TAbCustomControl.AbInfo property 79
4 TAbCustomControl.OnContextPopup property 79 TAbCustomControl.PopupMenu property 79 TAbCustomControl.ShowHint property 79 TAbCustomFlexMeter class 273 TAbCustomIndBevel class 156 TAbCustomScale class 63 TAbDB120Meter class 220 DataField 223 DataReadOnly 223 DataSource 223 TAbDB120Meter.DataField property 223 TAbDB120Meter.DataReadOnly property 223 TAbDB120Meter.DataSource property 223 TAbDB180Meter class 217 DataField 219 DataReadOnly 220 DataSource 220 TAbDB180Meter.DataField property 219 TAbDB180Meter.DataReadOnly property 220 TAbDB180Meter.DataSource property 220 TAbDB270Meter class 213 DataField 216 DataReadOnly 216 DataSource 216 TAbDB270Meter.DataField property 216 TAbDB270Meter.DataReadOnly property 216 TAbDB270Meter.DataSource property 216 TAbDBBar class 223 DataField 227 DataReadOnly 227 DataSource 227 TAbDBBar.DataField property 227 TAbDBBar.DataReadOnly property 227 TAbDBBar.DataSource property 227 TAbDBColBitBtn class 245 DataField 249 DataReadOnly 249 DataSource 249 TAbDBColBitBtn.DataField property 249 TAbDBColBitBtn.DataReadOnly property 249 TAbDBColBitBtn.DataSource property 249 TAbDBDial class 190
Abakus VCL DataField 193 DataReadOnly 193 DataSource 193 TAbDBDial.DataField property 193 TAbDBDial.DataReadOnly property 193 TAbDBDial.DataSource property 193 TAbDBFlexHMeter class 210 DataField 211 DataReadOnly 211 DataSource 211 TAbDBFlexHMeter.DataField property 211 TAbDBFlexHMeter.DataReadOnly property 211 TAbDBFlexHMeter.DataSource property 211 TAbDBFlexVMeter class 211 DataField 213 DataReadOnly 213 DataSource 213 TAbDBFlexVMeter.DataField property 213 TAbDBFlexVMeter.DataReadOnly property 213 TAbDBFlexVMeter.DataSource property 213 TAbDBGearDial class 193 DataField 197 DataReadOnly 197 DataSource 197 TAbDBGearDial.DataField property 197 TAbDBGearDial.DataReadOnly property 197 TAbDBGearDial.DataSource property 197 TAbDBHBar class 231 DataField 235 DataReadOnly 235 DataSource 235 TAbDBHBar.DataField property 235 TAbDBHBar.DataReadOnly property 235 TAbDBHBar.DataSource property 235 TAbDBHMeter class 201 DataField 205 DataReadOnly 205 DataSource 205 TAbDBHMeter.DataField property 205 TAbDBHMeter.DataReadOnly property 205 TAbDBHMeter.DataSource property 205 TAbDBHSlider class 181
4 DataField 185 DataReadOnly 185 DataSource 185 TAbDBHSlider.DataField property 185 TAbDBHSlider.DataReadOnly property 185 TAbDBHSlider.DataSource property 185 TAbDBLED class 244 DataField 245 DataReadOnly 245 DataSource 245 TAbDBLED.DataField property 245 TAbDBLED.DataReadOnly property 245 TAbDBLED.DataSource property 245 TAbDBRockerSwitch class 250 DataField 251 DataReadOnly 251 DataSource 251 TAbDBRockerSwitch.DataField property 251 TAbDBRockerSwitch.DataReadOnly property 251 TAbDBRockerSwitch.DataSource property 251 TAbDBTank class 240 DataField 243 DataReadOnly 243 DataSource 243 TAbDBTank.DataField property 243 TAbDBTank.DataReadOnly property 243 TAbDBTank.DataSource property 243 TAbDBThermometer class 235 DataField 239 DataReadOnly 239 DataSource 239 TAbDBThermometer.DataField property 239 TAbDBThermometer.DataReadOnly property 239 TAbDBThermometer.DataSource property 239 TAbDBToggleSwitch class 252 DataField 253 DataReadOnly 253 DataSource 253 TAbDBToggleSwitch.DataField property 253 TAbDBToggleSwitch.DataReadOnly property 253 TAbDBToggleSwitch.DataSource property 253 TAbDBValueInd class 197
Abakus VCL DataField 201 DataReadOnly 201 DataSource 201 TAbDBValueInd.DataField property 201 TAbDBValueInd.DataReadOnly property 201 TAbDBValueInd.DataSource property 201 TAbDBVBar class 227 DataField 231 DataReadOnly 231 DataSource 231 TAbDBVBar.DataField property 231 TAbDBVBar.DataReadOnly property 231 TAbDBVBar.DataSource property 231 TAbDBVMeter class 205 DataField 209 DataReadOnly 209 DataSource 210 TAbDBVMeter.DataField property 209 TAbDBVMeter.DataReadOnly property 209 TAbDBVMeter.DataSource property 210 TAbDBVSlider class 185 DataField 189 DataReadOnly 189 DataSource 190 TAbDBVSlider.DataField property 189 TAbDBVSlider.DataReadOnly property 189 TAbDBVSlider.DataSource property 190 TAbDial class 254 TAbFieldDataLink class 3 FOnDataRead 4 OnDataRead 4 TAbFieldDataLink.FOnDataRead field 4 TAbFieldDataLink.OnDataRead property 4 TAbFlash class 6 Enabled 7 ThreadPriority 7 TAbFlash.Enabled property 7 TAbFlash.ThreadPriority property 7 TAbFlashTimer class 260 AbInfo 262 TAbFlashTimer.AbInfo property 262 TAbFlexHMeter class 273
4 TAbFlexScale class 67 Angle 68 AngleMode 68 Font 68 FormatStr 68 StepLines 69 StepMulti 69 SubStepAt 69 SubStepLines 69 SubStepsVis 69 TextAlignment 70 TextOffsetX 70 TextOffsetY 70 TAbFlexScale.Angle property 68 TAbFlexScale.AngleMode property 68 TAbFlexScale.Font property 68 TAbFlexScale.FormatStr property 68 TAbFlexScale.StepLines property 69 TAbFlexScale.StepMulti property 69 TAbFlexScale.SubStepAt property 69 TAbFlexScale.SubStepLines property 69 TAbFlexScale.SubStepsVis property 69 TAbFlexScale.TextAlignment property 70 TAbFlexScale.TextOffsetX property 70 TAbFlexScale.TextOffsetY property 70 TAbFlexVMeter class 274 TAbGearDial class 276 BevelGearDial 279 PointerSize 279 PointerType 279 RotAngle 280 StartAngle 280 TAbGearDial.BevelGearDial property 279 TAbGearDial.PointerSize property 279 TAbGearDial.PointerType property 279 TAbGearDial.RotAngle property 280 TAbGearDial.StartAngle property 280 TAbGradient class 281 GradSettings 282 TAbGradient.GradSettings property 282 TAbGradSettings class 97 ColorFrom 98
Abakus VCL ColorTo 98 Style 99 Visible 99 TAbGradSettings.ColorFrom property 98 TAbGradSettings.ColorTo property 98 TAbGradSettings.Style property 99 TAbGradSettings.Visible property 99 TAbGraphicControl class 77 AbInfo 77 OnContextPopup 78 PopupMenu 78 TAbGraphicControl.AbInfo property 77 TAbGraphicControl.OnContextPopup property 78 TAbGraphicControl.PopupMenu property 78 TAbHBar class 283 AutoSize 286 BarSettings 286 BevelInner 286 BevelOuter 286 BevelValue 286 FontValue 287 Options 287 TAbHBar.AutoSize property 286 TAbHBar.BarSettings property 286 TAbHBar.BevelInner property 286 TAbHBar.BevelOuter property 286 TAbHBar.BevelValue property 286 TAbHBar.FontValue property 287 TAbHBar.Options property 287 TAbHMeter class 289 AutoSize 293 BevelInner 293 BevelOuter 293 FontUnit 293 Options 294 ScaleSettings 294 TAbHMeter.AutoSize property 293 TAbHMeter.BevelInner property 293 TAbHMeter.BevelOuter property 293 TAbHMeter.FontUnit property 293 TAbHMeter.Options property 294 TAbHMeter.ScaleSettings property 294
4 TAbHSlider class 296 BevelOuter 300 ButtonSize 300 ColorTrench 300 Options 301 ScaleSettings 301 TAbHSlider.BevelOuter property 300 TAbHSlider.ButtonSize property 300 TAbHSlider.ColorTrench property 300 TAbHSlider.Options property 301 TAbHSlider.ScaleSettings property 301 TAbIndRectDlg class 304 TAbInfo class 8 Copyright 9 Mail 9 pName 10 pVersion 10 WWW 10 TAbInfo.Copyright property 9 TAbInfo.Mail property 9 TAbInfo.pName property 10 TAbInfo.pVersion property 10 TAbInfo.WWW property 10 TAbInfoEditor class 303 TAbInfoForm class 303 TAbLabel class 305 Align 307 DefaultText 307 Digit 307 DigitText 307 Font 308 Height 308 OnClick 308 OnDblClick 308 OnDragDrop 308 OnDragOver 309 OnEndDrag 309 OnMouseDown 309 OnMouseUp 309 OnStartDrag 309 Spacing 310 TextPosH 310
Abakus VCL TextPosV 310 Visible 310 Width 310 TAbLabel.Align property 307 TAbLabel.DefaultText property 307 TAbLabel.Digit property 307 TAbLabel.DigitText property 307 TAbLabel.Font property 308 TAbLabel.Height property 308 TAbLabel.OnClick property 308 TAbLabel.OnDblClick property 308 TAbLabel.OnDragDrop property 308 TAbLabel.OnDragOver property 309 TAbLabel.OnEndDrag property 309 TAbLabel.OnMouseDown property 309 TAbLabel.OnMouseUp property 309 TAbLabel.OnStartDrag property 309 TAbLabel.Spacing property 310 TAbLabel.TextPosH property 310 TAbLabel.TextPosV property 310 TAbLabel.Visible property 310 TAbLabel.Width property 310 TAbLED class 311 TAbLineSettings class 62 Length 63 Offset 63 Pen 63 Visible 63 TAbLineSettings.Length property 63 TAbLineSettings.Offset property 63 TAbLineSettings.Pen property 63 TAbLineSettings.Visible property 63 TAbMiniTrend class 313 TAbNumEdit class 317 AbInfo 320 Anchors 320 AutoSelect 320 AutoSize 321 ColorDefault 321 ColorEditing 321 ColorError 321 Constraints 322
4 Ctl3D 322 DigitsBool 322 DigitsHex 322 DragCursor 322 DragMode 323 EditBase 323 EditorEnabled 323 Enabled 323 Font 323 FormatStr 323 Increment 324 MaxLength 324 MaxValue 324 TAbNumEdit.AbInfo property 320 TAbNumEdit.Anchors property 320 TAbNumEdit.AutoSelect property 320 TAbNumEdit.AutoSize property 321 TAbNumEdit.ColorDefault property 321 TAbNumEdit.ColorEditing property 321 TAbNumEdit.ColorError property 321 TAbNumEdit.Constraints property 322 TAbNumEdit.Ctl3D property 322 TAbNumEdit.DigitsBool property 322 TAbNumEdit.DigitsHex property 322 TAbNumEdit.DragCursor property 322 TAbNumEdit.DragMode property 323 TAbNumEdit.EditBase property 323 TAbNumEdit.EditorEnabled property 323 TAbNumEdit.Enabled property 323 TAbNumEdit.Font property 323 TAbNumEdit.FormatStr property 323 TAbNumEdit.Increment property 324 TAbNumEdit.MaxLength property 324 TAbNumEdit.MaxValue property 324 TAbNumSpin class 324 Interval 327 StartDelay 327 TAbNumSpin.Interval property 327 TAbNumSpin.StartDelay property 327 TAbOffset class 59 Bottom 60 Left 60
Abakus VCL Right 60 Top 60 TAbOffset.Bottom property 60 TAbOffset.Left property 60 TAbOffset.Right property 60 TAbOffset.Top property 60 TAbOperatingPoint class 341 TAbOpHourCounter class 332 BevelInner 336 BevelOuter 336 Count 336 CountDown 336 HourDigits 337 hr 335 Indicate 337 IniSettings 337 isLimit 335 isZero 335 Limit 337 mi 335 OnLimit 337 OnZero 338 Options 338 PresetValue 338 se 336 SeparatorChar 338 SeparatorHour 338 SeparatorMin 338 SeparatorSec 339 TAbOpHourCounter.BevelInner property 336 TAbOpHourCounter.BevelOuter property 336 TAbOpHourCounter.Count property 336 TAbOpHourCounter.CountDown property 336 TAbOpHourCounter.HourDigits property 337 TAbOpHourCounter.hr field 335 TAbOpHourCounter.Indicate property 337 TAbOpHourCounter.IniSettings property 337 TAbOpHourCounter.isLimit field 335 TAbOpHourCounter.isZero field 335 TAbOpHourCounter.Limit property 337 TAbOpHourCounter.mi field 335 TAbOpHourCounter.OnLimit property 337
4 TAbOpHourCounter.OnZero property 338 TAbOpHourCounter.Options property 338 TAbOpHourCounter.PresetValue property 338 TAbOpHourCounter.se field 336 TAbOpHourCounter.SeparatorChar property 338 TAbOpHourCounter.SeparatorHour property 338 TAbOpHourCounter.SeparatorMin property 338 TAbOpHourCounter.SeparatorSec property 339 TAbPanel class 343 TAbPersistent class 58 OnChange 59 TAbPersistent.OnChange property 59 TAbRMeter class 361 TAbRockerSwitch class 377 TAbRScale class 363 TAbSBevel class 99 BevelLine 101 Color 101 ColorHighLightFrom 101 ColorHighLightTo 101 ColorShadowFrom 101 ColorShadowTo 102 Offset 102 PenColor 102 Spacing 102 Style 102 SurfaceGrad 103 Width 103 TAbSBevel.BevelLine property 101 TAbSBevel.Color property 101 TAbSBevel.ColorHighLightFrom property 101 TAbSBevel.ColorHighLightTo property 101 TAbSBevel.ColorShadowFrom property 101 TAbSBevel.ColorShadowTo property 102 TAbSBevel.Offset property 102 TAbSBevel.PenColor property 102 TAbSBevel.Spacing property 102 TAbSBevel.Style property 102 TAbSBevel.SurfaceGrad property 103 TAbSBevel.Width property 103 TAbScale class 64 Angle 65
Abakus VCL AngleMode 65 Font 65 StepLines 66 SubStepLines 66 Text 66 TextAlignment 66 TextOffsetX 66 TextOffsetY 67 TAbScale.Angle property 65 TAbScale.AngleMode property 65 TAbScale.Font property 65 TAbScale.StepLines property 66 TAbScale.SubStepLines property 66 TAbScale.Text property 66 TAbScale.TextAlignment property 66 TAbScale.TextOffsetX property 66 TAbScale.TextOffsetY property 67 TAbSpinButton class 81 AbInfo 84 Align 84 Anchors 84 Constraints 85 Ctl3D 85 DownGlyph 85 DownNumGlyphs 86 DragCursor 86 DragKind 86 DragMode 86 Enabled 86 FocusControl 87 Interval 87 Loaded 84 OnDownClick 87 OnDragDrop 87 OnDragOver 87 OnEndDock 88 OnEndDrag 88 OnEnter 88 OnExit 88 OnStartDock 88 OnStartDrag 89 OnUpClick 89
4 ParentCtl3D 89 ParentShowHint 89 PopupMenu 89 ShowHint 90 StartDelay 90 TabOrder 90 TabStop 90 UpGlyph 90 UpNumGlyphs 91 Visible 91 TAbSpinButton.AbInfo property 84 TAbSpinButton.Align property 84 TAbSpinButton.Anchors property 84 TAbSpinButton.Constraints property 85 TAbSpinButton.Ctl3D property 85 TAbSpinButton.DownGlyph property 85 TAbSpinButton.DownNumGlyphs property 86 TAbSpinButton.DragCursor property 86 TAbSpinButton.DragKind property 86 TAbSpinButton.DragMode property 86 TAbSpinButton.Enabled property 86 TAbSpinButton.FocusControl property 87 TAbSpinButton.Interval property 87 TAbSpinButton.Loaded method 84 TAbSpinButton.OnDownClick property 87 TAbSpinButton.OnDragDrop property 87 TAbSpinButton.OnDragOver property 87 TAbSpinButton.OnEndDock property 88 TAbSpinButton.OnEndDrag property 88 TAbSpinButton.OnEnter property 88 TAbSpinButton.OnExit property 88 TAbSpinButton.OnStartDock property 88 TAbSpinButton.OnStartDrag property 89 TAbSpinButton.OnUpClick property 89 TAbSpinButton.ParentCtl3D property 89 TAbSpinButton.ParentShowHint property 89 TAbSpinButton.PopupMenu property 89 TAbSpinButton.ShowHint property 90 TAbSpinButton.StartDelay property 90 TAbSpinButton.TabOrder property 90 TAbSpinButton.TabStop property 90 TAbSpinButton.UpGlyph property 90
Abakus VCL TAbSpinButton.UpNumGlyphs property 91 TAbSpinButton.Visible property 91 TAbSwitch class 375 BevelOuter 376 BtnBevelWidth 377 BtnColorFace 377 BtnColorHighlight 377 BtnColorShadow 377 TAbSwitch.BevelOuter property 376 TAbSwitch.BtnBevelWidth property 377 TAbSwitch.BtnColorFace property 377 TAbSwitch.BtnColorHighlight property 377 TAbSwitch.BtnColorShadow property 377 TAbTank class 384 BevelValue 387 FontUnitCol 387 Options 387 PPH 388 PPHColor 388 TankSettings 388 VIndOffsX 388 VIndOffsY 388 TAbTank.BevelValue property 387 TAbTank.FontUnitCol property 387 TAbTank.Options property 387 TAbTank.PPH property 388 TAbTank.PPHColor property 388 TAbTank.TankSettings property 388 TAbTank.VIndOffsX property 388 TAbTank.VIndOffsY property 388 TAbText class 70 Font 71 OffsetX 71 OffsetY 72 Pos 72 Text 72 Visible 72 TAbText.Font property 71 TAbText.OffsetX property 71 TAbText.OffsetY property 72 TAbText.Pos property 72 TAbText.Text property 72
4 TAbText.Visible property 72 TAbThermometer class 391 AutoSize 395 BarSettings 395 BevelInner 395 BevelOuter 396 BevelValue 396 FontValue 396 Options 396 ScaleSettings 396 ScaleSpacing 397 TAbThermometer.AutoSize property 395 TAbThermometer.BarSettings property 395 TAbThermometer.BevelInner property 395 TAbThermometer.BevelOuter property 396 TAbThermometer.BevelValue property 396 TAbThermometer.FontValue property 396 TAbThermometer.Options property 396 TAbThermometer.ScaleSettings property 396 TAbThermometer.ScaleSpacing property 397 TAbThread class 6 Terminated 6 TAbThread.Terminated property 6 TAbTimerSpeedBtn class 80 AbInfo 80 Interval 80 StartDelay 81 TimerEnabled 81 TAbTimerSpeedBtn.AbInfo property 80 TAbTimerSpeedBtn.Interval property 80 TAbTimerSpeedBtn.StartDelay property 81 TAbTimerSpeedBtn.TimerEnabled property 81 TAbToggleSwitch class 379 TAbTrend class 407 AbsScaleCh 421 AddDigit 412 AddSeparator 413 AddValue 413 BevelInner 422 BevelOuter 422 CaptionFont 422 Channel1 422
Abakus VCL Channel2 422 Channel3 423 Channel4 423 Channel5 423 Channel6 423 Channel7 423 Channel8 424 ClearRecords 414 ColorCursorLine 424 ColorGrid 424 ColorSeparator 424 ColorTime 424 CursorLine 425 CursorLinePenMode 425 DeleteRecords 414 DigitToValue 414 DrawCursorLine 415 FillChannelNo 425 FindMinMax 415 Flow 425 GetData 415 GridXPixel 425 GridYSteps 426 Interval 426 Interval2 426 LeftScaleCh 426 LimitLower 426 LimitUpper 427 LoadFromFile 416 LoadFromFileEx 416 MaxRecords 427 MoveX 416 MoveY 417 OnInterval 427 OnMaxRecords 427 OnNewCursorPos 427 OnRecNoChanged 428 Options 428 PaintRecords 417 ReadDigit 417 ReadRecTime 418 ReadValue 418
4 RecordInfo 428 RunInterval2 419 SavePartToFile 419 SaveToFile 420 SetCursorLine 420 SetYDefault 420 StartRecording 428 TimeFormat 428 ValueAtCursor 429 ValueToDigit 420 ZoomY 421 ZoomYIn 421 ZoomYOut 421 TAbTrend.AbsScaleCh property 421 TAbTrend.AddDigit method 412 TAbTrend.AddSeparator method 413 TAbTrend.AddValue method 413 TAbTrend.BevelInner property 422 TAbTrend.BevelOuter property 422 TAbTrend.CaptionFont property 422 TAbTrend.Channel1 property 422 TAbTrend.Channel2 property 422 TAbTrend.Channel3 property 423 TAbTrend.Channel4 property 423 TAbTrend.Channel5 property 423 TAbTrend.Channel6 property 423 TAbTrend.Channel7 property 423 TAbTrend.Channel8 property 424 TAbTrend.ClearRecords method 414 TAbTrend.ColorCursorLine property 424 TAbTrend.ColorGrid property 424 TAbTrend.ColorSeparator property 424 TAbTrend.ColorTime property 424 TAbTrend.CursorLine property 425 TAbTrend.CursorLinePenMode property 425 TAbTrend.DeleteRecords method 414 TAbTrend.DigitToValue method 414 TAbTrend.DrawCursorLine method 415 TAbTrend.FillChannelNo property 425 TAbTrend.FindMinMax method 415 TAbTrend.Flow property 425 TAbTrend.GetData method 415
Abakus VCL TAbTrend.GridXPixel property 425 TAbTrend.GridYSteps property 426 TAbTrend.Interval property 426 TAbTrend.Interval2 property 426 TAbTrend.LeftScaleCh property 426 TAbTrend.LimitLower property 426 TAbTrend.LimitUpper property 427 TAbTrend.LoadFromFile method 416 TAbTrend.LoadFromFileEx method 416 TAbTrend.MaxRecords property 427 TAbTrend.MoveX method 416 TAbTrend.MoveY method 417 TAbTrend.OnInterval property 427 TAbTrend.OnMaxRecords property 427 TAbTrend.OnNewCursorPos property 427 TAbTrend.OnRecNoChanged property 428 TAbTrend.Options property 428 TAbTrend.PaintRecords method 417 TAbTrend.ReadDigit method 417 TAbTrend.ReadRecTime method 418 TAbTrend.ReadValue method 418 TAbTrend.RecordInfo property 428 TAbTrend.RunInterval2 method 419 TAbTrend.SavePartToFile method 419 TAbTrend.SaveToFile method 420 TAbTrend.SetCursorLine method 420 TAbTrend.SetYDefault method 420 TAbTrend.StartRecording property 428 TAbTrend.TimeFormat property 428 TAbTrend.ValueAtCursor property 429 TAbTrend.ValueToDigit method 420 TAbTrend.ZoomY method 421 TAbTrend.ZoomYIn method 421 TAbTrend.ZoomYOut method 421 TAbValInd class 72 Bevel 73 Caption 74 Color 74 Font 74 FormatStr 74 OffsetX 74 OffsetY 75
4 TxtSpacing 75 Visible 75 TAbValInd.Bevel property 73 TAbValInd.Caption property 74 TAbValInd.Color property 74 TAbValInd.Font property 74 TAbValInd.FormatStr property 74 TAbValInd.OffsetX property 74 TAbValInd.OffsetY property 75 TAbValInd.TxtSpacing property 75 TAbValInd.Visible property 75 TAbValueInd class 441 AutoSize 444 BevelInner 444 BevelOuter 444 BevelValue 444 FontValue 445 Options 445 TAbValueInd.AutoSize property 444 TAbValueInd.BevelInner property 444 TAbValueInd.BevelOuter property 444 TAbValueInd.BevelValue property 444 TAbValueInd.FontValue property 445 TAbValueInd.Options property 445 TAbVBar class 432 AutoSize 435 BarSettings 436 BevelInner 436 BevelOuter 436 BevelValue 436 FontValue 436 Options 437 TAbVBar.AutoSize property 435 TAbVBar.BarSettings property 436 TAbVBar.BevelInner property 436 TAbVBar.BevelOuter property 436 TAbVBar.BevelValue property 436 TAbVBar.FontValue property 436 TAbVBar.Options property 437 TAbVCInd class 439 TAbVMeter class 447 AutoSize 451
Abakus VCL BevelInner 451 BevelOuter 451 BevelValue 452 FontValue 452 Options 452 ScaleSettings 452 TAbVMeter.AutoSize property 451 TAbVMeter.BevelInner property 451 TAbVMeter.BevelOuter property 451 TAbVMeter.BevelValue property 452 TAbVMeter.FontValue property 452 TAbVMeter.Options property 452 TAbVMeter.ScaleSettings property 452 TAbVSlider class 455 BevelOuter 459 BevelValue 459 ButtonSize 459 ColorTrench 460 FontValue 460 Options 460 ScaleSettings 460 TAbVSlider.BevelOuter property 459 TAbVSlider.BevelValue property 459 TAbVSlider.ButtonSize property 459 TAbVSlider.ColorTrench property 460 TAbVSlider.FontValue property 460 TAbVSlider.Options property 460 TAbVSlider.ScaleSettings property 460 TArrowSettings class 91 ColorBrush 92 ColorCP1Brush 92 ColorCP1Pen 93 ColorCP2Brush 93 ColorCP2Pen 93 ColorPen 93 Shape 93 TArrowSettings.ColorBrush property 92 TArrowSettings.ColorCP1Brush property 92 TArrowSettings.ColorCP1Pen property 93 TArrowSettings.ColorCP2Brush property 93 TArrowSettings.ColorCP2Pen property 93 TArrowSettings.ColorPen property 93
4 TArrowSettings.Shape property 93 TBarSettings class 107 Bevel 108 BkAuto 108 BkBrightness 108 BkColor 108 Color 108 Font 109 minHeight 109 minWidth 109 Options 109 Style 109 TBarSettings.Bevel property 108 TBarSettings.BkAuto property 108 TBarSettings.BkBrightness property 108 TBarSettings.BkColor property 108 TBarSettings.Color property 108 TBarSettings.Font property 109 TBarSettings.minHeight property 109 TBarSettings.minWidth property 109 TBarSettings.Options property 109 TBarSettings.Style property 109 TChSettings class 115 Color 116 Digit 117 OnValueChange 117 PenWidth 117 Value 117 Visible 117 TChSettings.Color property 116 TChSettings.Digit property 117 TChSettings.OnValueChange property 117 TChSettings.PenWidth property 117 TChSettings.Value property 117 TChSettings.Visible property 117 TIndRect class 341 TIniSettings class 75 AutoLoadSave 76 FileName 76 OnHandleIniEvent 76 Section 76 UseAppDir 77
Abakus VCL TIniSettings.AutoLoadSave property 76 TIniSettings.FileName property 76 TIniSettings.OnHandleIniEvent event 76 TIniSettings.Section property 76 TIniSettings.UseAppDir property 77 TLED class 94 ColorOff 94 ColorOn 95 Height 95 Shape 95 Width 95 TLED.ColorOff property 94 TLED.ColorOn property 95 TLED.Height property 95 TLED.Shape property 95 TLED.Width property 95 TLegend class 348 AbInfo 351 BkColor 351 DrawTrendBmp 350 ExPrintTrend 350 Font 351 FontSize 352 FontSizeCaption 352 Format 352 Height 352 Legend 353 LogPixelScreen 353 OnAfterBeginDoc 353 OnBeforeEndDoc 353 OnSettingsChange 353 Options 354 OuterBorder 354 PreviewPaintBox 354 PreviewZoom 354 PrintTrend 351 RecFrom 355 RecTo 355 ScaleSpacing 355 TimeScaleSteps 355 Trend 355 TrendSpace 356
4 Width 356 TLegend.AbInfo property 351 TLegend.BkColor property 351 TLegend.DrawTrendBmp method 350 TLegend.ExPrintTrend method 350 TLegend.Font property 351 TLegend.FontSize property 352 TLegend.FontSizeCaption property 352 TLegend.Format property 352 TLegend.Height property 352 TLegend.Legend property 353 TLegend.LogPixelScreen property 353 TLegend.OnAfterBeginDoc property 353 TLegend.OnBeforeEndDoc property 353 TLegend.OnSettingsChange property 353 TLegend.Options property 354 TLegend.OuterBorder property 354 TLegend.PreviewPaintBox property 354 TLegend.PreviewZoom property 354 TLegend.PrintTrend method 351 TLegend.RecFrom property 355 TLegend.RecTo property 355 TLegend.ScaleSpacing property 355 TLegend.TimeScaleSteps property 355 TLegend.Trend property 355 TLegend.TrendSpace property 356 TLegend.Width property 356 TLegendCaptions class 346 ChannelNo 347 lUnit 347 Max 347 MaxTime 347 Min 347 MinTime 348 Name1 348 Name2 348 TLegendCaptions.ChannelNo property 347 TLegendCaptions.lUnit property 347 TLegendCaptions.Max property 347 TLegendCaptions.MaxTime property 347 TLegendCaptions.Min property 347 TLegendCaptions.MinTime property 348
Abakus VCL TLegendCaptions.Name1 property 348 TLegendCaptions.Name2 property 348 TMinMax class 112 Max 113 MaxColor 113 MaxDateTime 114 MaxVisible 114 Min 114 MinColor 114 MinDateTime 114 MinVisible 115 UseSectorCol 115 TMinMax.Max property 113 TMinMax.MaxColor property 113 TMinMax.MaxDateTime property 114 TMinMax.MaxVisible property 114 TMinMax.Min property 114 TMinMax.MinColor property 114 TMinMax.MinDateTime property 114 TMinMax.MinVisible property 115 TMinMax.UseSectorCol property 115 TRecInfo class 401 FirstDisplayedRec 402 FirstRecord 402 LastDisplayedRec 402 LastRecord 403 TotalRecords 403 TRecInfo.FirstDisplayedRec property 402 TRecInfo.FirstRecord property 402 TRecInfo.LastDisplayedRec property 402 TRecInfo.LastRecord property 403 TRecInfo.TotalRecords property 403 TScaleSettings class 135 Color 137 DrawLine 137 Font 137 PointerColor 137 PosLeftTop 137 Steps 138 SubSteps 138 ValueFormat 138 ValueFormatLog 138
4 TScaleSettings.Color property 137 TScaleSettings.DrawLine property 137 TScaleSettings.Font property 137 TScaleSettings.PointerColor property 137 TScaleSettings.PosLeftTop property 137 TScaleSettings.Steps property 138 TScaleSettings.SubSteps property 138 TScaleSettings.ValueFormat property 138 TScaleSettings.ValueFormatLog property 138 TSectorSettings class 103 Offset 104 Sector1Color 105 Sector1From 105 Sector1To 105 Sector2Color 105 Sector2From 105 Sector2To 106 Sector3Color 106 Sector3From 106 Sector3To 106 WidthOffset 106 TSectorSettings.Offset property 104 TSectorSettings.Sector1Color property 105 TSectorSettings.Sector1From property 105 TSectorSettings.Sector1To property 105 TSectorSettings.Sector2Color property 105 TSectorSettings.Sector2From property 105 TSectorSettings.Sector2To property 106 TSectorSettings.Sector3Color property 106 TSectorSettings.Sector3From property 106 TSectorSettings.Sector3To property 106 TSectorSettings.WidthOffset property 106 TSignalSettings class 110 DigitalFrom 111 DigitalTo 111 Name1 111 Name2 111 ValueFormat 111 ValueFrom 112 ValueTo 112 ValueUnit 112 TSignalSettings.DigitalFrom property 111
Abakus VCL TSignalSettings.DigitalTo property 111 TSignalSettings.Name1 property 111 TSignalSettings.Name2 property 111 TSignalSettings.ValueFormat property 111 TSignalSettings.ValueFrom property 112 TSignalSettings.ValueTo property 112 TSignalSettings.ValueUnit property 112 TTankSettings class 381 BkColor 382 Color 383 CraterWidth 383 OnChange 383 OnChange2 383 PenColor 383 PenWidth 384 Style 384 TTankSettings.BkColor property 382 TTankSettings.Color property 383 TTankSettings.CraterWidth property 383 TTankSettings.OnChange property 383 TTankSettings.OnChange2 property 383 TTankSettings.PenColor property 383 TTankSettings.PenWidth property 384 TTankSettings.Style property 384 TTimerThread class 7 TTimeSetting class 331 Hour 332 Min 332 Sec 332 TTimeSetting.Hour property 332 TTimeSetting.Min property 332 TTimeSetting.Sec property 332 TTrendLimit class 400 Color 401 Enabled 401 Filled 401 Value 401 TTrendLimit.Color property 401 TTrendLimit.Enabled property 401 TTrendLimit.Filled property 401 TTrendLimit.Value property 401 TVAtCursor class 403
4 DataValid 404 FValueCh 404 RecordNo 405 Time 405 ValueCh1 405 ValueCh2 405 ValueCh3 405 ValueCh4 406 ValueCh5 406 ValueCh6 406 ValueCh7 406 ValueCh8 406 TVAtCursor.DataValid property 404 TVAtCursor.FValueCh field 404 TVAtCursor.RecordNo property 405 TVAtCursor.Time property 405 TVAtCursor.ValueCh1 property 405 TVAtCursor.ValueCh2 property 405 TVAtCursor.ValueCh3 property 405 TVAtCursor.ValueCh4 property 406 TVAtCursor.ValueCh5 property 406 TVAtCursor.ValueCh6 property 406 TVAtCursor.ValueCh7 property 406 TVAtCursor.ValueCh8 property 406
Abakus VCL
V
VCL_Overview 1

Abakus VCL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Abakus VCL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Abakus VCL

Delphi & C++Builder components for virtual instrumentation.

Copyright (c) 2012. All rights reserved.

Table of Contents VCL_Overview Symbol Reference

AbSwitch.pas AbTank.pas AbThMet.pas AbTrend.pas AbVBar.pas AbVCInd.pas AbVInd.pas AbVMeter.pas AbVSlide.pas

472 473 473 473 473 473 474 474 474

TAbOpHourCounter ( TAbLabel ( TAbBevel ( TAbPanel (

TAbTimerSpeedBtn ( TAbSpinButton ( TAbNumEdit ( TAbNumSpin ( TAbValueInd ( TAbBar ( TAbVBar ( TAbHBar (

see page 81) , Spin-Button

see page 150) , TAbDBBar (

see page 432) , TAbDBVBar ( see page 283) , TAbDBHBar (

TAbThermometer ( Value-indication TAbTank (

see page 391) , TAbDBThermometer (

see page 384) , TAbDBTank (

see page 289) , TAbDBHMeter ( see page 447) , TAbDBVMeter (

TAb120Meter ( TAb180Meter ( TAb270Meter ( TAbCompass ( TAbVCInd (

TAbOperatingPoint ( TAbMiniTrend ( TAbTrend (

see page 313) , 2 Channel Trend display

see page 254) , TAbDBDial (

see page 276) , TAbDBGearDial ( see page 296) , TAbDBHSlider (

see page 181) , Horizontal Slider (Value adjuster) 1

1 TAbVSlider ( TAbLED ( switch) see page 455) , TAbDBVSlider (

Abakus VCL see page 185) , Vertical Slider (Value adjuster)

see page 311) , TAbDBLED (

see page 159) , TAbDBColBitBtn (

see page 377) , TAbDBRockerSwitch ( see page 377) , TAbDBToggleSwitch (

2.1 _AbDB Namespace

2.1.1.1 TAbFieldDataLink Class

2.1 _AbDB Namespace published Name OnDataRead ( see page 4)

Structs, Records, Enums

2.1.2 Structs, Records, Enums

2.2 _AbFlash Namespace

2.1.2.1 _AbDB.TDType Enumeration

2.2 _AbFlash Namespace

2.2 _AbFlash Namespace

2.2.1.1 TAbThread Class

2.2.1.2 TAbFlash Class

Description Enables the timer The Thread priority

Description Enables the timer The Thread priority

2.2.1.2.1.2 TAbFlash.ThreadPriority Property

2.2.1.3 TTimerThread Class

Description True if thread is terminated

Description True if thread is terminated

2.3 _AbInfo Namespace

2.3.1.1 TAbInfo Class

2.3.1.1.1.2 TAbInfo.Mail Property

2.3 _AbInfo Namespace

2.3.1.1.1.3 TAbInfo.pName Property

2.3.1.1.1.4 TAbInfo.pVersion Property

2.3.1.1.1.5 TAbInfo.WWW Property

2.3.2.1 _AbInfo.LoadAbakusInfo Function

2.3.2.2 _AbInfo.tn Function

2.4 _AbProc Namespace

2.3.3.1 _AbInfo.AbInfo Variable

2.3.4.1 _AbInfo.Reg Constant

2.4 _AbProc Namespace

see page 52)

AbakusRootKey ( AbakusKeyPath ( crHand ( Functions Name

see page 53)

AbSingleToBin ( AbBinToLWord ( AbBinToInt (

AbBinToSingle ( AbSaveFormPos ( AbLoadFormPos ( AbRoundSector ( AbArrowDraw ( AbHorizScala ( CalcTotalDigit (

AbCalcLogStr ( AbLogRangeStr ( AbRemoveSign ( AbTextOut (

see page 25)